HomeMy WebLinkAboutMech/Elect project manual-2000/Media center WOLD ARCHITECTS AND ENGINEERS
305 ST.0 PETER STREET
� ST.PAUL,MN 55102
FAX: 612.223.5646 TEL: 612.227.7773
25 SOUTH GROVE AVENUE,SUITE 500
ELGIN,IL 60120
FAX: 847.608.2654 TEL: 847.608.2600
i
ORONO MEDIA CENTER
REMODEL
OLD MIDDLE SCHOOL
INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT #278
SHAKOPEE MINNESOTA
MECHANICAL/
1 ELECTRICAL PROJECT
L MANUAL
BOOK 2OF2
March 21 , 2000
Set No. Project No. 99132
CP-2
W 0 L D A R C H I T E C T S A N D E N G I N E E R S
MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section No. Title
Division Fifteen
15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements
15025 Reference Standards and Definitions
15030 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
15100 Valves
15135 Meters and Gages
15140 Supports and Anchors
15190 Mechanical Identification
15250 Mechanical Insulation
15300 Fire Protection
15411 Water Distribution Piping
15412 Sanitary Drainage and Vent Systems
15413 Storm Drainage Systems
15440 Plumbing Fixtures
15520 Steam and Condensate Piping
x"5530 Refrigerant Piping
15670 Condensing Units
15830 Heating Terminal Units
15850 Air Handling
15854 Central-Station Air Handling Units
15891 Ductwork
15910 Ductwork Accessories
15932 Grilles,Registers and Diffusers
15973 Pneumatic Control Systems
15990 Testing,Adjusting and Balancing
15995 Project Closeout_
MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
j� A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification sections,apply to this and all other sections of Division 15.
1.02 SCOPE
A. All work shall conform in all respects with the requirements of these contract documents. All labor shall be
performed by laborers skilled in their respective trades.
B. It is the intent of these contract documents to form a guide for a complete installation. Everything necessary for a
complete and successful installation of work shall be provided.
C. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for mechanical installations. The
following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements
specified in Division 1:
1. Description of work
2. Interpretation of plans
3. Submittals
4. Coordination drawings
5. Record documents
6. Maintenance manuals
7. Delivery,storage and handling
8. Fire safety precautions
9. Personal safety requirements
10. Demolition
PART 2: PRODUCTS
(Not applicable)
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work included under Division 15 shall consist of fiirmshmg all labor,materials, equipment and services necessary
for the complete installation of all mechanical work shown on drawings and specified within. In general, this
includes all plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, fire protection and building temperature
control/automation systems.
B. Include all minor items which are necessary to complete the installation even though not specifically mentioned in
the Contract Documents. Such items include anchors, brackets, sleeves, piping drains, air vents, valves, steam
condensate drip assemblies.
15010-1 No.99132-CP2
C. Some equipment and materials provided under Division 15 will require composite work crews because of trade
jurisdiction. Where this occurs, the Contractor shall include in his price his portion of the composite crew labor
costs. It is the Contractor's responsibility to review Division 15 Contract Documents to determine where these
composite crews are required.
D. Before submitting a proposal on work contemplated, each bidder shall examine the site and thoroughly familiarize
himself with all existing conditions and limitations affecting the performance of his work. No extra compensation
will be allowed because of the Contractor's misunderstanding as to the-amount of work involved or his lack of
knowledge of any existing conditions.
E. Staging and phasing of all mechanical work shall be coordinated with the prime Contractor. In areas where work
involved may interfere with existing building fimctions, the Owner and Engineer shall be consulted so schedules
can be set up acceptable to all concerned.
F. All installations will conform to all local,state and national codes pertaining to work involved.
G. All permits,licenses,fees and service charges,both temporary and permanent,necessary for the work specified will
be secured and paid for by this contractor.
H. Contract figures shall include State and Local Sales Taxes. Keep accurate records of these taxes and furnish such
records to the Owner upon demand.
I. The contractor will assume responsibility for and guarantee all work,materials and equipment for a period of one
year from date of acceptance, except where a longer period of time is specified elsewhere, without cost to the
Owner.
3.02 INTERPRETATION OF PLANS
A. In general,the Drawings of mechanical systems and equipment are to scale. However,to determine exact locations
of walls and partitions, the Contractor shall consult the architectural and/or structural Drawings which are
dimensioned. Drawings shall not take precedence over field measurements.
B. Plans of m and ductwork although shown on scale Drawings are diagrammatic
piping gh g g�rammatic only. They are intended to
indicate size and/or capacity where stipulated, approximate location and/or direction, and approximate general
arrangement of one phase of work to another, but not the exact detail of construction. All ductwork will be
constructed from field its taken by the mechanical contractor at the site. This shall include all rises,
drops and offsets necessary to avoid structural members or equipment and materials installed by other trades. The
mechanical contractor shall coordinate the ductwork and piping layout before construction. No additional costs will
be allowed for piping and ductwork fabrications without field verification of available space. If it is found,before
installation, that a more convenient, suitable or workable arrangement of any or all phases of construction would
result by altering the arrangement indicated on the Drawings,the architect/engineer may require the contractor to
change the arrangement of his work without additional cost to the owner.
C. The drawings and specifications are intended to supplement each other. Any items shown on the drawings and not
mentioned in the specifications,or vice versa,shall be executed the same as if mentioned and shown. The greatest
quantity or more expensive work shall govern when there is a conflict between the drawings and specifications.
3.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 Section"Submittals."
15010-2 No.99132-CP2
B. Quantity: The number of mechanical related shop drawings,product data, and samples submitted shall be as listed
below%
1. Shop Drawings: 10 sets(blue or black line parts).
2. Product Data: 10 sets of each item.
3. Samples: 1 set,where requested.
C. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications. Two copies will be retained by
the Architect/Engineer.
D. Prior approval for substitutes of material and equipment must be submitted and received by the Engineer no later
than ten (10) calendar days prior to bid opening. Requests shall be accompanied by detailed information of the
proposed material or equipment indicating, via a line-by-line comparison, strict adherence to the specified product.
Acceptable substitutes will be included in an Addendum to the Contract Documents which will be issued before
bids are due. Acceptance of substitutes in no way relieves the Contractor of his responsibility to provide materials
and equipment which adhere to the intent of the specifications and drawings, and the minimurn quality set forth
therein.
E. If equipment other than that used in the design of this project is proposed to be used, the Contractor and supplier
shall verify electrical differences, dimension variations and weight increases. The Contractor shall be responsible
for any extra costs incurred as a result of equipment substitutions.
iF. Payment Request Cost Breakdown: For the purpose of establishing a schedule of values to be used for"Application
and Certificate for Payment," as defined in the General Conditions of the Specifications, the various categories of
Division 15 work shall be broken down according to labor,materials,bonds/permits and sales taxes.
G. Submit shop drawings to the Engineer for review within 30 calendar days after notification of award of Contract.
Shop drawings for items with critical delivery dates which could affect the progress of this project shall be
submitted immediately.
1. Submittal shall disclose capacities, weights, dimensions and arrangements of equipment and materials. Any
deviations from the Contract Documents shall be noted by the contractor or equipment supplier. The intent
and requirements of the drawings and specifications shall be adhered to and are not waived or superseded in
any way by the shop drawing submittal review.
2. Each shop drawing shall include the project name, names of the Architect, Engineer, Contractor,
Subcontractor, manufacturer and supplier. Also include the name, address and telephone number of the
contact representative.
3. Submittal shall be reviewed and stamped by the contractor before submitting to Engineer. Shop Drawings
without Contractors Review Stamp will be returned for resubmittal.
3.04 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Review contract documents and prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Article 3 of "General
Conditions (A201)" to a scale of 1/8"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of
mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components.
Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of
installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the
following:
1. Indicate the proposed locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, and materials. Include the following:
a. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
15010-3 No.99132-CP2
b. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space
for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
c. Equipment connections and support details.
d. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
e. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
f. Sizes and locations of required concrete pads and bases.
g. Valve stem movement.
h. Dimensional locations of pipe sleeves passing through floor/roof slabs.
2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during
construction.
3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their
relationship to other penetrations and installations. Indicate location of sleeves,elements of fire and/or smoke
resistive construction,and provide details of fire stopping and sealing methods for penetrations.
4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and inlets, light fixtures,
communication systems components,sprinklers,and other ceiling-mounted items.
3.05 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Record Documents."
In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, refer to specific sections for additional record
documentation.
3.06 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section"Operating,Maintenance,and Warranty Data".
Submit copies for review by Architect/Engineer. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1,include the
following information:
1. Descriptive summary of fimction,normal system operating characteristics and limitations,performance curves,
engineering data and tests,and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating
instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter
operating instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and
reassembly;aligning and adjusting instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.,
5. Warranty information for all mechanical items shall be included in one tabbed section.
6. Provide a separate tabbed section including a comprehensive maintenance planning calendar, indicating all
required scheduled maintenance tasks for a period of three years. Clearly list predicted dates for each task
with a brief description of work involved.
Note: This calendar will be used by Section 15970 contractor to program "Timely Maintenance Reminder"
software.
15010-4 No.99132-CP2
3.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. General: Follow procedures specified in Division 1 Section"Temporary Facilities".
1. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance
labels,and other information needed for identification.
2. Storage of materials and equipment shall not impede the work of other contracts.
3. Protect all components of the mechanical installation from becoming fouled or otherwise damaged in storage.
4. Handling of equipment and products shall be according to manufacturers instructions and in compliance with
the articles of their warranty.
5. Protect products from weather, unless product is slated for exterior installation. If outdoor storage is
necessary,support products off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures.
3.08 FIRE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A. The Contractors shall exercise extreme care to maintain and exercise adequate fire safety precautions throughout the
work. This shall include providing sufficient fire fighting devices, watchmen, standby helpers or other precautions
during construction,in use of temporary heat,welding,brazing,sweating,testing or other phases of work.
B. At all times,access shall be maintained for fire department trucks to the building.
C. All welding brazing,cutting and sweating operations performed in vicinity of or accessible to combustible materials
shall be adequately protected to make certain that sparks or hot slag does not reach the combustible material and
start a fire.
D. All glass, glazed materials and other finish, in the vicinity of welding, brazing and cutting, shall be masked by the
Contractor performing the welding work.
E. When necessary to do cutting,welding,brazing,sweating and similar work in vicinity of wood, in shafts, or vicinity
of any combustible material (and the combustible material cannot be removed), the materials shall be adequately
protected with fire resistant blankets or similar approved coverings. In addition, a helper shall be stationed nearby
with proper fire extinguishers(provided by the Contractor performing the work)to guard against sparks and fire.
F. Whenever combustible materials have been exposed to sparks, molten metal, hot slag or splatter, a person shall be
kept at the place of work to make sure the smoldering fires have not been started. Whenever cutting or welding
operations are carried on in a vertical pipe shaft, a person to act as a fire guard shall be employed to examine all
floors below the point of cutting or welding. This fire guard shall be kept on duty after completion of work to guard
against fires and shall examine each level after this time, prior to leaving. There shall be no exceptions to this
requirement and failure to comply will be construed as negligence.
3.09 PERSONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions required in
connection with his work, including regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA)and
other governing agencies.
15010-5 No.99132-CP2
3.10 DEMOLITION
A. Provide all labor and materials necessary for the proper completion of all items for demolition work as shown on the
project Drawings and as specified within.
B. All materials and equipment, including sheet metal-and piping which is noted to be removed and not reused, shall
become the property of the Contractor unless otherwise noted. Disposition of such equipment shall be under the
direction of the Contractor.
C. Demolition work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, removal of equipment, ductwork, piping and
related accessories as shown on the Drawings. Items that become a dead service or existing equipment not required
or essential to the successful completion and operation of the building under the terms established by the
accompanying Specifications and Drawings shall be removed. Material and equipment must be noted on the plans
"To be Abandoned"in order to leave in place.
D. Salvable materials designated to remain the property of the Owner shall be carefully removed by the applicable
trades,protected from damage,and stored as directed on the site until removed by the Owner. Such items to remain
the property of the Owner shall be noted on the Drawings and/or properly identified by the Owner with red tags at
least seven('n days prior to receipt of bids. All other salvable materials shall be the property of the Contractor.
Such materials shall not be stored on the site.
E. Any disruption or damage to existing condition of equipment not designated to be removed during demolition or
remodeling phases shall be repaired or replaced at this Contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION 15010
15010-6 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15025
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions.
B. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, other
paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms
such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used, it is to help the reader locate the reference; no
limitation on location is intended.
C. Directed: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "selected," "required," and "permitted" mean "directed by the
Architect,""requested by the Architect,"and similar phrases.
D. Regulation: The term "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities
having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
E. Furnish: The term"furnish"is used to mean"supply and deliver to the Project site,ready for unloading,unpacking,
assembly,installation,and similar operations."
F. Install: The term"install"is used to describe operations at project site including the actual"unloading,unpacking,
assembly,erection,placing, anchoring, applying,working to dimension,finishing,curing,protecting,cleaning,and
similar operations."
G. Provide: The term"provide"means"to furnish and install,complete and ready for the intended use."
H. Installer: An "Installer" is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee,
subcontractor, or sub-subcontractor, for performance of a particular construction activity, including installation,
erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are
engaged to perform
1. The term"experienced"when used with the term"Installer"means having previous Projects similar in size and
scope to this Project,being familiar with the precautions required, and having complied with requirements of
the authority having jurisdiction.
I. Project Site is the space available to the Contractor for performance of construction activities,either exclusively or
in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on
the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land upon which the Project is to be built.
J. Testing Laboratories: A "testing laboratory" is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or
tests,either at the Project Site or elsewhere,and to report on and,if required,to interpret results of those inspections
or tests.
15025-1 No.99132-CP2
1.03 SPECIFICATION CONTENT EXPLANATION
A. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions in the use of language and the intended meaning
of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are
explained as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is the abbreviated
type. Implied words and meanings will be appropriately interpreted. Singular words will be interpreted as
plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable and the full context of the Contract
Documents so indicates.
2. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the
imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the text,for clarity,subjective
language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others
when so noted. '®r
a. The words "shall be" shall be included by inference wherever a colon(:) is used within a sentence or
phrase.
1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,applicable
construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract
Documents. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a referenced standard is not specified, comply with the standard in
effect as of date of Contract Documents.
C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified, and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for mininnrm quantities or quality levels,refer requirements that are different,
but apparently equal,and uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum
provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality
specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements,
indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum,as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer
uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry
standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the
Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity,the Contractor shall
obtain copies directly from the publication source.
2. Although copies of standards needed for enforcement of requirements may be included as part of required
submittals, the Architect reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit additional copies as necessary _
for enforcement of requirements.
E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated.
Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the
recognized name of the trade association, standards generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other
entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by
Gale Research Co.,available in most libraries.
15025-2 No.99132-CP2
F. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are-frequently abbreviated. The
following acronyms or abbreviations as referenced in Contract Documents are defined to mean the associated
names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed to be but are not assured to be accurate and up
to date as of date of Contract Documents.
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
1518 K St,NW,Suite 503
Washington,DC 20005 (202)737-0202
ACI American Concrete Institute
P.O.Box 19150
Detroit,MI 48219 (313)532-2600
ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories
1725 K St.,NW
Washington,DC 20006 (202)887-5872
ADC Air Diffusion Council
230 N.Michigan Ave.,Suite 1200
Chicago,IL 60601 (312)372-9800
AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association
1101 Connecticut Ave.,NW,Suite 700
Washington,DC 20036 (202)429-5155
AGA American Gas Association
1515 Wilson Blvd.
Arlington,VA 22209 (703)841-8400
AIA American Institute of Architects
1735 New York Ave.,NW
Washington,DC 20006 (202)626-7300
AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association
475 Wolf Ledges Parkway
Akron,OH 44311 (216)762-7294
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
400 N.Michigan Ave.,8th Floor
Chicago,IL 60611 (312)670-2400
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
1133 Fifteenth St.,NW
Washington,DC 20005 (202)452-7100
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association
30 W.University Drive
Arlington Heights,IL 60004 (312)394-0150
ANSI American National Standards Institute
1430 Broadway
New York,NY 10018 (212)354-3300
15025-3 No.99132-CP2
API American Petroleum Institute
1220 L St.,NW
Washington,DC 20005 (202)682-8000
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
1501 Wilson Blvd.,6th Floor
Arlington,VA 22209 (703)524-8800
ASA Acoustical Society of America
500 Sunnyside Blvd.
Woodbury,NY 11797 (516)349-7800
ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council
1627 K Street,NW.,Suite 1000
Washington,DC 20006 (202)452-1500
ASHRAE American Society of Heating,Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle,NE
Atlanta,GA 30329 (404)636-8400
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
345 East 47th St.
New York,NY 10017 (212)705-7722
ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers
3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd.,Suite 210
Westlake,CA 91362 (805)495-7120
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering
P.O.Box 40362
Bay Village,OH 44140 (216)835-3040
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials ,
1916 Race St.
Philadelphia,PA 19103 (215)299-5400
AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
P.O.Box 849
Stevensville,MD 21666 (301)643-4163
AWS American Welding Society
P.O.Box 351040
550 LeJeune Road,NW
Miami,FL 33135 (305)443-9353
AWWA American Water Works Association
6666 W.Quincy Ave.
Denver,CO 80235 (303)794-7711
CAGI Compressed Air and Gas Institute
c/o Thomas Associates,Inc.
1230 Keith Building
Cleveland,OH 44115 (216)241-7333
15025-4 No.99132-CP2
CDA Copper Development Association
Box 1840,Greenwich Office Park 2
Greenwich,CT 06836 (203)625-8210
CGA Compressed Gas Association
Crystal Gateway#1,Suite 501
1235 Jefferson Davis Highway
Arlington,VA 22202 (703)979-0900
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
5959 Shallowford Road,Suite 419
Chattanooga,TN 37421 (615)892-0137
EIA Electronic Industries Association
1722 Eye Street,NW,Suite 300
Washington,DC 20006 (202)457-4900
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association
25 N.Broadway
Tarrytown,NY 10591 (914)332-0040
FCI Fluid Controls Institute
P.O.Box 9036
Morristown,NJ 07960 (201)829-0990
FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Organization
1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike
Norwood,MA 02062 (617)7624300
HEI Heat Exchange Institute
c%Thomas Associates,Inc.
1230 Keith Building
Cleveland,OH 44115 (216)241-7333
HI Hydronics Institute
P.O.Box 218
35 Russo Place
Berkeley Heights,NJ 07922 (201)4648200
H.I. Hydraulic Institute
712 Lakewood Center North
14600 Detroit Avenue
Cleveland,OH 44107 (216)226-7700
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
345 E.47th St.
New York,NY 10017 (212)705-7900
IRI Industrial Risk Insurers
85 Woodland St.
Hartford,CT 06102 (203)520-7300
15025-5 No.99132-CP2
ISA Instrument Society of America
67 Alexander Drive
P.O.Box 12277
Research Triangle Park,NC 27709 (919)549-8411
LIA Lead Industries Association,Inc.
292 Madison Avenue
New York,NY 10017 (212)578-4750
MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America
5410 Grosvenor Lane,Suite 120
Bethesda,MD 20814 (301)897-0770
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry
127 Park St,NE
Vienna,VA 22180 (703)281-6613
NEC National Electric Code(Now NFPA)
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association
7315 Wisconsin Ave.
Bethesda,MD 20814 (301)657-3110
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
2101 L St,NW,Suite 300
Washington,DC 20037 (202)457-8400
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
Batteryinuch Park
Quincy,MA 02169 (617)770-3000
NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association
1500 Rhode Island Ave.,NW
Washington,DC 20005 (202)462-6272
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
P.O.Box 1468
3475 Plymouth Rd.
Arm Arbor,MI 48106 (313)769-8010
NSSEA National School Supply and Equipment Association
2020 Fourteenth St.North,Suite 400
Arlington,VA 22201 (703)524-8819
PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
(c/o Saul Baker)
1106 W.77th St.,South Dr.
Indianapolis,IN 46260 (317)251-6970
SH Steel Joist Institute
1205 48th Street North,Suite A
Myrtle Beach,SC 29577 (803)449-0487
15025-6 No.99132-CP2
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association
P.O.Box 70
Merrifield,VA 22116 (703)790-9890
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau
4709 Scenic Highway
Pensacola,FL 32504 (904)434-2611
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
4400 Fifth Ave.
Pittsburgh,PA 15213 (412)268-3327
SSPMA Sump and Sewage Pump Manufacturers Association
560 W.Washington Street,Suite 301
Chicago,IL 60606 (312)332-4146
SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association
600 S.Federal Street,Suite 400
Chicago,LL 60605 (312)922-6222
TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association
29 Bank Street
Stamford,CT 06901 (203)324-7533
UL Underwriters Laboratories
333 Pfingsten Rd.
Northbrook,IL 60062 (312)272-8800
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
P.O.Box 23145
Portland,OR 97223 (503)639-0651
WSC Water Systems Council
1 600 S.Federal St.,Suite 400
Chicago,IL 60605 (312)922-6222
G. Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of federal government standard- or Specification-producing
agencies are often abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in the Contract Documents
indicate names of standard-or Specification-producing agencies of the federal government. Names and addresses
are subject to change;they are believed to be but are not assured to be accurate and up to date as of the date of the
Contract Documents.
CS Commercial Standard
(U.S.Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington,DC 20402 (202)377-2000
DOT Department of Transportation
400 Seventh St.,SW
Washington,DC 20590 (202)366-4000
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
401 M St.,SW
Washington,DC 20460 (202)382-2090
15025-7 No.99132-CP2
r FCC Federal Communications Commission
1919MSt,NW
Washington,DC 20554 (202)632-7000
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
(U.S.Department of Commerce)
Gaithersburg,MD 20899 (301)975-2000
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(U.S.Department of Labor)
Government Printing Office
Washington,DC 20402 (202)523-6091
H. State of Minnesota Government Agencies: Names and titles of federal government standard- or Specification-
producing agencies are often abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in the Contract
Documents indicate names of standard-or Specification-producing agencies of the state government. Names and
addresses are subject to change;they are believed to be but are not assured to be accurate and up to date as of the
date of the Contract Documents.
DLI Department of Labor and Industry
4th and 5th Floor
Space Center Building
444 Lafayette Road
St Paul,MN 55101 (651)296-2342
DPS Minnesota Department of Public Safety
211 Transportation Building
St Paul,MN 55155 (651)296-6642
DOA Department of Administration
50 Sherburne Avenue
200 Administration Building
St Paul,MN 55155 (651)296-3862
MDH Department of Health
717 Delaware Street S.E.
Box 9441
Minneapolis,MN 55440 (651)623-5000
MPCA Minnesota Pollution Control Agency
520 Lafayette Road North
St Paul,MN 55135 (651)296-6300 ?
1.05 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES
A. The Architect/Engineer has contacted authorities having jurisdiction where necessary to obtain information for
preparation of Contract Documents;that information may or may not be of significance to the Contractor. Contact
authorities having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having a bearing on the Work.
15025-8 No.99132-CP2
i
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications,
inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar
documents,correspondence,and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations
bearing upon performance of the Work
PART 2: PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3: EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 15025
i
i
I
�i
i
I�
15025-9 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15030
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related Sections: Separate electrical components and materials required for field installation and electrical
connections are specified in Division 16.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged
mechanical equipment. These components include, but are not limited to factory installed motors, starters, and
disconnect switches furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment.
B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical equipment are
scheduled on the Drawings.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators
B. NEMA Standard ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices,Controllers,and Assemblies.
C. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
D. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches
E. Comply with National Electrical Code(NFPA 70).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. No separate submittal is required. Submit product data for motors, starters, and other electrical components with
submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the individual equipment specification
sections.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical components and materials shall be UL labeled.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MOTORS
A. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors,more detailed and specific
requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications.
1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads.
15030-1 No.99132-CP2
2. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service
factor range.
3. 2-speed motors shall have 2 separate windings on poly-phase motors.
4. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 deg. C environment with maximum 50 deg. C temperature rise for
continuous duty at full load(Class A Insulation).
5. Starting capability: frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system, and not less than 5 evenly
time spaced starts per hour for manually controlled motors.
6. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors.
7. Motor construction: NEMA Standard MG 1,general purpose,continuous duty,Design'B",except"C"where
required for high starting torque.
a. Frames: NEMA Standard No.48 or 54;use driven equipment manufacturer's standards to suit specific
application.
b. Bearings:
1) ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals;
2) re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular
maintenance;
3) designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in
motor,
4) for fractional horsepower,light duty motors,sleeve type bearings are permitted.
c. Enclosure Type:
1) open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during
operation;
2) guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants;
3) weather protected Type I for outdoor use,Type II where not housed;
d. Overload protection: built-in thermal overload protection and,where indicated, internal sensing device
suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter.
e. Noise rating: "Quiet"
£ Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer,ratings,characteristics, construction,special
features and similar information.
F
1
15030-2 No.99132-CP2
g. Efficiency: Motor efficiency shall meet or exceed efficiency requirements for rebate program of local
utility and meet or exceed efficiency requirements as listed below. Motors shall be tested in accordance
with IEEE Standard 112,test method B:
EPAct`92
(Effective October 25,199')
NOMINAL FULL LOAD EFFICIENCY-NEMA 12-6C
ODP TEFC
Number of Poles 1200 1800 3600 1200 1800 3600
Motor Horsepower
1 80.0 82.5 X 80.0 82.5 75.5
1.5 84.0 84.0 82.5 85.5 84.0 82.5
2 85.5 84.5 84.0 86.5 84.0 84.0
3 86.5 86.5 84.0 87.5 87.5 85.5
5 87.5 87.5 85.5 87.5 87.5 87.5
7.5 88.5 88.5 87.5 89.5 89.5 88.5
10 90.2 89.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 89.5
15 90.2 91.0 89.5 90.2 91.0 90.2
20 91.0 91.0 90.2 90.2 91.0 90.2
25 91.7 91.7 91.0 91.7 92.4 91.0
30 92.4 92A 91.0 91.7 92.4 91.0
40 93.0 93.0 91.7 93.0 93.0 91.7
50 93.0 93.0 92A 93.0 93.0 92.4
60 93.6 93.6 93.0 93.6 93.6 93.0
75 93.6 94.1 93.0 93.6 94.1 93.0
100 94.1 94.1 93.0 94.1 94.5 93.6
125 94.1 94.5 93.6 94.1 94.5 94.5
150 94.5 95.0 93.6 95.0 95.0 94.5
200 94.5 95.0 94.5 95.0 95.0 95.0
B. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the manufacturers listed
below:
1. General Electric
2. Century
3. Baldor
4. Marathon
5. Reliance
6. Emerson
7. Siemens
2.02 STARTERS,ELECTRICAL DEVICES,AND WIRING:
A. General: Packaged equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor that includes electrical components shall
conform to all requirements as specified in Division 16 and as indicated herein.
B. Motor Starter Characteristics:
1. Enclosures: NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except in wet locations shall be NEMA
3R with conduit hubs,or units in hazardous locations which shall have NEC proper class and division.
2. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturer and the driven equipment
manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition.
15030-3 No.99132-CP2
C. Manual switches shall have:
1. Pilot lights and extra positions for multi-speed motors.
2. Overload protection: melting alloy type thermal overload relays.
D. Magnetic Starters:
1. Maintained contact push buttons and pilot lights,properly arranged for single speed or multi-speed operation
as indicated.
2. Trip-free thermal overload relays,each phase.
3. Interlocks,pneumatic switches and similar devices as required for coordination with control requirements of
Division 15 Controls sections.
4. Built-in 120 volts control circuit transformer,fused from line side,where service exceeds 240 volts.
5. Externally operated manual reset.
6. Under-voltage release or protection.
E. Disconnect Switches:
1. Fusible switches: fused, each phase; general duty; horsepower rated; non-teasible quick-make, quick-break
mechanism; dead front line side shield; solderless lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors; spring
reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts; hinged doors; operating lever arranged for
locking in the"OPEN"position;arc quenchers;capacity and characteristics as indicated
2. Non-fusible switches: for equipment 2 horsepower and smaller,shall be horsepower rated;toggle switch type,
quantity of poles and voltage rating as indicated For equipment larger than 2 horsepower, switches shall be
the same as fusible type.
F. Motor connections:
1. Flexible conduit,except where plug-in electrical cords are specifically indicated
2.03 CAPACITORS
A. Features:
1. Individual unit cells
2. all welded steel housing
3. each capacitor internally fused,external blown fuse indicator
4. non-flammable(non-PCB)synthetic liquid impregnant
5. craft tissue insulation
6. aluminum foil electrodes
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Install motor and equipment associated with the mechanical installation,including items furnished by others.
150304 No.99132-CP2
B. Provide electrical requirements for equipment installation, connection, and control. Refer to Division 16 for
exceptions.
C. Provide power factor correction capacitors on motors as required to correct power factor of the motor to 90 percent
or better on all motors 1 horsepower and larger. Turn capacitors over to the Electrical Contractor for installation.
The power factors of motors shall be measured at rated loads. Do not provide power factor correction for motors
installed with variable frequency drives.
END OF SECTION 15030
15030-5 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Requirements of the following Division 15 Section apply to this Section.
1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application with mechanical
installations as follows:
1. Mechanical equipment nameplate data.
2. Excavation for underground utilities and services,including underground piping(under the building and from
building to utility connection),tanks,basins,and equipment.
3. Miscellaneous metals for support of mechanical materials and equipment.
4. Joint sealers for sealing around mechanical materials and equipment; and for sealing penetrations in fire and
smoke barriers,floors,and foundation walls.
5. Pipe sleeves through walls and floors.
B. Related sections:
! 1. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for materials for anchoring piping systems to building structure.
2. Division 6 for wood grounds,nailers,blocking,fasteners, and anchorage for support of mechanical materials
and equipment.
3. Division 7 for roof equipment supports.
4. Division 9 Section"Painting"for field-applied painting requirements.
5. Division 15 Section 15250"Mechanical Insulation"for insulation of equipment and systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and supports and anchorage for
mechanical materials and equipment.
C. Welder certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under
"Quality Assurance"article of this Section.
! 15050-1 No.99132-CP2
D. Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition prior to commencement
of Work Include coordination for dust and noise control.
1. Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy specified in Division 1 Section
"Summary of Work."
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of current editions of the following:
1. The Minnesota State Building Code,known as the "State Building Code",including the following documents
or codes pertaining to the construction and/or use of buildings.
a. Minnesota State Building code regulations known and identified as Chapters 1300, 1301, 1302, 1305,
1310, 1315, 1330, 1335, 1346, 1350, 1355, 1360 and 1365. s
b. The Minnesota State Building Code adopts by reference the following codes: ■
1.) the Uniform Building Code,identified as"UBC":
2.) National Electrical Code,identified as"NEC":
3.) American National Standard Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving
Walls,identified as ANSI-A 17.1,including supplement ANSI-A 17.1 a and ANSI-A 17.3.
C. Minnesota State Building Code chapter 1346 known as the "Minnesota Uniform Mechanical Code"—
adopts by reference the Uniform Mechanical Code as promulgated by the International Conference of
Building Officials,Whittier California,and is amended by Rules 1346.0050 through 1346.2600.
d. Department of Public Service Minnesota State Energy Code.
e. Minnesota State Building Code Rules Chapter 4715 known as the "Minnesota Plumbing Code"
promulgated by the Minnesota Department of Health and the Minnesota Department of Administration.
2. Applicable section of the Minnesota Rules as compiled by the Revisor of Statutes for the Minnesota
Legislature and appearing in the State Register.
a. Chapter 5230,Minnesota State Code for Power Piping Systems,promulgated by the Minnesota Dept. of '
Labor and Industry and the Minnesota Dept.of Administration.
b. Chapter 5225,Minnesota State Standards for Boiler and Pressure Vessels,promulgated by the Minnesota
Dept.of Labor and Industry and the Minnesota Dept of Administration.
c. Chapter 7510 known as the "Minnesota Uniform Fire Code", promulgated by the Minnesota Dept of
Public Safety, adopts by reference: 1.) The Uniform Fire Code as promulgated by the International
Conference of Building Officials, and the Western Fire Chiefs Association (Whittier, California), and,
where applicable, 2.) the National Fire Codes Standard Number 101 issued by the National Fire
Protection Association(Quincey,Massachusetts).
B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, ,
if pertinent,has undergone recertification.
15050-2 No.99132-CP2
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditions Affecting Excavations: The following project conditions apply:
1. Site Information: Subsurface conditions were investigated during the design of the Project. Reports of these
investigations are available for information only; data in the reports are not intended as representations or
warranties of accuracy of continuity of conditions. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn from this information.
1.06 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete pads. Provide templates for layout and location of anchor bolt inserts
cast into pad.
B. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for floor and wall foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members with ductwork, HVAC equipment, heating,
cooling and plumbing piping.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A. Steel plates,shapes,bars,and bar grating: ASTM A 36.
B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.
C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Schedule 40,welded.
E. Nonsluink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout,
recommended for interior and exterior applications.
F. Fasteners: Zinc-coated,type,grade,and class as required.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. General: Refer to Division 2 Section"Earthwork" for excavation methods and the following list of soils handling
techniques:
1. Shoring and Bracing
2. Materials Stockpiling
3. Backfilling and Compaction
15050-3 No.99132-CP2
4. Moisture Control
5. Cold Weather Protection
B. Trenching: Excavate trenches for mechanical installations as follows:
1. Excavate trenches to the uniform width,sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and a minimum of 6
to 9 inches clearance on both sides of pipe and equipment.
2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required for piping to establish indicated slope and invert elevations.
Beyond building perimeter,excavate trenches to an elevation below frost line.
3. Limit the length of open trench to that in which pipe can be installed,tested,and the trench backfilled within
the same day.
4. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill with a layer of crushed
stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel cushion
between rock bearing surface and pipe.
5. Excavation trenches for piping and equipment with bottoms of trench to accurate elevations for support of pipe
and equipment on undisturbed soil.
a. For pipes 6 inches or larger in nominal size,shape bottom of trench to fit bottom%<of the circumference.
Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint over-excavate to relieve the bell or pipe
joint of the pipe of loads,and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the bearing surface.
C. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at mechanical installation excavations during the period 12 months after
Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material,
compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition or
surface or finish to match adjacent areas.
3.03 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit,and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location,alignment, and elevation to support and
anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS"Structural Welding Code."
3.04 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut,fit,and place wood grounds,nailers,blocking, and anchorage accurately in location,alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive
finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
D. Wood shall be fire treated and pressure treated to prevent absorption of moisture.
150504 No.99132-CP2
r
3.05 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. All pipes shall be required size, round and straight and shall be cut, reamed,threaded,beveled for welding and/or
otherwise prepared for joining with proper tools. All piping shall be properly enclosed, supported, guided,
anchored,sway braced,connected,tested,cleaned and flushed out,properly insulated and protected where required,
and run in a neat and orderly manner to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Lines required to be enclosed in ceilings,
chaseways or similar spaces shall be installed to permit such enclosure as intended. This contractor must lay out his
work, properly locate the apparatus and add necessary pipe, sleeve, etc., and take his own measurements at the
building.
B. All pipes shall be run with proper grade to provide for easy draining and in group runs where applicable. Pipe sizes
shown on the drawings are nominal pipe sizes and not outside diameters. Pipes shall be run substantially as
indicated on the drawings.
C. All piping shall be installed with ample provisions for expansion and contraction to prevent damage to same or to
building structure. Such provisions shall be made by means of piping offsets, changes in directions, expansion
loops and/or suitable expansion joints. Suitable anchors and guides shall be provided to permit proper deflection
and compression of offsets, loops and/or expansion joints. Expansion joints shall not be used in lieu of offsets,
changes in direction or loops,except where specified and/or indicated on the drawings.
D. In general, pipe lines requiring drainage shall be laid out at the site, first the large pipe mains, then space for air
ducts, then electrical conduit. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide extra stub risers, drip-trap-and-rise
installations, and drip and trap assemblies at low points in steam systems, air vents,rises and drops in forced hot
water mains as may be required,and extra lengths and fittings in all phases as may be required to install all systems
in the space available and as necessary to avoid interferences.
E. All groups of fixtures shall have main valves including drain cocks with valves spotted in accessible,but concealed
locations. Sectionalizing valves shall be provided to isolate branch lines from the mains. All groups of fixtures
utilizing flush valves shall be provided with water hammer arrestors at each level.
F. All piping systems shall conform with all applicable requirements of the ASA Code for Pressure Piping and with all
applicable State and local codes,except where type and quality of materials,weights,thicknesses,design,pressures
or fabrication techniques are called for in these specifications which exceed or upgrade such code requirements,
these specifications shall govern.
G. Permissible assemblies for welded pipe lines. Following specification covers permissible assemblies for welded
pipe lines for all services operating at 150 psig or less.
1. The use of mitered elbows in welded lines will not be permitted.
2. Mitered tees will not be permitted in welded lines. Connections shall be made with welding tees. The use of
weldolets will be permitted in lieu of welding tees in welded lines provided they are installed in prefabricated
assemblies and the pipe interior is cleaned of slag.
3. Mitered reducers will not be permitted in welded lines.
4. Pipe caps in welded lines may be fabricated from flat steel plate cut round and inserted into the pipe of
sufficient depth to permit a fillet weld equal the plate thickness.
5. The pipe ends in all tees, laterals and reducers shall be carefully prepared to provide for proper weld
penetration in accordance with ASA Standards.
1 15050-5 No.99132-CP2
H. Equipment piping shall also include wastes and drains which are safewasted without a direct connection. This shall
include drains from drain pans,plenum drains,backflow preventers and automatic air vents,etc.
I. Service piping to fixtures and equipment shall be installed concealed wherever possible. Conceal piping within the
wall adjacent to the equipment or in the enclosures provided by the equipment supplier, as indicated on the
drawings. For size of enclosures and exact locations,see equipment shop drawings.
J. Exposed piping shall be installed in a sanitary manner for ease in cleaning.
3.06 CONNECTIONS TO MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A Due to the fact that the manufacturer of the equipment purchased may vary slightly from that specified and,
therefore, requires some rearranging of equipment different from that indicated on the drawings, the Contractor
shall make connections to such rearranged equipment without additional cost to the Owner. That is for initial
installation arrangement other than that indicated on the drawings.
i
B. This Contractor shall make all water,waste,vent, steam,condensate retum,water heating and cooling, condensate
drain pan piping, ductwork connections, etc., to all equipment in this building whether or not such equipment is
furnished by this Contractor, other Contractors or by the Owner. This includes furnishing and installing piping,
shut-off valves, unions, fittings, ductwork, air control devices and insulation. Also included in this work are
connections, including shut-off valves,backflow preventers,pressure reducing valves,unions, double check valve
assembly,open wastes and traps to make up supply water to building environmental system equipment.
C. The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate work between the various trades to ensure proper installation and
operation of all systems. Do not install ductwork so as to cover electrical junction boxes unless this contractor
provides approved access panels in both layers of duct.
3.07 FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS
A. Foundations, supports, anchors, concrete bases, anchor bolts, sleeves, grouts, shims, etc., required for properly
placing mechanical equipment fiurnished under this contract shall be provided by this Contractor,unless specifically
stated otherwise. Housekeeping pads, four(4) inches thick, of 140 pcf dense concrete, shall be furnished for all
mechanical equipment located on floor slabs. See architectural and structural drawings for concrete work to be
famished by General Contractor. Coordinate exact locations of concrete pads with General Contractor.
3.08 TESTS
A. General. Tests shall be performed on all systems. Tests shall be repeated until each system is proven acceptable.
1. All work shall be inspected,tested and approved as required by the State of Minnesota and local regulations.
Tests shall be made in the presence of proper inspectors and the Architect/Engineer or their duly authorized
representatives. All tests shall be made by the Contractor at his own expense, and he shall furnish three(3)
test certificates to the Architect/Engineer for approval.
2. All work shall prove absolutely tight under required tests. All tests of piping systems, except final tests of
completed systems shall be made before pipe is covered or connected to fixtures and equipment.
3. All gauges,tools,pumps,air compressor or other equipment required for testing and initial adjusting of piping
systems shall be purchased and provided by this Contractor.
4. See respective Division 15 sections for tests required under that specific section of the specification.
B. Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems.
1. All ventilating systems will be balanced by an independent test and balance agency contracted directly by the
Owner. Division 15 Section 15990 is included for reference only.
15050-6 No.99132-CP2
r
2. The Contractor shall be certain that all systems are ready for proper operation prior to balancing and adjusting
with clean filters and other system elements,e.g.,coils. Temperature control calibration, electrical interface,
etc., shall also be complete prior to balancing and adjusting. All equipment shall be freshly oiled. The
' Contractor shall instruct his employees and subcontractors to leave all balancing devices in a wide open
position and free all operating arms and adjustments so that they can be easily operated.
C. Hydronic water systems.
r1. Hydronic water systems will be balanced and pump performance will be certified by an independent test and
balance agency contracted directly by the Owner. Division 15,Section 15990 is included for reference only.
3.09 CLEANING
A. The Contractor and subcontractors for the various phases of the work of this Division shall clear away all
construction debris, surplus materials,etc.,resulting from their work,including all duct/pipe shafts,leaving the job
and equipment furnished in a clean,first-class condition.
B. Air surfaces of all coils, fan housings, fan wheels, fan motors, air unit plenums and all air filters shall be wiped
clean or washed leaving the installation in a first-class condition prior to being turned over to the Owner.
C. All plumbing fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned of all plaster, stickers, rust stains, and other foreign matter of
discoloration, leaving every part in an acceptable condition and ready for use. The surface of all floor drains,
cleanouts and other equipment shall be cleaned and each item shall be left in a first-class condition. Thoroughly
clean all items of equipment furnished such as traps, strainers,pumps,motors, etc., leaving each item in a clean,
' first-class condition.
3.10 PAINTING
A. This Contractor shall refinish and restore to the original conditions and appearance,all mechanical equipment which
has sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime and finish coats of enamel or paint. Materials and workmanship
shall be equal to the requirements described in the painting section of the architectural specifications.
3.11 IDENTIFICATION
A. All mechanical equipment furnished under these specifications shall be identified with black-and-white laminated
1/8"plastic plates. Plates shall be attached with self-tapping screws.
3.12 CORE DRILLING,CUTTING AND PATCHING
rA. All core drilling, cutting and patching required for the installation of mechanical equipment as shown on the
drawings and/or specified in Division 15, shall be the responsibility of this Contractor except where specifically
stated otherwise. No cutting shall impair the structure without the written approval of the Architect/Engineer.
Should structural repairs be required,they shall be made under the direction of the Architect/Engineer.
B. All patching, including painting (where required) shall be performed by the Mechanical Contractor, unless
otherwise noted.
3.13 EQUIPMENT ACCESSIBILITY
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall locate all mechanical equipment, valves, cleanouts, fire dampers, combination
fire/smoke dampers,etc.as required to allow access for servicing. The accessibility of all equipment shall be noted
on the coordination drawings. Provide additional duct or pipe transitions, angles, and offsets as required. The
addition of access panels in ceilings or wall required for servicing mechanical equipment because a reasonable
attempt was not made to locate equipment in an accessible location, shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical-
Contractor.
r
r15050-7 No.99132-CP2
3.14 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Exterior Wall Penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations through walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
B. Interior Miscellaneous Penetration. Provide schedule 40 pipe sleeves through walls, floors, partitions or ceilings.
Seal sleeves with special sealers and materials as prescribed in Division 7.
C. Provide 20 gauge galvanized sheetmetal sleeves at all non-rated duct penetrations of walls and ceilings. Seal with
special sealers and materials as prescribed in Division 7.
D. Extend pipe sleeves in floors 2"above finished floors in unfinished areas and 1/4"above finished floors in finished
areas.
3.15 TEMPORARY HEAT/EQUIPMENT OPERATION
A. Temporary Air Handling Equipment Operation:
1. Manually operate air handling systems to provide suitable environment for installation of interior finishes.
Perform commissioning operations prior to starting units. Follow commissioning starting procedures and the
following manual operation sequence:
a. Open outdoor air dampers, close return air dampers, open all air terminals to full open. Install filters,
heating coil operating (outdoor air temperatures below 40° F), condensate drain functioning, and
electrical protection devices installed. Start fan, monitor indoor and outdoor conditions, and operate
heating and cooling systems to control space conditions; shut down systems completely and close
outdoor air dampers at end of each work day. Retum/exhaust fans shall not run during temporary
operation.
B. Temporary Boiler Operation: ,
1. The boiler and building heating system shall not be used for temporary heat in the building. The existing
heating plant may be used prior to substantial completion only with written approval from the Owner.
3.16 FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide firestoppmg material for penetrations and sleeves that pass through walls and floors. Provide the
firestopping material that matches the fire rating of the wall or floor.
B. Conform to the requirements of Section 07240"Firestopping".
END OF SECTION 15050
i
15050-8 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15100
VALVES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section:
1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
1.02 SUN(MARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to most mechanical piping systems.
1. Special purpose valves are specified in individual piping system specifications.
B. Valve tags and charts are specified in Division 15 Section 15190"Mechanical Identification."
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data, including body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection
details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation
instructions.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Substitutions and
Product Options".
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME)Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services
piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping.
C. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) Compliance: Comply with the
various MSS Standard Practices referenced.
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rusting and corrosion.
2. Protect valve ends against damage to threads,flange faces,and weld ends preps.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling;set ball and plug
valves open to minimize exposure of fimctional surfaces;set butterfly valves closed or slightly open;and block
1 swing check valves in either closed or open position.
15100-1 No.99132-CP2
B. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection;then reinstall for storage.
2. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve temperature higher than the ambient dew ,
point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, support valves off the ground or pavement in watertight
enclosures. '
C. Handling: Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to
exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
t
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements,but are not limited to,those listed in valve schedule.
2.02 VALVE FEATURES,GENERAL
A. Valve Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems. ,
1. Non-rising stem,indicating type valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of rising stems.
B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As scheduled and required to suit system pressures and temperatures. '
C. Sizes: Same sizes as upstream pipe,unless otherwise indicated.
D. Operators: Provide the following special operator features: ,
1. Handwheels,fastened to valve stem,for valves other than quarter turn.
2. Lever handles, on quarter-turn valves 6-inch and smaller, except for plug valves. Provide plugvalves with ,
square heads;provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves.
3. Chain-wheel operators, for valves 2-1/2-inch and larger, installed with operator 96 inches or higher above
finished floor elevation. Extend chains to an elevation of 5'-0"above finished floor elevation.
4. Gear drive operators,on quarter-turn valves 8-inch and larger. ,
E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified,provide extended stems arranged to receive insulation.
F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
G. End Connections: As indicated in the valve specifications.
1. Threads: Comply with ANSI B 1.20.1.
2. Flanges: Comply with ANSI B 16.1 for cast iron,ANSI B 16.5 for steel,and ANSI B 16.24 for bronze valves. ,
3. Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B 16.18.
15100-2 No.99132-CP2
a. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840°F for
gate,globe,and check valves;below 421°F for ball valves.
4. Grooved End: Comply with ANSI B-31.1,B-31.9.
2.03 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves,2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80;Class 125 psi WSP/200 psi WOG,body and bonnet of ASTM B 62
cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon"
impregnated packing. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above where system pressure requires. Do not use
solder end valves for hot water heating or steam piping applications.
B. Gate Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-70; Class 150 psi WSP/300 psi @OG iron body, bronze mounted,
with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B;with flanged ends,and"Teflon" impregnated packing
and two-piece packing gland assembly.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Crane
2. Grinnell
' 3. Hammond
4. Milwaukee
5. Powell
6. Stockham
2.04 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves, 1-Inch and Smaller: Rated for 150 psi WSP/600 psi WOG pressure; two-piece construction, with
bronze body conforming to ASTM B-584, full port, stainless steel(T-316)ball and stem"Teflon" or "TFE" seats
and seals,blowout proof stem design,and vinyl-covered steel handle with stem extension for insulation application.
Provide balancing stops as required by application. Provide solder ends on all services except steam where
threaded ends are required.
B. Ball Valves, I%-Inch to 2-Inch: Rated for 150 psi WSP/600 psi saturated steam pressure, 600 psi WOG pressure;
3-piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B-584, full port, nickel and chrome plated brass ball,
replaceable"Teflon"or"TFE"seats and seals,blowout proof stem design,and vinyl-covered steel handle with stem
extension for insulation application. Provide balancing stops as required by application.
C. Manufacturer:
1. Conbraco(Apollo)
2. Grinnell
3. Hammond
4. Milwaukee
5. Victaulic
6. Watts
2.05 PLUG VALVES
A. Plug Valves,2-Inch and Smaller: Rated at 150 psi WOG,bronze body,with straightaway pattern,square head,and
threaded ends.
B. Plug Valves,2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-78;rated at 175 psi,lubricated plug type,with semi-steel body,single
gland,wrench operated,flanged ends.
15100-3 No.99132-CP2
I
C. Manufacturers:
1. Lunkenheimer
2. Powell ,
2.06 GLOBE VALVES
A. Globe Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller. MSS SP-80; Class 125 psi WSP/200 psi WOG, body and screwed bonnet of
ASTM B 62 cast bronze,with threaded or solder ends,brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy
stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above where
system pressure requires. ,
B. Globe Valves, 2'/Mach and Larger: MSS SP-85; Class 150 psi WSP/300 psi WOG iron body and bolted bonnet
conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B;with outside screw and yoke,bronze mounted, flanged ends, and "Teflon"
impregnated packing,and two-piece backing gland assembly. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above where
system pressure requires.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Crane
2. Grinnell ,
3. Hammond
4. Milwaukee
5. Powell
6. Stockham ,
2.07 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves,2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-67;rated at 200 psi WOG;cast iron body conforming to ASTM ,
A'126, Class B. Provide valves with field replaceable EPDM sleeve, aluminum bronze disc, stainless steel stem,
and EPDM O-ring stem seals. Provide lever operators with locks for sizes 2 through 6 inches and gear operators
with position indicator for sizes 8 through 24 inches. Provide full lug type valves. Drill and tap valves on dead-end
service or requiring additional body strength.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Crane
2. Grinnell
3. Keystone
4. Powell
5. Stockham
6. Watts ,
7. Mueller Steam Specialty
2.08 CHECK VALVES ,
A. Swing Check Valves,2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80;Class 125 psi WSP/200 psi WOG cast-bronze body and cap
conforming to ASTM B 62;with horizontal swing,Y-pattern,and bronze disc; and having threaded or solder ends.
Provide valves capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the ,
above specifications,with threaded end connections,where system pressure requires or where Class 125 valves are
not available.
1. Manufacturers: ,
a. Crane
b. Grinnell
151004 No.99132-CP2
' c. Hammond
d. Milwaukee
e. Powell
f. Stockham
B. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger. MSS SP-71; Class 125 (Class 175 FM approved for fire protection
' piping systems),cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126,Class B;horizontal swing,and bronze
disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring; and flanged ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted while the
valve remains in the line.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Crane
' b. Grinnell
c. Hammond
d. Kennedy
.e. Milwaukee
' f. Powell
g. Stockham
h. Victaulic
C. Wafer Check Valves: Class 250, cast iron body; with replaceable bronze seat, and non-slam design lapped and
balanced twin bronze flappers and stainless steel trim and torsion spring. Provide valves designed to open and close
at approximately one foot differential pressure.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Bell&Gossett
b. Center Line
C. Metraflex
d. Mission
e. Stockham
f. Mueller Steam Specialty
g. Grinnell
D. Lift Check Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller. Class 125; cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62;
horizontal or angle pattern, lift-type valve, with stainless steel spring,bronze disc holder with renewable "Teflon"
' disc,and threaded ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted and ground while the valve remains in the line.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Crane
b. Grinnell
c. Hammond
d. Milwaukee
e. Powell
f. Stockham
PART 3: EXECUTION
' 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior through the end ports,for cleanliness,freedom from foreign matter and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials,such as blocks used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
15100-5 No.99132-CP2
B. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine functionally significant features, such as '
guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. Following examination,return the valve closure member to the
shipping position.
C. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (i.e., out-of-round or local indentation) and
cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions which might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size,length,and '
material. Check gasket material for proper size,material composition suitable for service,and freedom from defects
and damage.
E. - Prior to valve installation, examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from foreign materials, and proper
alignment.
F. Replace defective valves with new valves. ,
3.02 VALVE ENDS SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections: ,
1. Copper Tube Size,2-Inch and Smaller: Solder ends,except provide threaded ends for heating service. ,
2. Steel Pipes Sizes,2-Inch and Smaller: threaded or grooved end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: grooved end or flanged. ,
3.03 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General Application: Use gate,ball, and butterfly valves for shut-off duty; globe,ball, and butterfly for throttling '
duty. Refer to piping system specification sections for specific valve applications and arrangements.
B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. ,
C. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged to allow equipment removal without
system shut down. Unions are not required on flanged devices. ,
D. Install three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling-type valves.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe. ,
F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement. Install indicating valves with lever handles pointing in the
direction of flow in the open position.
G. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level. ,
2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position,between flanges.
3. Lift Check:With stem upright and plumb.
H. Install grooved connection valves in accordance with grooved valve manufacturers written instructions. , f
3.04 SOLDER CONNECTIONS ,
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
15100-6 No.99132-CP2
B. Clean end of tube of depth of valve socket with steel wool,sand cloth,or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean
valve socket in same manner.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.
D. Open gate and globe valves to full open position.
' E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve
' slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed solder until it
' completely fills the joint around tube. Point torch away from valve seat and Avoid hot spots or overheating the
valve. Once the solder starts cooling,remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
3.05 THREADED CONNECTIONS
' A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends,and proximity of valve internal seat or wall,to determine how far
pipe should be threaded into valve.
' B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is
' specified).
D. Assemble joint,wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.
3.06 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as
possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper shutoff and
retention.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests: After piping systems have been tested and put into service,but before final adjusting and balancing,inspect
each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks;replace valves if leak persists.
3.08 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare valves to receive
finish painting or insulation.
' END OF SECTION 15100
15100-7 No.99132-CP2
' SECTION 15135
METERS AND GAGES
PART 1: GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section:
' 1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
' 1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of meters and gages:
' 1. Pressure gages and fittings.
2. Flow meters.
' B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 15 Section 15411 "Water Distribution Piping"for water meters.
' 2. Division 15 Section 15488'Natural Gas Systems"for gas meters.
C. Meters and gages furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of equipment assembly in
other Division 15 sections.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
1. Product data for each type of meter and gage. Include scale range,ratings,and calibrated performance curves,
certified where indicated. Submit meter and gage schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, scale
range,location,and accessories for each meter and gage.
2. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracies under specified
operating conditions and products'compliance with specified requirements.
3. Maintenance data for each type of meter and gage for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manuals
specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section 15010"Basic Mechanical Requirements."
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL standards pertaining to meters and gages.
B. ASME and ISA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ASME and Instrument Society of America(ISA)
standards pertaining to construction and installation of meters and gages.
15135-1 No.99132-CP2
{
PART 2: PRODUCTS ,
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work '
include the following:
1. Mercury-In-Glass Thermometers: ,
a. Marshalltown Instruments,Inc.
b. Trerice(H.O.)Co. ,
C. Weiss Instruments,Inc.
d. Weksler Instruments Corp.
e. Winters.
2. Direct-Mount Filled-System Dial Thermometers ,
a. Ashcroft Dresser Industries\Instrument Div. '
b. Marsh Instrument Co.,Unit of General Signal.
c. Trerice(H.O.)Co.
d. Weiss Instruments,Inc.
e. Weksler Instruments Corp. '
f Winters.
3. Remote-Reading Filled-System Dial Thermometers: ,
a. Ametek,U.S.Gauge Div.
b. Ashcroft Dresser Industries\Instrument Div
C. Marsh Instrument Co.,Unit of General Signal. ,
d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Co.,Inc.
e. Trerice(H.O.)Co.
f Weiss Instruments,Inc. '
g. Weksler InstJnnnents Corp.
h. Winters.
4. Bimetal Dial Thermometers: '
a. Ashcroft Dresser Industries\Instrument Div.
b. Marshalltown Instruments,Inc. '
c. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Co.,Inc.
d. Trerice(H.O.)Co.
e. Weiss Instruments,Inc. '
i`
f. Weksler Instruments Corp.
g. Winters.
i
5. Thermometer Wells: Same as for thermometers. ,
6. Insertion Dial Thermometers:
a. Ashcroft Dresser Industries\Instrument Div.
b. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Co.,Inc.
C. Trerice(H.O.)Co.
d. Weiss Instruments,Inc. '
e. Weksler Instruments Corp.
f. Winters.
15135-2 No.99132-CP2
' 7. Pressure and Vacuum Gages:
a. Ametek,U.S.Gauge Div.
b. Ashcroft Dresser Industries\Instrument Div.
'
C. Marsh Instrument Co.,Unit of General Signal.
d. Marshalltown Instruments,Inc.
e. Trerice(H.O.)Co.
f. Weiss Instruments,Inc.
g. Weksler Instruments Corp.
h. WIKA Instruments Corp.
' 8. Pressure Gage Accessories: Same as for pressure gages.
9. Orifice-Type Measurement System
' a. Armstrong Pumps,Inc.
b. Bell&Gossett,ITT,Fluid Handling Div.
c. Tour and Andersson,Inc.
10. Venturi-Type Flow Measurement System
' a. Armstrong Pumps,Inc.
b. Barco Div.,Marison Industries.
c. Gerand Engineering Co.
' d. Gustin-Bacon.
e. Bell&Gossett.
' 11. Test Plugs:
a. MG Piping Products Co.
b. Peterson Equipment Co.,Inc.
C. Sisco,A Spedco,Inc.Co.
d. Trerice(H.O.)Co.
e. Watts Regulator Co.
2.02 THERMOMETERS,GENERAL
A. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of
range span-
B.
pmB. Scale range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions.
2. Domestic Cold Water. 0 to 100 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions.
3. Hydronic Water: 0 to 300 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions.
' 4. Condenser Water: 0 to 160 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions.
2.03 MERCURY-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
' A. Case: Die cast,aluminum finished,in baked epoxy enamel,glass front,spring secured,9 inches long.
B. Adjustable Joint: Finished to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree adjustment in
horizontal plane,with locking device.
C. Tube: Red reading,mercury filled,magnifying lens.
15135-3 No.99132-CP2
D. Scale: Satin-faced,non-reflective aluminum,with permanently etched markings. '
E. Stem: Copper-plated steel,aluminum or brass,for separable socket,length to suit installation.
2.04 DIRECT-MOUNT FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS '
A. Type: Vapor actuated,universal angle.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum,glass lens,41/2-inch diameter. ,
C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree adjustment in
horizontal plane,with locking device.
D. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor bronze bourdon pressure tube.
E. Movement. Brass,precision geared. '
F. Scale: Progressive,satin faced,non-reflective aluminum,permanently etched markings. '
G. Stem Copper-plated steel,aluminum,or brass,for separable socket,length to suit installation.
2.05 REMOTE-READING FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Type: Vapor actuated.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum,glass lens,4-1/2-inch diameter. 1
C. Movement: Brass,precision geared. '
D. Scale: Progressive,satin faced,non-reflective aluminum,permanently etched markings.
E. Tubing: Bronze double-braided armor over copper capillary,length to suit installation. '
F. Bulb: Copper with separable socket for liquids,averaging element for air.
2.06 BIMETAL DIAL THERMOMETERS , I
A. Type:. Direct mounted,bimetal,universal angle.
B. Case: Stainless steel,glass lens,5-inch diameter. '
C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree adjustment in '
horizontal plane,with locking device.
D. Element: Bimetal coil.
E. Scale: Satin faced,non-reflective aluminum,permanently etched marking.
F. Stem: Stainless steel for separable socket,length to suit installation. ,
2.07 DIAL-TYPE INSERTION THERMOMETERS
A. Type: Bimetal,stainless steel case and stem, 1-inch-diameter dial, dust-and leakproof, 1/8-inch-diameter tapered- ,
end stem with nominal length of 5 inches.
151354 No.99132-CP2
1
2.08 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Thermometer Wells: Brass or stainless steel,pressure rated to match piping system design pressure; with 2-inch
' extension for insulated piping and threaded cap nut with chain permanently fastened to well and cap.
2.09 PRESSURE GAGES
' A. Type: General use,ASME B40.1,Grade A,phosphor bronze bourdon-tube type,bottom connection.
B. Case: Drawn steel or brass,glass lens,4-1/2-inches diameter.
C. Connector: Brass, 1/4-inch NPS.
D. Scale: White coated aluminum,with permanently etched markings.
' E. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span.
' F. Range: Conform to the following:
1. Vacuum: 30 inches Hg to 15 psi.
2. All fluids: 2 times operating pressure.
' 2.10 PRESSURE GAGE ACCESSORIES
' A. Syphon: 1/4-inch NPS straight coil constructed of brass tubing with threads on each end.
B. Snubber: 1/4-inch NPS brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous metal disc. Disc material shall be suitable for
fluid served and rated pressure.
' 2.11 FLOW METERS,GENERAL
A. Flow rate of elements and meters shall be same as connected equipment or system.
2.12 ORIFICE-TYPE FLOW ELEMENTS
' A. Type: Differential-pressure wafer-type orifice insert flow elements designed for installation between pipe flanges.
B. Construction: Cast-iron body, brass valves with integral check valves and caps, and calibrated nameplate.
' Elements shall be pressure rated for 300 psig and 250 deg F.
2.13 VENTURI-TYPE FLOW ELEMENTS
' A. Type: Differential-pressure venturi type,designed for installation in piping.
B. Construction: Bronze or cadmium plated steel with brass fittings and attached tag with flow conversion data. Ends
shall be threaded for 2 inches and smaller elements and flanged or welded for 2-1/2 inches and larger elements.
2.14 METERS
' A. Permanently Mounted Meters: Suitable for mounting on wall or bracket, 6-inch dial or equivalent with fittings and
copper tubing for connecting to flow element.
' 1. Scale shall be in gpm unless otherwise indicated.
15135-5 No.99132-CP2
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 to 80 percent of range.
3. Provide each meter complete with operating instructions.
4. All meters shall have remote reading capabilities. '
B. Portable Meters: Differential-pressure gage and two 12-foot hoses in carrying case with handle.
1. Scale: In inches of water unless otherwise indicated '
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent between 20 to 80 percent of range.
3., Each meter shall be complete with operating instructions.
2.15 TEST PLUGS ,
A. Test Plugs shall be nickel-plated brass body, with 1/2-inch NPS fitting and 2 self-sealing valve-type core inserts,
suitable for inserting a 1/8-inch O.D. probe assembly from a dial-type thermometer or pressure gage. Test plug ,
shall have gasketed and threaded cap with retention chain and body of length to extend beyond insulation. Pressure
rating shall be 500 psig.
B. Core Material: Conform to the following for fluid and temperature range: '
1. Air,Water,Oil,and Gas,20 to 200 deg F: Neoprene.
2. Air and Water,minus 30 deg to 275 deg F: EPDM. ,
C. Test Kit: Provide test kit consisting of 1 pressure gage,gage adapter with probe,2 bimetal dial thermometers, and
carrying case. '
D. Ranges of pressure gage and thermometers shall be approximately 2 times systems operating conditions.
PART 3: EXECUTION ,
i
3.01 THERMOMETERS INSTALLATION
A. Install thermometers in vertical and tilted positions to allow reading by observer standing on floor.
B. Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated: '
1. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.
2. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler.
3. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems. 1
4. At inlet and outlet of each chiller.
5. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat recovery unit.
6. At chilled water and condenser water inlets and outlets of chillers. '
7. At inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater and hot water storage tank
C. Remote-Reading Dial Thermometers: Install in control panels,with tubing connecting panel and thermometer bulb
supported to prevent kinks. Use minim m tubing length. '
D. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where thermometers are indicated,in vertical position. Fill well with oil ,
or graphite and secure cap.
15135-6 No.99132-CP2
6
' 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAGES
A. Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage valve,located on pipe at most readable position.
B. Install in the following locations,and elsewhere as indicated:
1. At suction and discharge of each pump.
' 2. At inlet and discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
3. At building water service entrance.
® 4. At chilled water and condenser water inlets and outlets of chillers.
' 5. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler.
6. At discharge of each air compressor.
C. Pressure Gage Needle Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon in lieu of snubber for steam
' pressure gages.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF TEST PLUGS
' A. Test Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated,located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF FLOW-MEASURING ELEMENTS AND METERS
A. General: Install flow meters for piping systems located in accessible locations at most readable position.
B. Locations: Install flow measuring elements and meters in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated.
1. At inlet of each hydronic coil in air handling units and built-up central systems.
' 2. At outlet from each hydronic zone.
C. Differential-Pressure-Type Flow Elements: Install minimum straight lengths of pipe upstream and downstream
from element as prescribed by the manufacturer's installation instructions.
' D. Install wafer orifice-type element between (2) Class 125 pipe flanges, ANSI B16.1 (cast iron) or ANSI B16.24
(bronze).
' E. Install connections for attachment to portable flow meters in a readily accessible location.
F. Meters For Use With Flow Elements: Install meters on wall or bracket in accessible location.
G. Install connections,tubing,and accessories between flow elements and meters as prescribed by the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
r3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
B. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked and broken
windows,and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.
15135-7 No.99132-CP2
3.06 CONNECTIONS '
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of Division 15. The drawings indicate the general
arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: '
1. Install meters and gages piping adjacent to machine to allow servicing and maintaining of machine.
END OF SECTION 15135 '
15135-8 No.99132-CP2 '
' SECTION 15140
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section:
' 1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
1.02 SUMMARY
' A. This section includes the following:
' L Horizontal-piping hangers and supports.
2. Vertical-piping clamps.
3. Hanger-rod attachments.
4. Building attachments.
' 5. Saddles and shields.
6. Spring hangers and supports.
7. Miscellaneous materials.
' 8. Pipe alignment guides.
9. Anchors.
10. Equipment supports.
' B. Related sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for materials for anchoring piping systems to building structure.
' 2. Division 7 for roof equipment supports.
3. Division 9 Section"Painting"for field-applied painting requirements.
4. Division 15 Section 15250"Mechanical Insulation"for pipe insulation.
' 1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90.
' 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1 specification sections.
1. Product data,including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and
support schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required pipe
hanger and support.
2. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that their products meet the
specified requirements.
3. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under
"Quality Assurance"Article.
4. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required
clearances,and methods of assembly of components.
e15140-1 No.99132-CP2
5. Maintenance data for supports and anchors for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in '
Division 1 and Division 15 Section 15010"Basic Mechanical Requirements".
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS Dl.I "Structural Welding Code-Steel".
B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME 'Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," '
Section IX,"Welding and Brazing Qualifications".
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable codes pertaining to product materials and installation of '
supports and anchors.
D. NFPA Compliance: Hangers and supports shall comply with NFPA standard No. 13 when used as a component of a
fire protection piping systems. '
E. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers,supports,and components shall be listed and labeled by UL and FM where used
for fire protection piping systems.
F. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Hangers, supports, and components
shall be listed and labeled by a NRTL where used for fire protection piping systems. The term"NRTL"shall be as
defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. '
PART 2: PRODUCTS '
2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials,design,and manufacturer complying with '
MSS SP-58.
1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that will not have field- '
applied finish.
2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct '
contact with copper tubing.
3. Use of C-clamp type beam clamps,MSS Types 19 and 23,for attaching to structural members,are to be used
only when installed with restraining straps designed by the hanger manufacturer for the purpose of restraining ,
c-clamp hangers.
B. Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi average compressive strength,waterproofed calcium silicate,encased with '
a sheet metal shield. Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of the pipe and shall be of length indicated
by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates,Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36.
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type lIn and clean uniformly graded, natural sand 1
(ASTM C 404,Size No.2). Mix ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand,by volume,with minimum amount
of water required for placement and hydration.
15140-2 No.[COMM]
1
C. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two-
section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be
as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.
' PART 3: EXECUTION
' 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with
installing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
' 3.02 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure;
comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together
on field-fabricated,heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying
with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for
smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe
hangers.
' B. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span
length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges,
guides, strainers,expansion joints and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is
' placed; fasten insert to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2,500 psi is indicated, install
reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts,bolts,rods,nuts,washers,and other accessories.
D. Field-Fabricated,Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required;weld steel in
accordance with AWS D-1.1.
E. Support fire protection systems piping independently from other piping systems.
' F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement
between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar
units.
' G. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement
will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
H. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections
allowed by ASMI B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded.
I. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.
' 1. Clamps: Attach clamps,including spacers(if any),to piping with clamps projecting through insulation;do not
exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9.
e2. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill
interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation.
' 3. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold and hydronic water piping that has vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following:
15140-3 No. [COMM]
NPS LENGTH THICKNESS
1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048
4 12 0.060 '
5&6 18 0.060
8 THROUGH 14 24 0.075
4. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield
5. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated,with insulation of same thickness as piping.
J. Locate hangers at maximum 10'-0"on center at 8"dia.and larger pipes supported from steel joints. Locate hangers
at joist panel points.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS
A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to
prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. ,
B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, pleates, and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with
ASME B31.9 and with AWS Standards D 1.1.
C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with expansion unit manufacturer's '
written instructions to control movement to compensators.
D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe runs, at intermediate
points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to
accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins expansion joints and elsewhere as indicated. '
B. Anchor to building substrate.
3.05 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS '
A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for PiP•mg and equipment '
3.06 METAL FABRICATION '
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports. Install and align
fabricated anchors in indicated locations.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded '
because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds made,methods used in correcting welding work,and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base
metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
151404 No.[COMM] '
' 3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so that contours welded
surfaces to match adjacent contours.
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of
pipe.
B. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds,bolted connections, and abraded areas of the
shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 section"Painting"of these specifications.
C. For galvanized surfaces clean welds bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to
comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 15140
' 15140-5 No. [COMM]
SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This section is a part of Division-15 Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods, and is part of each
Division-15 section making reference to identification devices specified herein.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of mechanical identification work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other
Division-15 sections.
B. Type of identification devices specified in this section include the following:
1. Painted Identification Materials.
2. Plastic Pipe Markers.
3. Plastic Tape.
4. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker.
5. Plastic Duct Markers.
6. Valve Tags.
7. Valve Schedule Frames.
8. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs.
9. Plastic Equipment Markers.
10. Plasticized Tags.
C. Mechanical identification furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, is specified as part of equipment
assembly in other Division-15 sections.
D. Refer to other Division-15 sections for identification requirements at central-station mechanical control center;not
work of this section.
E. Refer to Division-16 sections for identification requirements of electrical work;not work of this section.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of identification devices of types and sizes
required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size,length of color field,colors,and viewing angles
of identification devices.
1.04 SUBNHTTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification
material and device required.
B. Samples: Submit samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation required for each
identification material or system.
15190-1 No.99132-CP2
C. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system,typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2"x 11"bond paper.
Tabulate valve number,piping system, system abbreviation(as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space),
and variations for identification(if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special
uses,by special"flags",in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies,furnish extra copies for Maintenance
Manuals as specified in Division 1.
D. Maintenance Data.: Include product data and schedules in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements
of Division 1.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering mechanical identification materials which may be
incorporated in the work include;but are not limited to,the following:
1. Allen Systems,Inc.
2. Brady(W.H.)Co.;Signmark Div.
3. Industrial Safety Supply Co.,Inc.
4. Seton Name Plate Corp.
2.02 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIAL
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as
referenced in other Division-15 sections. Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is
Installer's option,but provide single selection for each product category.
2.03 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils,prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with
recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 1-1/4" high letters for
ductwork,and not less than 3/4"high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions.
B. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel;black,except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade
or pressurized spray-can form and grade. !
C. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for piping
systems,comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors.
2.04 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS
A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standardpre-printed, semi-rigid P-o� color-coded pipe markers
complying with ANSI A13.1.
B. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed,permanent adhesive, color-coded,pressure-
sensitive vinyl pipe markers,complying with ANSI A13.1.
C. Insulation: Furnish 1"thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to be installed on
uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 1250F or greater. Cut length to extend 2"beyond each end of
plastic pipe marker.
15190-2 No.99132-CP2
D. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers,
extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location,fastened by one of the following methods:
1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.
3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe(or insulation).
4. Taped to pipe(or insulation)with color-coded plastic adhesive tape,not less than 3/4"wide;full circle at both
ends of pipe marker,tape lapped 1-1/2".
E. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6"and larger(including insulation if any),provide either full-band or strip-
type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the
following methods:
1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe(or insulation).
2. Taped to pipe (or insulation)with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2" wide, full circle at
both ends of pipe marker,tape lapped 3".
3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's standard stainless steel
bands.
F. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance,
as selected by Architect/Engineer in cases of variance with names as shown or specified.
2.05 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded duct markers. Conform to the following
color code:
1. Green: Cold air.
2. Yellow. Hot air.
3. Yellow/Green: Supply air.
4. Blue: Exhaust,outside,return,and mixed air.
5. For hazardous exhausts,use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1.
B. Nomenclature: Include the following:
1. Direction of air flow.
2. Duct service(supply,return,exhaust,etc.).
3. Duct origin(from).
4. Duct destination(to).
5. Design cfm.
2.06 PLASTIC TAPE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive(self-adhesive)vinyl tape,not less than 3
mils thick
B. Width: Provide 1-1/2"wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters(including insulation,if any)of less than
6",2- 1/2"wide tape for larger pipes.
C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1,except where another color selection is indicated.
15190-3 No.99132-CP2
2.07 UNDERGROUND-TYPE PLASTIC LINE MARKERS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-
burial service;not less than 6"wide x 4 mils thick Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates type
of service of buried pipe.
1. Provide multi-ply tape consisting of solid aluminum foil core between 2-layers of plastic tape.
2.08 VALVE TAGS
A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in
1/4"high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2"high,and with 5/32"hole for fastener.
I. Provide 1-1/2"diameter tags,except as otherwise indicated.
2. Provide size and shape as specified or scheduled for each piping system
3. Fill tag engraving with black enamel.
B. Plastic Laminate Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard 3/32" thick engraved plastic laminate valve tags,
with piping system abbreviation in 1/4"high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2"high,and with 5/32"hole for
fastener.
1. Provide 1-1/2"sq.black tags with white lettering,except as otherwise indicated.
2. Provide size,shape and color combination as specified or scheduled for each piping system
C. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain(wire link or beaded type),or solid brass S-
hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves,and manufactured specifically for that purpose.
D. Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/16" thick engraved plastic laminate access panel
markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Include 1/8" center hole to allow
attachment.
2.09 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES
A. General: For each page of valve schedule,provide glazed display frame,with screws for removable mounting on
masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum,with SSB-grade sheet glass.
2.10 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAN13NATE SIGNS
A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in the sizes and
thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated,black with
white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive
mounting is necessary because of substrate.
B. Thickness: 1/16"for units up to 20 sq.in.or 8"length; 1/8"for larger units.
C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or
should not penetrate the substrate.
2.11 PLASTIC EQUIPMENT MARKERS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminatedlastic
p , color coded equipment markers. Conform to the
following color code:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.
151904 No.99132-CP2
2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components.
4. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
5. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any of the above criteria.
6. For hazardous equipment,use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1.
B. Nomenclature: Include the following,matching terminology on schedules as closely as possible:
1. Name and plan number.
2. Equipment service.
3. Design capacity.
4. Other design parameters such as pressure drop,entering and leaving conditions,rpm,etc.
C. Size: Provide approximate 2-1/2" x 4" markers for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2" x 6" for
equipment.
2.12 PLASTICIZED TAGS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card
stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4"x 5-5/8",with brass grommets and wire fasteners,
and with approximate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER,
CAUTION,DO NOT OPERATE).
2.13 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with
corresponding designations shown,specified or scheduled. Provide numbers,lettering and wording as indicated or,
if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and
operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified,provide identification
which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; Boiler No. 3, Air Supply No. 1H,
Standpipe F12).
2.14 EXTRA STOCK
A. Furnish minimum of 5% extra stock of each mechanical identification material required, including additional
numbered valve tags(not less than 3) for each piping system, additional piping system identification markers, and
additional plastic laminate engraving blanks of assorted sizes.
1. Where stenciled markers are provided,clean and retain stencils after completion of stenciling and include used
stencils in extra stock,along with required stock of stenciling paints and applicators.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation,painting or other covering
or finish,including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces,install identification after completion of covering and
painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
15190-5 No.99132-CP2
.. 3.02 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Identify au supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork with duct markers; or provide stenciled
signs and arrows, showing ductwork service and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides most
contrast with ductwork color).
B. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by removable ceiling system, locate signs
near points where ductwork originates or continues into concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar
concealment),and at 50'spacings along exposed runs.
C. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating
purpose of access(to what equipment)and other maintenance and operating instructions,and appropriate safety and
procedural information
D. Concealed Doors: Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar concealment,plasticized
tags may be installed for identification in lieu of specified signs,at Installer's option.
3.03 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
>I
A. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification,and
include arrows to show normal direction of flow:
1. Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle, and contrasting lettering of black or !
white. Extend color band or rectangle 2"beyond ends of lettering.
2. Stenciled markers,with lettering color complying with ANSI Al3.1.
3. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section. Install on pipe
insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.
4. Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous color-coded painting of piping IS
provided.
B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces,machine
rooms,accessible maintenance spaces(shafts,tunnels,plenums)and exterior non-concealed locations.
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where
there could be question of flow pattern.
3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings,or enter non-accessible enclosures.
4. At access doors,manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in
congested areas of piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings,except omit intermediately spaced markers.
C. Pipe Insulation Schedule: Verify schedule with Owner prior to ordering labels.
Service Line Symbol Color
Sanitary Sewer SAN Green
Sanitary Sewer Vent SAN Green
Domestic Hot Water HW(Temp°F) Light Red
Domestic Color Water(Hard) HCW Light Blue
Domestic Cold Water(Soft) SCW Light Blue
Rain Water RWC Yellow
15190-6 No.99132-CP2
Service Line Symbol Color
Hot Water Supply HWS Dark Red
Hot Water Return HWR Dark Red
Chilled Water Supply CHWS Dark Blue
Chilled Water Return CHWk Dark Blue
Condenser Water Supply CDS Light Blue
Condenser Water Return CDR Light Blue
Compressed Air CA Black
Interruptible Natural Gas ING Orange
Firm Natural Gas FNG Orange
Fire Protection Main Fire Red
Fuel Oil Supply FOS Purple
Fuel Oil Return FOR Purple
Acid Resistant Waste ARSAN Green
Acid Resistant Vent ARSAN Green
Flow Direction Arrows Black
Lettering White
3.04 UNDERGROUND PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. General: During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground piping systems, install continuous
underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6" to 8" below finished grade. Where
multiple small lines are buried in common trench and do not exceed overall width of 16",install single line marker.
For tile fields and similar installations,mark only edge pipe lines of field.
t3.05 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves,
valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose
bibs,and shut-off valves at plumbing fixtures,HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use
fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system
L Tagging Schedule: Comply with requirements of"Valve Tagging Schedule"at end of this section.
2. Valve Tags: The contractor may at his option provide brass or laminate tags.
B. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in machine rooms where indicated or,if not otherwise indicated,where
directed by Architect/Engineer.
1. Where more than one major machine room is shown for project,install mounted valve schedule in each major
machine room,and repeat only main valves which are to be operated in conjunction with operations of more
than single machine room
3.06 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major item of
mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or
device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices.
1. Main control and operating valves,including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets.
2. Meters,gages,thermometers and similar units.
3. Fuel-burning units including boilers,furnaces,heaters,stills and absorption units.
4. Pumps,compressors,chillers,condensers and similar motor-driven units.
5. Heat exchangers,coils,evaporators,cooling towers,heat recovery units and similar equipment.
6. Fans,blowers,primary balancing dampers and mixing boxes.
7. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
15190-7 No.99132-CP2
8. Tanks and pressure vessels.
9. Strainers,filters,humidifiers,water treatment systems and similar equipment.
B. Optional Sign Types: Where lettering larger than 1"height is needed for proper identification,because of distance
from normal location of required identification, stenciled signs may be provided in lieu of engraved plastic, at
Installer's option.
C. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4" high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 2'-0", 1/2"high
for distances up to 6-0", and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering 2/3
to 3/4 of size of principal lettering.
D. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit,provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units,inform
operator of operational requirements,indicate safety and emergency precautions,and wam of hazards and improper
operations.
E. Optional Use of Plasticized Tags: At Installer's option, where equipment to be identified is concealed above
acoustical ceiling or similar concealment,plasticized tags may be installed within concealed space to reduce amount
of text in exposed sign(outside concealment).
1. Operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in non-occupied spaces (including machine
rooms) may, at Installer's option, be identified by installation of plasticized tags in lieu of engraved plastic
signs.
3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by work of this
division or other divisions.
B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices,and glass frames of valve charts.
END OF SECTION 15190
15190-8 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Division 15 Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods applies to work of this section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Extent of mechanical insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by
requirements of this section.
B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following:
i1. Piping System Insulation:
a. Fiberglass(preformed).
b. Cellular Glass.
c. Calcium Silicate.
d. Flexible Cellular Elastomeric(preformed).
2. Ductwork System Insulation:
a. Fiberglass.
b. Calcium Silicate.
3. Equipment Insulation:
a. Fiberglass.
b. Calcium Silicate.
c. Cellular Glass.
d. Flexible Cellular Elastomeric.
C. Refer to Division 15 Section 15140"Supports and Anchors"for protection saddles,protection shields, and thermal
hanger shields;not work of this section.
D. Refer to Division 15 Section 15891 "Metal Ductwork"for duct linings;not work of this section.
E. Refer to Division 15 Section 15190"Mechanical Identification"for installation of identification devices for piping,
ductwork,and equipment,not work of this section.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical insulation products, of types
and sizes required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical
insulations similar to that required for this project.
15250-1 No.99132-CP2
1
C. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation,jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics
and adhesives)with flame-spread index of 25 or less,and smoke-developed index of 50 or less,as tested by ASTM
E 84(NFPA 255)method.
1. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of
150 provided insulation is not installed within 10 feet of an outside air intake.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
i
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of
mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number,k value,thickness, and famished
accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.
B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of mechanical insulation.
Include this data and product data in maintenance manual.
C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's sample of each piping insulation type required, and of each duct and equipment
insulation type required. Affix label to sample completely describing product.
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or j
label,affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products.
B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet
insulation;remove from project site.
i
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work
include the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries,Inc.
2. Certainteed Corp.
3. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
4. Schuler International(formerly Manville Products).
5. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
6. Pittsburg Corning Corp.
7. Rubatex Corp.
8. IMCOA.
9. Unitrax.
2.02 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Preformed Fiberglass Piping Insulation (PFG): ASTM C 547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated; thermal
conductivity(avg)of 0.25 Btu/hr-ft2-oF or lower at mean temperature of 75 OF.
B. Cellular Glass Piping Insulation(CG): ASTM C 552,Type Il,Class 2;thermal conductivity(avg) of 0.35 Btu/br-
ft2-oF or lower at mean temperature of 75 OF.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Piping Insulation(FEC): ASTM C 534, Type I;thermal conductivity(avg) of 0.26
Btu/hr-ft?of or lower at mean temperature of 75 OF.
15250-2 No.99132-CP2
D. Calcium Silicate Piping Insulation(CS): ASTM C 533,Type I.
E. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C 921,Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient,Type II for piping
with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all piping at Installers option.
1. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastened as per manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Encase exterior piping insulation with aluminum jacket with weather-proof construction.
F. Staples,Bands,Wires,and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
G. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications
indicated.
2.03 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 612,Class 1.
B. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 553,Type I,Class B-3.
C. Calcium Silicate Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 533,Type I,Block.
D. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 921,Type I for ductwork with temperatures below ambient;Type II for
ductwork with temperatures above ambient.
E. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar
accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
F. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar
compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
2.04 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 612,Class 2.
B. Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 553,Type I,Class B-4.
C. Calcium Silicate Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 533,Type I,Block.
D. Cellular Glass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 552,Type I.
E. Flexible Cellular Elastomeric Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 534,Type H.
F. Jacketing Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide pre-sized glass cloth jacketing material, not less than 7.8
ounces per square yard,or metal jacket at Installer's option,except as otherwise indicated.
G. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives,.cements, sealers, mastics and protective finishes as
recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
H. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples,bands,wire,wire netting,tape, corner angles,anchors and stud
pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
15250-3 . No.99132-CP2
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.02 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION
A. Application Requirements: Insulate the following plumbing piping systems with insulation types and thickness as
listed in Table No. 15250-1 below.
1. Potable cold water,hot water,and hot water piping with temperature maintenance cable.
2. Interior aboveground,horizontal storm water piping.
3. Plumbing vents within 6 lineal feet ofroof outlet.
4. Condensate drain piping from cooling coils and energy recovery units.
5. Make-up water piping to HVAC equipment and systems.
6. Hot drain piping(where indicated).
7. P-trap and 5 lineal feet of sanitary piping from AHU condensate drains.
TABLE NO.15250-1: MINIMUM PIPE INSULATION
TYPE OF 1-1/4" 1%a" 2V2''
PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION &smaller to 2" &lar eI ,
Cold Water Piping PFG %2"
HW Piping PFG %z" 1" 1%i'
Storm Drains PFG %Z" i" 1"
Plumbing Vents PFG %Z'
Condensate Drains PFG %i' 1" 1"
Make-up Water Piping PFG ''/z"
Hot Drain Piping PFG %Z' 1" 1"
P-Trap and Sanitary Piping PFG %Z" 1" 1"
HW Piping w/Temperature PFG 1" 1%Z" 2"
Maintenance Cable
NOTES:
1. Provide hardwood blocks at all pipe hanger locations for 3"pipe and larger.
2. Provide thermal hanger shields for 6"pipe and larger.
B. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation for the following. '
1. Interior air conditioner condensate drain piping in mechanical rooms provided piping is less than 3 lineal feet
and is located within 12"of floor.
3.03 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION
A. Application Requirements: Insulate the following HVAC piping systems with insulation types and thickness as
listed in Table No. 15250-2 below.
152504 No.99132-CP2
B. Cold Piping(40 of to ambient):
1. Refrigeration suction lines between evaporator and compressor.
2. Hydronic water supply and return piping.
C. Hot Low Pressure Piping(to 250 OF):
' 1. Hot gas refrigerant piping.
TABLE NO.15250-2: MINEVIUM PIPE INSULATION
INSULATION THICKNESS IN INCHES FOR
PIPE SIM2
PIPING SYSTEM FLUID TEMP. RUNOUTS 1"and 1-1/4" 2'h" 5" 8"and
TYPES RANGE.OF 2"1 smaller to 2" to 4" to 6" larger
HEATING SYSTEMS
Steam and hot water
high pressure-temp. 306-450 1'Y2 2'% 2Y2 3 3'Y2 3'/z
Med.pressure temp. 251-305 1%2 2 2% 2% 3 3
Low pressure temp. 201-250 1 1'h 1'/z 2 2 2
Low temperature 120-200 '/s 1 1 1'/2 1 YZ 11/2
' Steam condensate
(for leed water) Any 1 1 1'h 2 2 2
COOLING SYSTEMS
Chilled water 40-55 '/2 h % 1 1 1
Refrigerant,or brine Below 40 I 1 1'/2 1%2 1 Y2 1'%
1 Runouts not exceeding 12 fat in length to individual terminal units.
2 For piping exposed to outdoor air,increase thickness by Y.inch.
NOTES:
1. Provide hardwood blocks at all pipe hanger locations for 3"pipe and larger.
2. Provide thermal hanger shields for 6"pipe and larger.
D. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation for the following.
1. Hot low pressure piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinets.
2. Cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan.
3.04 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION
A. Insulation Omitted: Do not insulate lined ductwork Flex ductwork in plenum spaces shall not be insulated. Refer
to Section 158911.2.01.I-1.
B. Ductwork--
1.
uctwork:1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following ductwork:
a. Outdoor air intake ductwork between air entrance and fan inlet or HVAC unit inlet.
b. HVAC supply ductwork between fan discharge,or HVAC unit discharge,and room terminal outlet. Do
not insulate ductwork exposed within a conditioned space,i.e.gyms.
15250-5 No.99132-CP2
c. HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory or lined.
d. Exhaust and relief ductwork within 10 foot of wall or roof.
e. Combustion and intake ductwork.
f. Do not insulate return ductwork unless exposed to non-conditioned areas of the building.
2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:
a. Rigid Fiberglass: 1%Z"thick,increase thickness to 2"in machine,fan and equipment rooms. '
b. Flexible Fiberglass: 1%'thick,application limited to concealed locations.
C. Hot Ductwork(Above Ambient Temperature):
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot ductwork
a. Range and hood exhaust ductwork
b. Water heater flues.
2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:
a. Rigid Fber 2"thick
b. Flexible Fberglass:2"thick,application limited to concealed locations.
c. Calcium Silicate: 2"thick Use for range and hood exhaust ductwork,in addition to other applications ,
where indicated.
D. Ductwork Exposed to Weather. Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installing sealed double-wall ductwork
with insulation between walls. Provide epoxy mastic finish applied as recommended by manufacturer.
3.05 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. Cold Equipment(Below Ambient Temperature):
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold equipment:
a. Refrigeration equipment,including tanks and pumps.
b. Drip pans under chilled equipment.
C. Water softeners.
d Cold and chilled water pumps.
e. Roof drain bodies.
2. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation: i
a. Fiberglass: 2"thick for surfaces 35°F and 3"thick for surfaces 35°F and lower.
b. Cellular glass: 3"thick for surfaces above 35°F and 4%z"thick for surfaces 35°F and lower. 1
c. Flexible Cellular Elastomeric: 1"thick-
B.
hickB. Hot Equipment(Above Ambient Temperature): ,
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot equipment.
a. Boilers(not pre-insulated at factory).
b. Hot water storage tanks.
c. Water heaters(not pre-insulated at factory).
d. Heat exchangers.
e. Hot water expansion tanks.
f. Hot water pumps.
g. Fuel oil heaters. '
i
15250-6 No.99132-CP2
2. Insulate each-item of equipment specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:
a. Fiberglass: 2"thick,except 3"thick for low-pressure boilers and steam jacketed heat exchangers.
b. Calcium Silicate: 3" thick, except 4'/a" thick for low-pressure boilers and steam jacketed heat
exchangers.
c. Flexible Cellular Elastomeric: 1"thick. Do not use for equipment operating above 180°F.
C. Breeching and Stacks:
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following breechings and stacks:
a. Breechings between heating equipment outlet and stack or chimney connection,except for double wall or
factory insulated breechings.
b. Stacks from bottom to top except for factory insulated stacks.
2. Insulate each breeching and stack specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of
insulation:
a. Fiberglass: 3Y2"thick.
b. Calcium Silicate: 5"thick.
D. Equipment Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of weather-barrier, steel
jacket with epoxy mastic protective finish,applied as recommended by manufacturer.
' 3.06 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION
A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose.
B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing,painting,testing and acceptance of tests.
C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length
units of insulation,with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.
D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation j oints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit
over surfaces to be covered.
E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation,and protect to prevent puncture or other damage.
F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of
insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's
option)except where specific form or type is indicated.
G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similarP1P g penetrations, exc' in t where
except
otherwise indicated.
iH. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes,apply 3"wide vapor barrier tape or band
over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3"
wide vapor barrier tape or band.
I. Equipment Exposed to Weather. Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of weather-barrier,
aluminum jacket,applied as recommended by manufacturer.
15250-7 No.99132-M
a
3.07 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose.
B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.
C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit
over surfaces to be covered.
D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation,and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage.
E. Extend ductwork insulation without intenuption through walls, floors and similar ductwork penetrations, except
where otherwise indicated
F. Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated, omit insulation on ductwork where internal insulation or sound
absorbing linings have been installed.
G. Corner Angles: Except for oven and hood exhaust duct insulation, install corner angles on external corners of
insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and
in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves intended purpose. '
B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. Redo poorly fitted joints.
Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gapping joints and excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship.
C. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage.
D. Do not apply insulation to equipment,breechings,or stacks while hot.
E. Apply insulation using staggered joint method for both single and double layer construction,where feasible. Apply
each layer of insulation separately.
F. Coat insulated surfaces with layer of insulating cement, troweled in workmanlike manner, leaving smooth
continuous surface. Fill in scored block, seams, chipped edges and depressions, and cover over wire netting and
joints with cement of sufficient thickness to remove surface irregularities.
G. Cover insulated surfaces with all-service jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured Lap seams at least 2". Apply
over vapor barrier where applicable.
H. Do not insulate boiler manholes,handholes,cleanouts,ASME stamp,and manufacturer's nameplate. Provide neatly
beveled edge at intemiptions of insulation.
I. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment which must be opened periodically for
maintenance;include metal vessel covers,fasteners,flanges,fiames and accessories.
END OF SECTION 15250
15250-8 No.99132-CP2
�I
SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1: GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
' Specification sections,apply to this section.
B. The requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this Section:
1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 15140 Supports and Anchors.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies automatic sprinkler systems for buildings and structures. Materials and equipment specified
' in this Section include:
1. Pipe,fittings,valves,and specialties.
1 2. Sprinklers.
B. Products fiunished but not installed include sprinkler head cabinet with spare sprinkler heads. Furnish to the
' Owner's maintenance personnel.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Section"Water Systems"for fire protection piping from fire service mains to a point 5 feet outside
the building.
2. Division 7 Section"Sealants and Caulking", for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through
basement walls and fire/smoke barriers.
3. Division 10 Section"Protection Specialties"for fire extinguishers and extinguisher cabinets.
4. Division 15 Section 15190"Mechanical Identification"for labeling and identification of fire protection piping
system and components.
5. Division 16 Section 16721 "Fire Alarm Systems"for alarm connections.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size(NPS).
B. Other definitions for fire protection systems are listed in NFPA Standards 13, 14,20 and 24.
C. Working Plans as used in this Section means those documents (including drawings and calculations) prepared
pursuant to the requirements contained in NFPA 13 and 14 for obtaining approval of the authority having
jurisdiction.
r
15300-1 No.99132-CP2
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION '
A. Fire protection system is a "Wet-Pipe" system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a piping system
containing water and connected to a water supply so that water discharges immediately from sprinklers opened by
fire.
1.05 WORK SCOPE
A. Describe Work Scope for each project.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Upon substantial completion of the piping layout and hydraulic calculations,submit a reproducible drawing and one
set of prints and calculations to the Engineer for review prior to completing the submittal. The Engineer will review
the piping layout and return a print marked to show changes required before the final submittal is made.
B. The final shop drawing submittal shall be in accordance with the UBC and shall include full size drawings of the
complete piping and head layout indicating sprinkler zones, area hazard ratings, piping material, head types and
method of hanging,hydraulic calculations for each zone, all product data, and welders certificates. The hydraulic
calculations must prove the remote area for each zone. Submit supplemental calculations for all non-typical areas.
C. Upon completion of the shop drawings, submit to the reviewing agencies for approval. The reviewing authorities ,
may include the following:
1. State Fire Marshall 11
2. City/Local Fire Marshall
3. Health and Building Department
D. Submit one set of shop drawings to the Owner's insurance carrier.
E. Submit seven(7)copies of the shop drawing submittal to the Engineer. Two(2)of the seven(7)copies submitted
shall be stamped"approved"by each of the reviewing agencies. "Approved"copies submitted shall include copies
of the agencies reviewer comments.
F. The drawings must be stamped and signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Minnesota. ,
G. Upon substantial completion of the project, submit contract closeout submittals to include two sets of as-builts
drawings,operating and maintenance manuals,as-built hydraulic calculations,and"Material and Test Certificates"
for above and below ground piping.
H. As built hydraulic calculations must be submitted to prove remote area criteria is met with all included field
modifications. ,
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installation and alterations of fire protection piping, equipment, specialties, and '
accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified installer. The term
qualified means experienced in such work(experienced shall mean having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar
in size and scope of this project),familiar with all precautions required,and has complied with all the requirements
of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon request,submit evidence of such qualifications to the Architect. Refer to
Division 15 Section: "Reference Standards and Definitions"for definitions for"Installers".
B. Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of AWS D10.9,
"Specifications for Qualifications of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing,Level AR-3."
15300-2 No.99132-CP2 '
' C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes:
1. State Uniform Fire Code
2. NFPA 13-Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
3. UL and FM Compliance: Fire protection system materials and components shall be Underwriter's
Laboratories listed and labeled,and Factory Mutual approved for the application anticipated.
4. Uniform Building Code with the State of Minnesota amendments.
' 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule rough-in installations with installations of other building components.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
' 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering fire protection system products which may be
incorporated in the work include the following:
1. Gate Valves:
a. Fairbanks
b. Jenkins
' c. Kennedy Valve,Div of ITT Grinnell Valve Co.,Inc.
d. Stockham
e. Mueller
f. Potter Roemer
2. Swing Check Valves:
a. Fairbanks
b. Jenkins
c. Kennedy Valve,Div of ITT Grinnell Valve Co.,Inc.
d. Star Sprinkler Corp.
e. Stockham
f. Mueller
g. Ames
h. Potter Roemer
3. Grooved Mechanical Couplings:
a. Stockham
b. Victaulic Company of America
C. Custin-Bacon
d. Grinnel Gruvlok
e. Star Fittings
' 4. Water Flow Indicators:
a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
b. Star Sprinkler Corp.
c. Victaulic Company of America
d. Viking Corp.
e. Potter Roemer
1 15300-3 No.99132-CP2
5. Sprinkler Heads: ,
a. Automatic Sprinkler Corp of America.
b. Central Sprinkler Corp.
C. Globe Fire Equipment Co.
d. Guardian Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
e. Gem
f. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co.,Inc.
g. Star Sprinkler Corp.
IL Viking Corp.
2.02 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS ,
A. General: Refer to Part 3 Article "PIPE APPLICATIONS" for identification of systems where the below specified
pipe and fitting materials are used '
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135,Schedule 40,seamless,black steel pipe,plain ends.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135,ASTM-A568,Schedule 10,seamless,black steel pipe,plain ends.
2.03 FITTINGS
A. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 250,standard pattern,for threaded joints. Threads shall conform '
to ANSI B1.20.1.
B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 300, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall
conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
C. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234,seamless or welded,for welded joints. '
D. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47 Grade 32510 malleable
iron; or ASTM A53,Type F or Types E or S, Grade B fabricated steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed
to accept grooved end couplings.
E. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: consist of ductile or malleable iron housing,a synthetic rubber gasket of a central ,
cavity pressure-responsive design;with nuts,bolts,locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure roll-grooved pipe
and fittings. Grooved mechanical couplings including gaskets used on dry-pipe systems shall be listed for dry-pipe
service.
F. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1,Class 250;raised ground face,bolt holes spot faced
G. Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B 16.24,Class 300;raised ground face,bolt holes spot faced. ,
2.04 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Gasket Materials: thickness,material,and type suitable for fluid or gas to be handled,and design temperatures and
pressures.
2.05 GENERAL DUTY VALVES ,
A. Gate Valves-2 Inch and Smaller: body and bonnet of cast bronze, 175 pound cold water working pressure-non-
shock,
onshock, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, screw-in bonnet, and malleable iron
handwheel. Valves shall be capable of being repacked under pressure,with valve wide open.
153004 No.99132-CP2 '
' B. Gate Valves-2-1/2 Inch and Larger: iron body;bronze mounted, 175 pound cold water working pressure -non-
shock. Valves shall have solid taper wedge; outside screw and yoke, rising stem; flanged bonnet, with body and
bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B;replaceable bronze wedge facing rings; flanged ends; and a packing
' assembly consisting of a cast iron gland flange,brass gland,packing,bonnet, and bronze bonnet bushing. Valves
shall be capable of being repacked under pressure,with valve wide open.
C. Swing Check Valves: MSS SP-71;Class 175,cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126,Class B;
horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be
capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line.
' 2.06 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinkler Heads: glass bulb type, and style as indicated or required by the application. Provide quick response
heads where required bycode.
B. Sprinkler Head Finishes: Provide heads with the following finishes,coordinate with Architect and Owner:
' 1. Upright,Pendant,and Sidewall Styles: chrome plated in finish spaces, exposed to view;rough bronze finish
for heads in unfinished spaces and not exposed to view. Heads shall be teflon or PVC-coated where installed
exposed to excessive moisture, acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes. Heads shall be equipped with
guards where exposed in Gyms and other similar areas.
' 2. Concealed Style: rough brass,with painted,off-white cover plate.
3. Flush Style: bright chrome,with painted white escutcheon plate.
4. Semi-recessed Pendant Style: bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon plate; for use in all finished
ceiling applications.
5. Dry Pendant Style: Rough brass, locate in walk-in freezers and coolers and other areas subject to freezing
temperatures.
tC. Sprinkler Head Cabinet and Wrench:finished steel cabinet,suitable for wall mounting,with hinged cover and space
for 6 spare sprinkler heads plus sprinkler head wrench. Provide a separate cabinet for each style sprinkler head on
the project.
2.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner,2 valve wrenches for each type of sprinkler head installed.
B. Sprinkler Heads and Cabinets: Furnish six extra sprinkler heads of each style included in the project. Furnish each
style with its own sprinkler head cabinet and special wrenches as specified in this Section.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
' A. Examine rough-in for fire equipment to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing.
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Flow Test: Contractor to provide an updated flow test prior to design.
' 15300-5 No.99132-CP2
3.02 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 1%2 inch and smaller.
B. Install Schedule 10 steel pipe with roll-grooved ends and grooved mechanical couplings for 2 inch and larger.
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and
arrangement of piping systems. So far as practical,install piping as indicated.
1. Deviations from approved."Working Plans" for sprinkler piping, require written approval of the authority ,
having jurisdiction. Written approval shall be on file with the Architect prior to deviating for the approved
"Working Plans."
B. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.
C. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction,branch takeoffs from mains,and reductions in pipe sizes. ,
D. Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller,adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in
piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings.
E. Install flanges or flange adaptors on valves,apparatus,and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and larger connections.
F. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and ,
locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical
coupling manufacturer's written instructions,for rigid systems. Provide protection from damage and where subject
to earthquake in accordance with NFPA 13. '
G. Make connections between underground and above-ground piping using an approved transition piece strapped or
fastened to prevent separation.
H. Install mechanical sleeve seal at pipe penetrations in basement and foundation walls. Refer to Section 15050'Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
I. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 and local Authority with jurisdiction ,
complete with shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes.
J. Install pressure gage on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gage with a connection not '
less than 1/4 inch and having a soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve.
Install gages to permit removal,and where they will not be subject to freezing.
K. Obstructions to sprinkler distribution pattern by permanent building components such as electric fixtures, ducts,
pipes,unit heaters,partitions,enclosed spaces and small nitches,etc.and which require additional heads to provide
required coverage shall be the design and installation responsibility of this contractor.
L. Piping shall be installed parallel to building components wherever possible and shall be concealed in walls and
above ceilings unless indicated otherwise on the plans.
M. Pipes passing through masonry or concrete walls/floors and smoke/fire rated walls/floors shall be provided with ,
pipe sleeves set in place at the time of construction. Where core drilling is required, coordinate with structural
engineer so as not to reduce the load carrying capacity of the structure. '
15300-6 No.99132-CP2 '
1
' N. All piping shall be firestopped when penetrating any fire or smoke rated wall. Firestopping shall be placed in steel
sleeves which surround the pipe and are at least the length of the thickness of the wall. Firestopping materials may
be any putty, tape, or pre-manufactured sleeve application,that meets prevailing codes. Refer to Division 7:
Firestopping.
' O. Where exposed piping passes through walls or ceilings, provide chrome escutcheons which completely cover the
penetration.
' 3.04 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
' A. Welded Joints: AWS D10.9,Level AR-3.
B. Threaded Joints: conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and
valves as follows:
1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends,and proximity of internal seat or wall,to determine
how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
' 2. Align threads at point of assembly.
3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe'threads.
4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place the wrench on the valve end
into which the pipe is being threaded.
' 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged. If a weld opens during
cutting or threading operations,that portion of pipe shall not be used.
' C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial
contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts
gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer.
tD. Mechanical Grooved Joints: cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the couplings.
E. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths,remove burrs and fins from pipe ends.
3.05 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
' A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions,NFPA 13 and 14,and the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Gate Valves: Install supervised-open gate valves so located to control all sources of water supply except fire
department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification
signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. Refer to Division 15 Section 15190
"Mechanical Identification"and 3.09 below for valve tags and signs.
C. Install check valves in each water supply connection.
D. Double Detector Check Valves: Install in proper direction of flow in a location to detect system leakage and
unauthorized use of water,and to prevent backflow into public water mains. Install bypass meter,with gate valves
on each side of the meter to permit meter removal,and check valve downstream from the meter.
' 3.06 SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATIONS
A. Use proper tools to prevent damage during installations.
' 15300-7 No.99132-CP2
B. Install sprinklers centered or at'%points on ceiling tiles in lay-in acoustic ceilings. ,
C. Sprinklers shall not be installed directly over pool surface.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ,
A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13. Provide written witnessed
documentation with four(4)copies sent to the engineer. '
B. Replace piping system components which do not pass the test procedures specified, and re-test repaired portion of
the system. ,
3.08 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. Furnish and install permanent,plastic laminated,engraved signs identifying each sprinkler zone,the area it controls, '
and the hydraulic design data.
B. Furnish and install permanent, plastic laminated, engraved signs identifying the inspectors test connection and ,
which zone they service.
END OF SECTION 15300 ,
15300-8 No.99132-CP2 '
SECTION 15411
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1: GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section:
' 1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 15140 Supports and Anchors.
1.02 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes potable cold water,hot water,and circulation hot water piping,fittings,and specialties within
the building to a point 5 feet outside the building.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this section.
1. Division 7 for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through basement walls and fire and smoke
barriers.
2. Division 15 Section 15100"Valves."
3. Division 15 Section 15135 "Meters and Gages"for thermometers and pressure gages.
4. Division 15 Section 15190"Mechanical Identification"for labeling and identification of piping system.
C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include water meters that will be provided by the utility
company to the site and ready for installation.
' 1.03 DEFINIITONS
A. Water Distribution Pipe: A pipe within the building or on the premises that conveys water from the water service
pipe or meter to the points of usage.
B. Water Service Pipe: The pipe from the water main or other source of potable water supply to the water distributing
system of the building served-
C.
ervedC. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are nominal pipe size(NPS).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
' A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections.
1. Product data for each piping specialty and valve specified.
2. Welder Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified in
"Quality Assurance"Article.
' 3. Certification of Compliance with ASME and UL fabrication requirements specified below.
4. Test reports specified in Part 3 of this Section.
' 15411-1 No.99132-CP2
5. Maintenance data for each piping specialty and valve specified for inclusion in Maintenance Manual specified ,
in Division 1 and Division 15 Section 15010-"Basic Mechanical Requirements."
1.05 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with the requirements of Section 15010 'Basic Mechanical
Requirements". In addition to the requirements specified above,refer to specific sections of the specifications for '
additional coordination documentation.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section K"Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following codes:
1. State Plumbing Code '
2. ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping"for materials,products,and installation. Safety valves and pressure
vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
3. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications"for Qualifications
for Welding Processes and Operators.
1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING ,
A. Store pipe in a manner to prevent sagging and bending. '
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into pad. Concrete, ,
reinforcement,and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS '
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work
include but are not limited to the following:
1. Basket Strainers:
a. Josam Co.
b. Metraflex Co.
C. Smith(Jay R.)Mfg.Co. '
d. Spirax Sarco,Inc.
e. Victaulic Co.of America.
f. Mueller Steam Sp.
15411-2 No.99132-CP2
' 2. Balance Cocks:
a. Hammond Valve Corp.
b. Milwaukee Valve Co.,Inc.
' c. Nbco,Inc.
d. Stockham Valves&Fittings,Inc.
e. Am Air Filter
f. B&G
g. Spirax Sarco
h. Taco
' 3. Hose Bibbs:
a. Lee Brass Co.
b. Mansfield Plumbing Products.
c. Nbco,Inc.
d. Watts Regulator Co.
e. Woodford Mfg.Co.
f. Hammond
4. Wall Hydrants:
' a. Josam Co.
b. Smith(Jay R.)Mfg.Co.
C. Wade Div.,Tyler Pipe
d. Woodford Mfg.Co.
e. Zurn Industries Inc.,Hydromechanics Div.
f. Ancon
' 5. Backflow Preventers:
a. Cla-Val Co.
b. Conbraco Industries,Inc.
c. Febco.
d. Hersey Products,Inc.
e. Watts Regulator Co.
f. Zurn Industries Inc.Wilkins Regulator Div.
6. Pressure-Regulating Valves:
a. Cash(A.W.)Valve Mfg.Corp.
b. Cla.-Val Co.
C. Spence Engineering Co.,Inc.
d. Watts Regulator Co.
e. Zurn Industries Inc.,Wilkins Regulator Div.
' 7. Water Meters:
' a. Badger Meter,Inc.
b. Hays Div.,Romac Industries.
c. Hersey Products,Inc.
d. Neptune Water Meter Co.;Subs.Neptune Intl.Corp.
' e. Rockwell Intl.;Measurement&Flow Control Div.
15411-3 No.99132-CP2
8. Relief Valves: ,
a: Cash(A.W.)Valve Mfg.Corp.
b. Conbraco Industries,Inc.
C. Watts Regulator Co.
d. Zurn Industries,Inc.Wilkins Regulator Div.
9. Water Hammer Arresters: '
a. Amtrol,Inc.
b. Ancon,Inc. '
c. Josam Co.
d. Precision Plumbing Products,Inc.
e. Smith(Jay R)Mfg.Co.
f. Wade Div.,Tyler Pipe. '
g. Watts Regulator Co.
h. Zurn Industries,Inc.;Hydromechanics Div.
i. Sioux Chief '
10. Vacuum Breakers For Hose Connections:
a. Cash(A.W.)Valve Mfg.Corp.
b. Conbraco Industries,Inc.
C. Watts Regulator Co.
d. FEBCO ,
2.02 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS
A. General: Pipe and Tube,refer to Part 3,Article "Pipe Applications" for identification of systems where the below '
materials are used.
B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Type L Water Tube,drawn temper. ,
C. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Type K Water Tube,annealed temper.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,schedule 40,seamless,galvanized,plain ends. '
E. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AW WA C 151 or AW WA C 115 ductile-iron pipe,with AW WA C 104 cement-mortar lining.
2.03 FI1"TINGS '
A. General: Pipe and Tube,refer to Part 3,Article "Pipe Applications" for identification of systems where the below '
materials are used.
B. Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B 16.22,streamlined pattern.
C. Galvanized Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads '
shall conform to ASME B 1.20.1.
D. Ductile-Iron Gasketed Fittings: AW WA C 110 or AW WA C 153, 150 psi rating, with cement mortar lining and '
AWWA C1 I rubber gaskets.
E. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B 16.1,Class 125,raised ground face,bolt holes spot faced. '
F. Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24,Class 150,raised ground face,bolt holes spot faced.
154114 No.99132-CP2 ,
' G. Unions: ASME B16.39, malleable iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal
bronze seating surfaces,female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ASME B 1.20.1.
H. Dielectric Unions: Threaded, solder, or grooved-end connections as required to suit application; constructed to
' isolate dissimilar metals,prevent galvanic action,and prevent corrosion.
I. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze wire reinforced protective jacket;
' minimum 150 psig working pressure,maximum 250 deg F operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or
threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
' 2.04 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32,95-5 Tin-Antimony.
' B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8,BCuP Series.
C. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and design temperatures and
' pressures.
2.05 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
' A. General-duty valves(i.e.,gate,globe, check,ball,and butterfly valves)are specified in Division 15 Section 15100
"Valves." Special duty valves are specified below by their generic name; refer to Part 3 Article "Valve
Application"for specific uses and applications for each valve specified.
' 2.06 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES
A. Balance Cocks: 400 PSI WOG, 2 piece, ball valve, handle, memory stop, with threaded-end connections
' conforming to ASME B 1.20.1.
B. Balance Cocks: 400 psi WOG,2 piece bronze,ball valve,handle,memory stop,with solder-end connections.
' 2.07 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Water Hammer Arresters: Bellows type,with stainless steel casing and bellows,pressure rated for 250 psi,tested
and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201.
B. Basket Strainers: Cast-iron body, 125 psi flanges, bolted-type or yoke-type cover with removable noncorrosive
perforated strainer basket having 1/8-inch perforations and lift-out handle.
C. Hose Connections: Hose connections shall have garden hose thread outlets conforming to ASME B 1.20.7.
D. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with chrome- or nickel-plated finish, with renewable composition disc, wheel handle,
1/2-or 3/4-inch solder inlet,hose outlet.
' E. Recessed Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants: Cast-bronze box, with chrome plated face, tee handle key, vacuum breaker,
hinged locking cover,3/4-inch inlet,and hose outlet. Bronze casing shall be length to suit wall thickness.
F. Projecting Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants: Cast-bronze, with chrome-plated face,tee handle key,vacuum breaker, 3/4-
inch inlet,and hose outlet. Bronze casing shall be length to suit wall thickness.
G. Vacuum Breakers: Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE Standard 1011,with finish to match
hose connection.
' 15411-5 No.99132-CP2
H. Backflow Preventers: Reduced-pressure-principle assembly consisting of shutoff valves on inlet and outlet and ,
strainer on inlet. Assemblies shall include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve located between 2
positive seating check valves and comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1013.
I. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Single-seated, direct-operated type, having bronze body with integral strainer and '
complying with requirements of ASSE Standard 1003. Select proper size for maximum flow rate and inlet and
outlet pressures indicated.
J. Relief Valves: Sizes for relief valves shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes for '
indicated capacity of the appliance for which installed.
1. Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever, thermostat, complying with ANSI '
Z21.22 listing requirements for temperature discharge capacity. Temperature relief valves shall be factory set
at 210 deg F,and pressure relief at 150 psi.
2.08 WATER METER '
A. General: Provide water meters with registration in gallons. ,
1. Remote Registration System: Utility company standards.
B. Water Meter-2 Inches And Smaller: Disc type conforming to AW WA C700. ,
C. Water Meter-3 Inches And Larger: Compound type,conforming to AWWA C702.
2.09 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish one valve key for each key-operated wall hydrant,hose bibb,fixture supply,or faucet ,
installed.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment with water connections to verify actual ,
locations of piping connections prior to installation.
3.02 PIPE APPLICATIONS '
A. Install Type L,drawn copper tube with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for pipe sizes 4 inches and smaller,
above ground, within building. Solder joints for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller, brazed joints for pipe sizes 2%2
inches and larger. Install Type&annealed temper copper tube for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller,with minimum
number of joints,below ground.
B. Install galvanized steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 5 inches and larger,above ground,within building.
C. Install cement-lined ductile-iron pipe with grooved ends or flanged ends, above ground, within the building (to
meter). ,
D. Install cement-lined ductile-iron pipe with rubber gasketed joints below ground,inside and outside building.
15411-6 No.99132-CP2 '
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings(plans,schematics,and diagrams)indicate the general location and
arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into consideration pipe sizing
' and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as
indicated.
B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and branch connections.
C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted unless expressly
indicated.
D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications.
' E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless
indicated to be exposed to view.
F. Install piping tight to slabs,beams,joists, columns,walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide
space to permit insulation applications,with 1-inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above
removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.
' G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other,spaced to permit applying full insulation and servicing of valves.
H. Install drains at low points in mains,risers,and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting,3/4-inch ball valve,and short
' 3/4-inch threaded nipple and cap.
I. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls with sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inches shall be galvanized steel pipe; pipe sleeves 6 inches and larger shall be
' galvanized steel sheet metal.
J. Interior Miscellaneous Penetration: Where pipes pass through interior walls, partitions, ceiling, or floors, the
acoustic and airflow resisting characteristics shall be maintained. Seal pipe penetrations using sleeves and special
sealers and material as prescribed in Division 7.
K. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass though fire-rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the
fire-rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.
L. Install piping with 1/32-inch-per-foot(1/4 percent)downward slope towards drain point.
3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
' A. General: Hanger, support, and anchor devices conforming to MSS SP-69 are specified in Division 15 Section
15140"Supports and Anchors." Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports:
B. Pipe Attachments: Install the following:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers,MSS Type 1,for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length.
' 2. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, and spring hangers, MSS Type 41 with Type 49, for individual
horizontal runs 20 feet and longer.
3. Pipe roll,complete MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs,20 feet or longer,support on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
15411-7 No.99132-CP2
C. Install hangers for horizontal piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: ,
Nom Pipe Steel Pipe Copper Tube Min.Rod
Size-Inches Max.Span-Ft. Max.Span-Ft. Dia.-Inches.
Up to 3/4 7 5 3/8 '
1 .7 6 3/8
1-1/4 7 7 3/8
1-1/2 9 8 3/8 '
2 10 8 3/8
2-1/2 11 9 1/2
3 12 10 1/2 '
3-1/2 13 11 1/2
4 14 12 1/2
5 16 13 5/8
6 17 14 3/4 ,
8 19 16 7/8
10 22 18 7/8
12 23 19 7/8 '
D. Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor.
3.05 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION ,
A. Soldered Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS"Soldering Manual."
B. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS"Brazing Manual." '
1. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts of piping specialties '
before soldering and brazing.
2. Fill the tubing and fittings during soldering and brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to
prevent formation of scale. ,
3. Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature.
C. Threaded Joints: Conform to ASME B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field-cut threads. Join pipe fittings and
valves as follows:
1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends,and proximity of internal seat or wall,to determine '
how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
2. Align threads at point of assembly. '
3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is
specified).
4. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. '
a. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with corroded or damaged threads. If a weld opens during cutting or ,
threading operations,that portion of pipe shall not be used.
D. Flanged Joints: Align, flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial
contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts '
gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.
15411-8 No.99132-CP2 '
' 3.06 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following
requirements apply:
' 1. Shut-off duty: Use gate,ball,and butterfly valves.
2. Throttling duty: Use globe valves.
t3.07 INSTALLATION OF VALVES
' A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser,close to main,where branch or riser serves 2 or
more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. For sectional valves 2 inches and
smaller,use gate or ball valves;for sectional valves 2-1/2 inches and larger,use gate or butterfly valves.
' B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item,on each supply to each plumbing
fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for shutoff
valves 2-1/2 inches and larger,use gate or butterfly valves.
C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to drain equipment completely for
service or repair. Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low points of horizontal rims, and elsewhere as
required to drain distribution piping system completely. For drain valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball
' valves;for drain valves 2-1/2 inches and larger,use gate or butterfly valves.
D. Check Valves: Install swing check valves on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated.
' E. Balance Cocks: Install in each hot water recirculating loop, discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as
indicated.
' F. Hose Bibbs: Install on exposed piping where indicated with vacuum breaker.
G. Wall Hydrants: Install where indicated with vacuum breaker.
' 3.08 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Install backflow preventers at each connection to mechanical equipment and systems.and in compliance with the
plumbing code and authority having jurisdiction. Locate in same room as equipment being connected. Install air
gap fitting and pipe relief outlet drain without valves to nearest floor drain.
B. Install pressure-regulating valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance cock bypass.Install pressure gage
on valve outlet.
' C. Install water hammer arrestors on hot and cold water lines serving a gang of toilet room fixtures and on hot and cold
water lines serving a fixture with a quick closing valve, specifically dishwashers and Scullery Sink hose valves.
Size per manufacturer's recommendations.
3.09 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes indicated,but in no case
' smaller than required by plumbing code.
B. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical equipment as
indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection; provide drain valve on drain connection. For
' connections 2-1/2 inches and larger,use flanges instead of unions.
' 15411-9 No.99132-CP2
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL '
A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has been inspected and t
approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. During the progress of the installation,notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction at least 24 hours prior '
to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the plumbing
official.
a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before concealed or closed in after '
system is roughed in and prior to setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe the tests specified
below and to ensure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code.
3. Reinspection: Whenever the plumbing official finds that the piping system will not pass the test or
inspection,make the required correction and arrange for reinspection by the plumbing official.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports signed by the plumbing official.
B. Test water distribution piping as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have ,
been altered,extended or repaired If testing is performed in segments,submit a separate report for each test,
complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new,altered,extended,or replaced water distribution piping until it has
been tested and approved Expose all such work for testing that has been covered or concealed before it has
been tested and approved
3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psig above the operating pressure without ,
exceeding the pressure rating of the piping system materials. Isolate the test source and allow to stand for 4
hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired '
4. Repair all leaks and defects with new materials and re-test system or portion thereof until satisfactory results
are obtained
5. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action.
3.11 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING t
A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:
1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered,extended, '
or repaired prior to use.
2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure proscribed by the authority having jurisdiction or,in case a method ,
is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either AWWA C651, or AWWA C652, or as
described below:
a. Flush the piping system with clean,potable water until dirty water does not appear at the points of outlet. '
b. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of
chlorine. Isolate(valve oft)the system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours. '
15411-10 No.99132-CP2 '
1
1 c. Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a water/chlorine solution
containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
' d. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean,potable water until chlorine does not
remain in the water coming from the system
e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction. Repeat the procedure if the
biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of contamination.
' f. Operate valves during disinfection procedure.
B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities.
1 3.12 COMMISSIONING
A. Fill the system Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is completely
' hill of water.
B. Before operating the system,perform these steps:
1 1. Close drain valve,hydrants,and hose bibbs.
2. Open valves to full open position.
3. Remove and clean strainers.
1 4. Check pumps for proper direction of rotation. Correct improper wiring.
5. Lubricate pump motors and bearings.
1 END OF SECTION 15411
1
1
1
1
15411-11 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15412
SANITARY DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this section:
1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 15140 Supports and Anchors.
4. Section 15190 Mechanical Identification.
5. Section 15250 Mechanical Insulation.
6. Section 15440 Plumbing Fixtures.
1.02 SUIVIlVIARY
A. This Section specifies building sanitary drainage and vent piping systems,including pipe and pipe fittings,drainage
piping specialties and drains.
B. The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 for foundation drainage,trenching,and backfilling.
2. Division 7 for fire resistant sealants for use around pipe penetrations of fire rated walls and floors.
3. Division 15 Section 15010"Basic Mechanical Requirements".
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Building Drain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the discharge from soil,waste,
and other drainage pipes inside the walls of the building and conveys it to the building sewer.
1. Sanitary Building Drain: A building drain which conveys sewage only.
B. Building Sewer. That part of the drainage system which extends from the end of the building drain and conveys its
discharge to a public sewer,private sewer,individual sewage disposal system,or other point of disposal.
1. Sanitary Sewer: A building sewer which conveys sewage only.
C. Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys sewage,rain water or
other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the mains of public sewer systems or a private or
public sewage treatment or disposal plant.
1. Sanitary Drainage System: A drainage system which carries sewage and excludes storm, surface and ground
water.
D. Vent System: A pipe or pipes installed to provide a flow of air to or from a drainage system, or to provide a
circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and back pressure.
r
15412-1 No.99132-CP2
I
r
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 1 and Division Section 15010 'Basic Mechanical Requirements" for administrative and
procedural requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following products:
1. Drainage piping specialties.
2. Floor drains.
3. Sump basins.
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Submit reports specified in Part 3 of this Section.
1.05 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with the requirements of Section 15010 "Basic Mechanical
Requirements". In addition to the requirements specified above,refer to specific sections of the specifications for
additional coordination documentation.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Minnesota Plumbing Code.
2. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials,products,and installation
of soil and waste systems.
3. ASSE Compliance: Comply with applicable ASSE standards pertaining to materials,products,and installation
of soil and waste systems.
4. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable PDI standards pertaining to products and installation of soil and
waste systems.
1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store pipe in a manner to prevent sagging and bending.
B. Do not store PVC or ABS pipe and fittings in direct sunlight for long periods.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the installation of vents,flashing,and other roof penetrations.
B. Coordinate flashing materials installation for roofing,waterproofing,and adjoining substrate work.
C. Coordinate the installation of drains in poured-in-place concrete slabs, to include proper drain elevations, '
installation of flashing,and slope of slab to drains.
D. Coordinate with installation of sanitary sewer systems as necessary to interface building drains with drainage piping
systems.
15412-2 No.99132-CP2
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer Uniformity: Conform with the requirements specified in Basic Mechanical Requirements, under
"Product Options."
B. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide drainage and vent systems from one of the following:
1. Drainage Piping Specialties, including backwater valves, expansion joints, drains, trap primers, and vandal-
proof vent caps:
a. Josam Mfg.Co.
b. Smith(Jay R)Mfg.Co.
c. Tyler Pipe;Subs.of Tyler Corp.
d. Zurn Industries Inc;Hydromechanics Div.
2.02 ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe. Conform to ASTM A888 and/or CIPSI Standard 301,for Service weight,cast-iron soil
pipe and fittings,with couplings and gaskets conforming to CISPI Standard 310.
A. PVC sewer pipe and fittings. Conform to ASTM D2665 for pipe and fittings with solvent welded joints using
solvents conforming to ASTM D2564. Drivers must conform to NSF 4.No.14.
2.03 UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAIN PIPE AND FIZTINGS
A. (SV)Hub and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. Conform to ASTM A74, for pipe. Piping shall be joined
with neoprene gaskets which conform to ASTM C564.
2.04 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Backwater Valves: Valve assembly shall be bronze fitted cast-iron, with bolted cover. Flapper shall provide a
maximum 1/4"clearance between flapper and seat for air circulation. Valve ends shall suit piping material.
B. Trap Primers: Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker,with 1/2" connections matching piping system
Complying with ASSE 1018.
C. Expansion Joints: Cast-iron body with adjustable bronze sleeve,bronze bolts with wing nuts.
D. Cleanout Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass,threads complying with ANSI B2.1,countersunk head.
E. Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame, with cleanout plug, adjustable nickel bronze or brass top and inside
caulk outlet.
F. Wall Cleanouts: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe with cast-bronze or brass cleanout plug; stainless steel cover
including screws.
G. Flashing Flanges: Cast-iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. Provide underdeck clamp
and sleeve length as required.
H. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron calking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks, cast-iron threaded type roof
coupling for steel stacks,and cast-bronze stack flashing sleeve for copper tubing.
15412-3 No.99132-CP2
2.05 FLOOR DRAINS
A. General: Provide floor drains with cast-iron body,flashing flange and collar with inside caulk,bottom outlet for
drains on grade,hubless,bottom outlet for drains above grade.
B. All floor drams on grade shall be supplied with backwater valves unless otherwise noted.
C. General: Provide floor drains of size as indicated on drawings;and,type,including features,as specified herein:
(Typical units listed below are of Josam manufacture).
D. Floor Drain Type FD-1: Coated cast iron combined floor drain and integral deep drum"P"trap with double
drainage flange,weepholes,side outlet spigot connection,adjustable satin nikaloy round"Super-Flo"strainer with
internal backwater valve. Josam Series No-30600-6AJ.
1. These drains are for use on grade in toilet rooms,showers,service sinks,kitchen,locker room and other
finished areas.
2. Where floor drains with funnels are shown,provide Josam Series No.30600-E2-J floor drain with Nikaloy
round funnel strainer with backwater valve. Field welded funnels on strainers are not acceptable.
3. Omit backwater valve in floor drain at dishwasher.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAAMATION
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all drainage and vent piping and specialties may be
installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations,the original design,and the referenced standards.
B. Verify all existing grades,inverts,utilities,obstacles,and topographical conditions prior to installations.
C. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain connections to verify actual
locations of piping connections prior to installation.
D. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and specialties are to be
installed.
E. Review soil testing information provided to verify conditions are suitable for piping installations.
F. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAINS
A. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth,firm,and stable foundation,free from rock,throughout the length of the
Pipe
B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid and backfill with
clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation.
C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom'h of the circumference of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped granular sand
backfill. At each pipe joint dig bell holes to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous
bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
154124 No.99132-CP2
3.03 JOINING PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: Make compression joints and hubless joints in accordance with the recommendations of the
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,Chapter IV.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 15050"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods",for general piping installation instructions.
B. Install supports and anchors in accordance with Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and
Section 15140"Supports and Anchors",and the CISPI Handbook.
C. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 degree wyes,half-wyes,or long sweep
quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees or short quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of
drainage lines where the change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical, except use long-tum tees where
two fixtures are installed back to back and have a common drain. Straight tees,elbows,and crosses may be used on
vent lines. No change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees shall be made. Where different sizes of drainage
pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size, standard increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of
drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited.
D. Install underground building drains to conform with Minnesota Plumbing Code, and in accordance with the Cast
Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual and Handbook. Lay underground building drains beginning at low
point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of
piping facing upstream Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of
lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each
joint as it is completed.
E. Install building drain pitched down at minimum slope of 1/4" per foot(2 percent) for piping 3" and smaller,and
1/8"per foot(1 percent)for piping 4"and larger.
F. Extend building drain to connect to sewer piping,of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building.
Sewer piping is specified in a separate section of Division 2.
G. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal through foundation wall for watertight installation.
H. Install 1" thick extruded polystyrene over underground building drain piping not under building. Width of
insulation shall extend minirrmm of 12"beyond each side of pipe. Install directly over, and center on pipe center
line.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Install backwater valves in sanitary building drain piping as indicated, and as required by plumbing code. For
interior installation,provide cleanout cover flush to floor centered over backwater valve cover and of adequate size
to remove valve cover for service.
B. Install expansion joints on vertical risers as indicated,and as required by plumbing code.
C. Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated,and:
1. As required by the plumbing code;
2. At each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees;
3. At minimum intervals of 50'for piping 4"and smaller and 100'for larger piping;
4. At base of each vertical soil or waste stack.
15412-5 No.99132-CP2
D. Cleanout Types: Install floor and wall cleanout for concealed piping, types as indicated. Provide floor cleanouts ,
with features described below, suitable for use in the following special applications to match floor finishes;refer to
schedule on Architects Drawings for room finish:
1. Carpeted floors: 'Round top with stainless steel carpet marker and vandal proof exposed screw.
2. Other finished areas: Satin polished round top with vandal proof screws.
3. Unfinished areas: Heavy duty,round cast-iron top with standard mill finish.
E. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through
waterproof membranes.
F. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack flashing in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS
A. Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated.
B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of drains flush with
finished floor.
C. Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as listed below to provide proper slope to drain:
DEPRESSION RADIUS OF AREA DRAINED
1/2" 5'-0"
3/4" 10'-0"
1" 15'-0"
20'-0"
25'-0"
D. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer.
E. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain
integrity of waterproof membranes,where penetrated
F. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF TRAP PREKERS
A. Install trap primers with piping pitched towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8" per foot (1 percent). Adjust trap
primer for proper flow.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF SUMP BASINS
A. Install basin with anchoring flange and mud ring set in concrete floor slab. Excavate to provide minimum 12" of
pea gravel backfill on all sides and at bottom.
3.09 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with
approved trap,of sizes indicated;but in no case smaller than required by Minnesota Plumbing Code.
15412-6 No.99132-CP2
B. Locate piping muouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has been inspected and
approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. During the progress of the installation,notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction,at least 24 hours prior
to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Minnesota
plumbing official.
a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before concealed or closed-in after
system is roughed-in,and prior to setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe the tests specified
below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the Minnesota Plumbing Code.
3. Reinspection: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection,make the required corrections,
and arrange for reinspected by the plumbing official.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports,signed by the plumbing official.
B. Piping System Test:
1. Test for leaks and defects all new drainage and vent piping systems and parts of existing systems,which have
been altered,extended or repaired. If testing is performed in segments,submit a separate report for each test,
complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new,altered,extended,or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has
been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing,that has been covered or concealed before it has
been tested and approved.
3. Drainage and Venting System Testing Procedures:
a. Rough Plumbing: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed drain tile,test the piping of
plumbing drainage and venting systems upon completion of the rough piping installation. Tightly close
all openings in the piping system, and fill with water to the point of overflow,but not less than 10 feet
head of water. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before the inspection starts
through completion of the inspection. Inspect all joints for leaks.
b. Finished Plumbing: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, their
connection shall be tested and proved gas and water-tight. Plug the stack openings on the roof and
building drain where it leaves the building, and introduce air into the system equal to a pressure of V
' water column., Use a "U" tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this
pressure. Air pressure shall remain constant without the introduction of additional air throughout the
period of inspection. Inspect all plumbing fixture connection for gas and water leaks.
4. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and re-test system or portion thereof until satisfactory results
are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action.
15412-7 No.99132-CP2
3.11 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Clean drain strainers,domes,and traps. Remove dirt and debris.
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent
damage from traffic and construction work-
B.
orkB. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.
END OF SECTION 15412
1
15412-8 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15413
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this section:
1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 15140 Supports and Anchors.
4. Section 15190 Mechanical Identification.
5. Section 15250 Mechanical Insulation.
6. Section 15412 Sanitary Drainage and Vent Systems.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies building storm drainage piping systems,including drainage specialties and roof drains.
B. Related Sections:
1- Separate sections in Division 2 specify foundation drainage, sanitary sewerage systems, and trenching and
backfilling.
2. Separate sections in Division 7 specify flashing and sheet metal and joint sealers.
3. Section 15010"Basic Mechanical Requirements"applies to the work of this section.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Building Drain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the discharge from soil,waste,
and other drainage pipes inside the walls of the building and conveys it to the building sewer.
1. Building Storm Drain: A building drain which conveys storm water or other drainage,but not sewage.
B. Building Sewer: That part of the drainage system which extends from the end of the building drain and conveys its
discharge to a public sewer,private sewer,individual sewage disposal system,or other point of disposal.
1. Building Storm Sewer: A building sewer which conveys storm water or other drainage,but not sewage.
C. Conductor: A pipe inside the building which conveys storm water from the roof to a storm or combined building
drain.
D. Drainage System Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys sewage,rain water or
other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the mains of public sewer systems or a private or
public sewage treatment or disposal plant.
1. Storm Drainage System A drainage system which carries rain water,surface water,condensate,cooling water
or similar liquid wastes.
E. Leader: An exterior drainage pipe for conveying storm water from roof or gutter drains.
15413-1 No.99132-CP2
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 1 and Division 15, Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements for administrative and
procedural requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following products:
1. Drainage piping specialties
2. Roof drains
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Submit reports specified in Part 3 of this Section.
1.05 COORDINATION OF DRAWINGS
A. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with the requirements of Section 15010 "Basic Mechanical
Requirements". In addition to the requirements specified above,refer to specific sections of the specifications for .
additional coordination documentation.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Minnesota Plumbing Code.
1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store pipe in a manner to prevent sagging and bending.
B. Do not store PVC or ABS pipe and fittings indirect sunlight for long.periods.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the installation of roof drains,flashing,and roof penetrations.
B. Coordinate flashing materials installation for roofing,waterproofing,and adjoining substrate work.
C. Coordinate with installation of storm sewer systems as necessary to interface building drains with drainage piping
systems.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer Uniformity: Conform with the requirements specified in Division 15, Section 15010 Basic
Mechanical Requirements,under"Product Options."
B. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide drainage systems from one of the following:
15413-2 No.99132-CP2
L Drainage Piping Specialties,including backwater valves,expansion joints,and drains:
a. Josam Mfg.Co.
b: Smith(Jay R)Mfg.Co.
c. Tyler Pipe;Subs.of Tyler Corp.
d. Zum Industries Inc;Hydromechanics Div.
2.02 ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe. Conform to ASTM A888 and/or CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, cast-iron soil
pipe and fittings,with clamps and gaskets conforming to CISPI Standard 310.
B. For buildings over one floor and not more than 50 feet in height: Hubless couplings shall be heavy duty type,304
stainless steel band with four stainless steel clamps and shall be capable of holding 20 psi pressure, with
unrestrained pipe. If pressure requirement cannot be met,pipe shall be restrained as per CISPI Standards.
2.03 UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. (SV)Hub and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. Conform to ASTM ASTMA 74 for pipe. Piping shall be
joined with neoprene gaskets which conform to ASTM C564.
A. PVC sewer pipe and fittings. Conform to ASTM D2665 for pipe and fittings with solvent welded joints using
solvents conforming to ASTM D2564. Drivers must conform to NSF 4.No.14.
2.04 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Backwater Valves: Valve assembly shall be bronze fitted cast-iron, with bolted cover. Flapper shall provide a
maximum 1/4"clearance between flapper and seat for air circulation. Valve ends shall suit piping material.
B. Expansion Joints: Cast-iron body with adjustable bronze sleeve,bronze bolts with wing nuts.
C. Cleanout Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass,threads complying with ANSI B2.1,countersunk head.
D. Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame,with cleanout plug and adjustable nickel bronze or brass top,and inside
caulk outlet.
E. Wall Cleanouts: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe with cast-bronze or brass cleanout plug, stainless steel cover
including screws.
F. Flashing Flanges: Cast-iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. Provide underdeck clamp
and sleeve length as required.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all drainage piping and specialties may be installed in
accordance with pertinent codes and regulations,the original design,and the referenced standards.
B. Verify all existing grades,inverts,utilities,obstacles and topographical conditions prior to installations.
C. Examine rough-in requirements for roof drain connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to
installation.
15413-3 No.99132-CP2
D. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and specialties are to be
installed.
E. Review soil testing information provided to verify conditions are suitable for piping installations.
F. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAINS
A. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth,firm,and stable foundation,free from rock,throughout the length of the
pipe.
B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes shall be laid, and backfill with
clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation.
C. Shape bottom of trench to fit the bottom%:of the circumference of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped granular sand
backfill. At each pipe joint dig bell holes to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous
bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
3.03 JOINING PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: Make compression joints and hubless joints in accordance with the recommendations in the
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,Chapter IV.
B. PVC DW V Pipe: Joining and installation of PVC drainage pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D2665.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 15050"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods",for general piping installation instructions.
B. Install supports and anchors in accordance with Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and
Section 15140"Supports and Anchors".
C. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45-degree wyes,half-wyes,or long sweep
quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees or short quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of
drainage lines where the change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. No change in direction of flow
greater than 90 degrees shall be made. Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use
proper size,standard increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is
prohibited
D. Install underground building drains to conform with plumbing code,and in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe
Institute Engineering Manual. Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades
and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream Install
required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other
special installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed
E. Install building drain pitched down at minimum slope of 1/4" per foot(2 percent) for piping 3" and smaller, and
1/8"per foot(1 percent)for piping 4"and larger,or as indicated on plans.
F. Extend building drain to connect to sewer piping, of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building.
Sewer piping is specified in a separate section of Division 2.
G. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at penetrations through foundation wall for watertight installation.
15413-4 No.99132-CP2
H. Install 1" thick extruded polystyrene over underground building drain piping not under building. Width of
insulation shall extend minimum of 12"beyond each side of pipe. Install directly over,and centered on pipe center
line.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, at connections to roof drains within 3 feet of riser, as indicated, and as
required by plumbing code.
B. Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as indicated,and:
1. as required by the plumbing code;
2. at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees;
3* at minimum intervals of 50'for piping 4"and smaller and 100'for larger piping;
4. at base of each vertical stack.
C. Cleanout Types: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, types as indicated. Provide floor
cleanouts with features described below, suitable for use in the following special applications to match floor
finishes;refer to schedule on Architects Drawings for room finish:
1. Carpeted floors: Round top with stainless steel carpet marker and vandal proof exposed screw.
2. Other fmished areas: Satin polished round top with vandal proof screws.
3. Unfinished areas: Heavy duty,round cast-iron top with standard mill finish
3.06 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Runouts: Provide drainage piping runouts to roof drains of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than
required by the Minnesota Plumbing Code.
B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of roof structure.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections:
1. Do not enclose, cover,or put into operation drainage piping system until it has been inspected and approved
by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. During the progress of the installation,notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction, at least 24 hours prior
to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the plumbing
official.
a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before concealed or closed-in after
system is roughed-in,and prior to setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe the tests specified
below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the Minnesota Plumbing Code.
3. Reinspection: Whenever the piping system or portion thereof, fails to pass the test or inspection, make the
required correction,and arrange for reinspection by the plumbing official.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports,signed by the plumbing official.
15413-5 No.99132-CP2
B. Piping System Test:
1. Test for leaks and defects all new drainage piping systems and parts of existing systems, which have been
altered, extended or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test,
complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage piping until it has been
tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing,that has been covered or concealed before it has been
tested and approved.
3. Drainage System Testing Procedures: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed drain tile,test
the piping of drainage systems upon completion of the rough piping installation. Tightly close all openings in
the piping system,and fill with water to the point of overflow,but not less than 10 feet head of water. Water
level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before the inspection starts,through the completion of
the inspection. Inspect all joints for leaks.
4. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and re-test system or portion thereof until satisfactory results
are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action.
3.08 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Clean drain strainers and domes. Remove dirt and debris.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and toPr event '
damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.
END OF SECTION 15413
15413-6 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this Section:
1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Section 15030 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment.
3. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
1.02 SUNEVIARY
A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, and accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment,
and supports associated with plumbing fixtures.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1.5 Section 15100"Valves"for valves used as supply stops.
2. Division 15 Section 15459"Interceptors"for sediment,and grease interceptors and grease recovery units.
C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include:
1. Owner-supplied fixtures,as indicated.
2. Accessories, appliances, appurtenances, and equipment specified in other sections, requiring plumbing
services or fixture-related devices,as indicated.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: Describes a plumbing fixture,building,facility,or portion thereof that can be approached,entered,and
used by physically handicapped people.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 15010'Basic Mechanical Requirements".
B. Product data for each type of plumbing fixture specified,including fixture and trim,fittings,accessories,appliances,
appurtenances,equipment,supports,construction details,dimensions of components,and finishes.
C. Wiring diagrams for field-installed wiring of electrically operated units.
D. Color Charts
E. Maintenance Data
15440-1 No.99132-CP2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of the following:
1- Minnesota Plumbing Code
2. ANSI(see reference already printed)
3. ATBCB(see reference)
B. ATBCB (Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board) "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
(UFAS)- 1985-494-187"with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and labeled
1. The terms"listed"and"labeled"shall be as defined in the National Electrical Code,Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as
defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing,crating,and covering.
B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in a dry location.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES,GENERAL
A. Provide plumbing fixtures and trim,fittings,other components,and supports as specified in"Plumbing Fixture Data
Sheets"at the end of Part 3 of this Section.
2.02 FAUCETS AND DRINIONG FOUNTAIN BUBBLERS
A. Unless otherwise indicated,provide fittings that are cast brass with polished,heavy chrome-plate finish conforming
to ASMEA-112.18.1M.
B. The product shall meet NSF Standard 61 Section 9 subsection 1 -6. The product shall be manufactured from brass
construction. Brass components which contact water within the faucet shall be from brass which contains no more
than 3%lead by dry weight.
2.03 FITTINGS,EXCEPT FAUCETS
A. Fittings General: Unless otherwise specified,provide fitting fabricated of brass,with polished heavy chrome plate
finish.
B. Escutcheons: Wall flange with set screw or sheet steel wall flange with friction clips, of depth adequate to conceal
protruding roughing-in fittings.
2.04 FLUSHOMETERS
A. Provide flushometers compatible with fixtures,with features and of consumption indicated
B. Construction: Cast-brass body, brass or copper pipe or tubing inlet with wall flange and tailpiece with spud,
screwdriver check stop, vacmun breaker, and brass lever handle actuation except where other variations are
specified. Type shall be diaphragm operation except where other type is specified.
15440-2 No.99132-CP2
C. Finish: Exposed metal parts shall be polished chrome plated, except components installed in a concealed location
may be rough brass or unfinished.
D. Water Closet Flushometers: Furnish with the following features.
1. Non-hold-open feature.
2. Screw driver angle stop with seat bumper and cap.
3. Metal oscillating handle actuation.
4. Wall and spud flanges.
5. Adjustable tailpiece.
6. Vacuum breaker connection.
7. Fumish flushometers with factory-set,field-adjustable water consumption per cycle:
a. Consumption: 1.6 gallons per flushing cycle.
E. Urinal Flushometers: Furnish with the following features.
1. Non-hold-open feature.
2. Screw driver angle stop with cap.
3. Metal oscillating handle actuation.
4. Wall and spud flanges.
5. Adjustable tailpiece.
6. Vacuum breaker connection.
7. Furnish flushometers with factory-set,field-adjustable water consumption per cycle:
a. Consumption: 1.0 gallons per flushing cycle.
2.05 TOILET SEATS
A. General: Provide toilet seats compatible with water closets,and of type,color,and features indicated.
B. Toilet Seats: Heavy-duty, commercial/industrial type, elongated, open front, solid plastic, with self-sustaining
check hinge,less cover.
2.06 PLUMBING FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Supports: ASME A112.6.1M, categories and types as required for wall-hanging fixtures specified, and wall
reinforcement.
B. Support categories are:
1. Carriers: Supports for wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall construction. Water closet
carriers shall have an additional faceplate and coupling when used for wide pipe spaces. Provide tiling frame
or setting gage with carriers for wall-hanging water closets. Long barrel in vertical applications.
2. Chair Carriers: Supports with steel pipe uprights for wall-hanging fixtures. Urinal chair carriers shall have
bottom bearing plates.
3. Chair Carriers,Heavy Duty: Supports with rectangular steel uprights for wall-hanging fixtures.
4. Reinforcement: 2-inch by 4-inch wood blocking between studs or 1/4-inch by 6-inch steel plates attached to
studs,in wall construction,to secure floor-mounted and special fixtures to wall.
C. Support Types: Provide support of category specified,of type having features required to match fixture.
D. Provide supports specified as part of fixture description,in lieu of category and type requirements above.
15440-3 No.99132-CP2
E. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide plumbing fixture supports from one of the following:
1. Josam Mfg.Co.
2. Smith(Jay R.)Mfg.Co.
3. Wade;Subs of Tyler Pipe Corp.
4. Zum Industries;Hydromechanics Division
2.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below matching products installed, packaged
with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents. Minimum of one unit
each.
1. Faucet Washers and O-rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of amount of each
installed.
2. Faucet Cartridges and O-rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of amount of each
installed.
3. Flushometer Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of amount of each
flushometer installed.
4. Provide a hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes,having a separate compartment for each
type and size of above extra materials.
5. Toilet Seats: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of amount of each type toilet seat
installed,minimum of one seat.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAAHNATION
A. Examine roughing-in for potable cold water and hot water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping systems to
verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures.
B. Examine walls,floors,and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Install plumbing fixtures and specified components, in accordance with designations and locations indicated on 1
Drawings.
B. Install supports for plumbing fixtures in accordance with categories indicated,and of type required:
1. Carriers for following fixtures:
a. Wall-hanging water closets.
b. Wall-hanging fixtures supported from wall construction.
2. Chair carriers for the following fixtures:
a. Wall-hanging urinals.
b. Wall-hanging lavatories and sinks.
c. Wall-hanging drinking fountains and electric water coolers.
154404 No.99132-CP2
3. Heavy-duty chair carriers for the following fixtures:
a. Accessible lavatories.
b. Fixtures where specified.
4. Reinforcement for the following fixtures:
a. Floor-mounted lavatories required to be secured to wall.
b. Floor-mounted sinks required to be secured to wall.
c. Recessed,box-mounted drinking fountains and water coolers.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb,in accordance with fixture manufacturers'written installation instructions,
roughing-in drawings,and referenced standards.
B. Install floor-mounted,floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.
C. Install floor-mounted,back outlet water closets with fittings and gasket seals.
D. Install wall-hanging,back-outlet water closets with support manufacturer's tiling frame or setting gage.
E. Install wall-hanging,back-outlet urinals with gasket seals.
F. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building substrate when supports are
specified,and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.
G. Fasten floor-mounted fixtures and special fixtures having holes for securing fixture to wall construction, to
reinforcement built into walls.
H. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
I. Fasten counter-mounting-type plumbing fixtures to casework.
J. Secure supplies behind wall or within wall pipe space,providing rigid installation.
K. Set shower receptors and mop basins in leveling bed of cement grout.
L. Install stop valve in an accessible location in each water supply to each fixture.
M. Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap.
N. Install escutcheons at each wall,floor,and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and
millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
O. Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew resistant, silicone sealant in
accordance with sealing requirements specified in Division 7. Match sealant color to fixture color.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of Division 15. The Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment specified in
other sections of Division 15.
2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other sections, direct
connected to plumbing piping systems.
15440-5 No.99132-CP2
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized.
Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components,then retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly.
3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,fittings,and controls.
B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and malfimctioning units and
controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, and faucets, shower valves, and flushometers
having controls,to provide proper flow and stream
D. Replace washers or cartridges of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
E. Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and
materials.
F. Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section"Project Closeout."
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities,except when approved in writing by the Owner.
C. Protect interceptors during construction period, to avoid clogging with construction materials and debris, and to
prevent damage from construction debris and traffic.
3.08 FIXTURE SCHEDULE
A. Provide plumbing fixtures as scheduled on the following"Data Sheets." Each Data Sheet begins with a new page.
15440-6 No.99132-CP2
SINK DATA SHEET P-1
SINK: Elks "Lustertone"LR-1918 ore equal b Just
Y � Q Y
Applicable Standard: ANSI-Al 12.19.2M
Material: Type 302 Nickel Bearing Stainless steel
Gage: 18 ga.
Sink Twe: Single Compartment Counter sink
Dimensions: 19"1 x 18"w x 7%a"d
Mounting and Outlet: Counter mounting
Color or Finish: Satin,bright metal
Fittings and Accessories: Provide the following compatible components:
S lies: Type 1,(2)Chicago No. 1017
Faucet: Chicago No.201-GN2AH13-E3VP-369
Drain: LK-35 duo strainer in sink
Trac: Type 1;concealed within cabinet,chrome waste with wall escutcheon
Support: Self-rimming
END OF SECTION 15440
15440-7 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15520
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification sections,apply to this section.
B. The requirements of the following Division-15 Sections apply to this Section:
1. Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
3. Valves.
4. Supports and Anchors.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes low pressure steam and condensate piping and specialties for building HVAC and domestic
water heating systems. Materials and equipment in this Section include:
1. Pipes,fittings,and specialties
2. Special duty valves
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through basement wells and fire/smoke
barriers.
2. Division 15 Section"Meters and Gages"for thermometers,flow meters,and pressure and vacuum gages.
3. Division 15 Section"Mechanical Identification"for labeling and identification of steam and condensate piping
systems-
4. Division 15 Section"Mechanical Insulation"for pipe insulation.
5. Division 15 Section"Condensate Pumps and Receiver Sets."
6. Division 15 Section"Electric Control System"for temperature control valves and sensors.
7. Division 15 Section"Pneumatic Control System"for temperature control valves and sensors.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size(NPS).
B. Low Pressure Steam Systems operate at 15 psig(above atmospheric)and under.
C. High Pressure Steam Systems operate at 15 psig(above atmospheric)and over.
1.04 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
A. The steam and condensate piping systems for this project is a two pipe,mechanical flow,up-feed system.
15520-1 No.99132-CP2
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data, including rated capacities where applicable, furnished options and accessories, and installation
instructions for:
1. Safety Relief Valves.
2. Pressure Reducing valves.
3. Steam traps.
4. Air vents.
5. Strainers.
B. Shop drawings, detailing dimensions, methods of assembly of components, and location and size of each field
connection for flash tanks.
C. Maintenance data,including data for steam and condensate specialties and special duty valves. Refer to Division 1
and Division 15 Section"Basic Mechanical Requirements"for detailed requirements.
D. Welders' certificates certifying that welders comply meet the quality requirements specified in Quality Assurance
below.
E. Certificates of compliance with specified ASTM,ASME, and ANSI manufacturing requirements for pipe, fittings,
and specialties.
F. Test reports specified in Past 3 of this Section.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: comply with the provisions of the following:
1. ASME B 31.9'Building Services Piping: for materials,products,and installation. Safety valves and pressure
vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
2. ASME"Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code",Section IX,"Welding and Brazing Qualification"for qualifications
for welding processes and operators.
3. State Uniform Mechanical Code.
4. State Code for Power Piping Systems.
i
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steam and condensate piping system products from one of the
following:
15520-2 No.99132-CP2
f
1. Safety Pressure Relief Valves:
a. Armstrong Machine Works,A-Y Division
b. Kunkle Valve Co.,Inc.
c. Lunkenheimer Co.
d. Spirax Sarco.
e. Watts Regulator Co.
2. Pressure Reducing Valves:
a. Armstrong Machine Works,A-Y Division
b. Fisher Controls International,Inc.
c. Hoffman Specialty ITT;Fluid Handling Div.
d. Leslie Co.
e. Spirax Sarco.
f. Spence Engineering Co.,Inc.
3. Steam Traps:
a. American Air Filter Co.
b. Armstrong Machine Works.
c. Dunham-Bush,Inc.
d. Illinois Heating and Cooling Specialties
e. ITT Hoffman
f. Spirax Sarco
g. Trane(The)Co.
4. Air Vents:
a. Armstrong Machine Works.
b. Eaton Corp.;Controls Div.
c. Hoffman Specialty ITT;Fluid Handling Div.
d. Spirax Sarco.
e. Trane(The)Co.
5. Dielectric Waterway Fittings:
a. Victaulic Company of America.
6. Dielectric Unions:
a. Perfection Corp.
b. Watts Regulator Co.
7. Strainers:
ia. Armstrong Machine Works.
b. Hoffman Specialty ITT;Fluid Handling Div.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Sph=Sarco.
e. Trane Co.
f. Victaulic Co.of America(low pressure applications only)
g. Watts Regulator Co.
h. Mueller.
15520-3 No.99132-CP2
2.02 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to Part 3 below, Article "PIPE APPLICATION' for identification of systems where the below
specified pipe and fitting materials are used.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 and 80 for application as specified in Part 3 below, seamless,black steel
pipe,with beveled ends.
2.03 FITTINGS
A. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4,Class 125,standard pattern,for threaded joints. Threads shall conform
to ANSI B 1.20.1.
B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall
conform to ANSI B 1.20.1.
C. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234,seamless or welded,for welded joints.
D. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced. Threads shall
conform to ANSI B 1.20.1.
E. Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24,Class 150;raised ground face,bolt holes spot faced
F. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI B 16.5,including bolts,nuts,and gaskets of the following material group,
end connection and facing:
1. Material Group: 1.1.
2. End Connections: Butt Welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.
G. Unions: ANSI B16.39, malleable iron, Class 150 hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal
bronze seating surfaces;female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ANSI B 1.20.1.
H. Dielectric Unions: Soldered or threaded end connections to suit application; constructed to isolate dissimilar
metals,prevent galvanic action,and prevent corrosion.
2.04 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Welding Materials: Comply, with Section H, Part C. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding
materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded
B. Pipe Flange Gasket Material: ANSI B 16.21 full-faced for cast iron and cast bronze flanges,and raised face for steel '
flanges. Thickness,material,and type suitable for design temperatures and pressures.
2.05 GENERAL DUTY VALVES
A. General duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in Division 15 Section
"Valves". Special duty valves are specified in this Article by their generic name; refer to Part 3 below,Article
"VALVE APPLICATION"for specific uses and applications for each valve specified
2.06 SAFETY VALVES
A. General: Select steam safety valves for full relief of capacity of equipment served, in accordance with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Fumish complete with cast iron drip-pan elbow having threaded inlet and outlet
with threads(FPT)conforming to ANSI B 1.20.1;sized for full size of safety valve outlet connection.
155204 No.99132-CP2 ,
r
B. Bronze Safety Valves: cast bronze body,Class 250,with threaded(MPT) inlet and threaded(FPT)outlet; forged
copper alloy disc,fully enclosed cadmium plated steel spring having an adjustable pressure range and positive shut-
off. Factory-set valves to relieve at 10 psi above operating pressure.
C. Cast-Iron Safety Valves: cast iron body and bronze seat, Class 250; forged copper alloy disc and nozzle; fully
enclosed stainless steel spring having an adjustable pressure range and positive shut-off; threaded end connections
for valves 2 inch and smaller, raised face flanged inlet and threaded outlet connections for valves 2-1/2 inch and
larger. Factory-set valves to relieve at 10 psi above operating pressure.
2.07 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES
A. General: Select pressure reducing valves of size, capacity, and pressure rating as scheduled. Factory-set for inlet
and outlet pressures as indicated.
B. Valves Characteristics: Pilot-actuated, diaphragm type, with adjustable pressure range and positive shut-off; cast
iron body with flanged end connections,hardened stainless steel trim,and replaceable valve head and seat. Provide
main head stem guide fitted with flushing and pressure arresting device. Provide cover over pilot diaphragm for
protection against dirt accumulation.
2.08 STEAM TRAPS
A. Thermostatic Traps: cast brass, angle pattern body, with integral union tailpiece and screw-in cap; maximum
operating pressure of 25 psig; balanced pressure stainless steel or monel diaphragm or bellows element, with
renewable hardened stainless steel valve head and seat.
tB. Float and Thermostatic Traps: ASTM A 278, Class 30 cast iron body and bolted cap; renewable, stainless steel
float mechanism, with renewable, hardened stainless steel head and seat; balanced pressure thermostatic air vent
made of stainless steel or morsel bellows with stainless steel head and seat.
rC. Inverted Bucket Traps: ASTM A 278, Class 30 cast iron body and cap,pressure rated for 250 psi; stainless steel
head and seat;stainless steel valve retainer,lever,guide pin assembly,brass or stainless steel bucket.
1. Integral stainless steel inlet strainer within trap body.
2.09 AIR VENTS
A. Quick Vents: cast iron or brass body, with balanced pressure stainless steel or monel thermostatic bellows, and
stainless steel heads and seats.
B. Float Vents: cast iron or brass body; seamless brass float; balance pressure thermostatic bellows; replaceable
stainless steel seat,float,and head.
2.10 STRAINERS
A. Y-Pattem Strainers: minimum 250 psig steam working pressure;cast iron body conforming to ASTM A 278,Class
30;threaded connections for 2 inch and smaller,flanged connections for 2-1/2 inch and larger;grade 18-8 stainless
steel screen(20 mesh for 2 inch and smaller,and manufacturer recommended perforations for sizes 2-1/2 inch and
larger);tapped blow-off plug.
B. Basket Strainers: minimum 250 psig steam working pressure; cast iron body conforming to ASTM A 278, Class
30;flanged connections;grade 18-8 stainless steel screen;bolted cover.
r
15520-5 No.99132-CP2
F
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A. Install steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inch and smaller, and with welded joints for 2-1/2 inch and '
larger. Steam supply pipe shall be schedule 40. Condensate return pipe shall be schedule 80.
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings, (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location
and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into consideration pipe
sizing and friction loss,expansion,pump sizing,and other design considerations. So far as practical,install piping
as indicated. Refer to individual system specifications for requirements for coordination drawing submittals.
B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
C. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless
indicated to be exposed to view.
D. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted,unless expressly
indicated.
E. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications.
F. Install piping tight to slabs,beams,joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide
space to permit insulation applications,with 1 inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above
removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.
G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other,spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.
H. Install drains at low points in mains,risers,and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting,3/4 inch ball valve,and short
3/4 inch threaded nipple and cap. ,
I. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls,partitions, ceilings,and floors,maintain the
fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.
J. Interior Miscellaneous Penetration: Where pipes pass through interior walls, partitions, ceilings, or floors, the
acoustic and airflow resisting characteristics shall be maintained. Seal pipe penetrations using sleeves and special
sealers and material as prescribed in Division 7.
K. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls,partitions, ceilings, or floors, the fire rated
integrity shall be maintained. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.
L. Install steam supply piping at a uniform grade of 1/4 inch in ten feet downward in the direction of flow.
M. Install condensate return piping at a uniform grade of 1/2 inch in ten feet downward in the direction of flow.
N. Install branch connections to supply mains using 45 degree fittings in main with take-off out the top of the main.
Use of 90 degree"tee"fittings is permissible,where use of 45 degree fittings are not practical. Where the length of ,
a branch takeoff is less than 10 feet,pitch branch line down toward mains, 1/2 inch per 10 feet.
O. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with the level side down.
P. Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller,adjacent to each valve,at final connections each piece of equipment,and
elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
15520-6 No.99132-CP2
Q. Install flanges on valves,apparatus,and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and larger connections.
R. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to PSPs and other vibration producing equipment.
S. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure regulating valve, solenoid valve, traps, and
elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4 inch NPS nipple and ball valve in blow down connection of strainers 2 inch and
Larger. Use same size nipple and valve as blow-off connection of strainer.
T. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. Install expansion loops and joints as
indicated on the Drawings and specified in Division-15 Section"Anchors and Supports."
U. Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points in the system, such as at the ends on mains, bottoms of
risers,and ahead of pressure regulators,control valves,isolation valves,pipe bends,and expansion joints.
1. On straight runs with no natural drainage points,install drip legs at intervals not exceeding 200 feet where pipe
is pitched down in the direction of the steam flow and a maximum of 150 feet where the pipe is pitched up so
that condensate flow is opposite of steam flow.
2. Size drip legs at vertical risers full size and extend beyond the rise. Size drip legs at other locations same
diameter as the main. Provide an 18 inch drip leg for steam mains smaller than 6 inch. In steam mains 6
inches and larger,provide drip legs sized 2 pipe sizes smaller than the main,but not less than 4 inches.
3. Drip legs,dirt pockets,and strainer blowdowns shall be equipped with gate valves to allow removal of dirt and
scale.
t4. Install steam traps close to drip legs.
V. Flash Tanks: Pitch condensate lines towards flash tank. If more than one condensate line discharges into flash tank,
install a swing check valve in each line. Install a thermostatic air vent at the top of the tank. Install an inverted
bucket or float and thermostatic trap at the low pressure condensate outlet, sized for triple the condensate load.
Install a safety relief valve at the tank top. Install a pressure gage, gate valve, and swing check valve on the low
pressure(flash)steam outlet.
3.03 BANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 15 Section "SUPPORTS AND
ANCHORS." Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports:
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
3. Pipe roller complete-MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs,20 feet or longer,supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
15520-7 No.99132-CP2
C. Install hangers with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing: '
Nom Pipe Size Max.Span-Ft Min.Rod Size-Inches
1 7 3/8
1-1/2 9 3/8 ,
2 10 3/8
3 12 1/2
3-1/2 13 1/2
4 14 5/8
5 16 5/8
6 17 3/4
8 19 7/8
10 22 7/8
12 23 7/8
D. Support vertical runs at each floor.
3.04 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Welded Joints: Comply with the requirements in ASME Code B31.9-"Building Services Piping."
B. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and
valves as follows:
1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends,and proximity of internal seat or wall,to determine
how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
2. Align threads at point of assembly.
3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal threading is
specified).
4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place the wrench on the valve end
into which the pipe is being threaded.
5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or otherwise damaged. If a weld opens
during cutting or threading operations,that portion of pipe shall not be used.
C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial
contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts
gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer.
3.05 STEAM TRAP INSTALLATIONS
A. Install steam traps in accessible locations as close as possible to connected equipment. Maximum allowable
distance from equipment is 4 feet.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, install gate valve,strainer,and union upstream from the trap;install union, check
valve,and gate valve downstream from trap.
3.06 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are
not indicated the following requirements apply:
1. Shut-off duty: use gate,ball,and butterfly valves
15520-8 No.99132-CP2
' 2. Throttling duty: use gate,ball,and butterfly valves
3. Install shut-off duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains,and elsewhere as indicated.
4. Install throttling duty valves at supply connection to each piece of equipment,and elsewhere as indicated.
B. Install angle pattern globe valves on the supply side of each wall mounted terminal unit. If unit has an enclosure,
install the valve within the enclosure.
C. Install drain valves at low points in mains,risers,branch lines,and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
D. Install swing check valves as required to control flow direction,and to serve as"vacuum breakers."
3.07 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install pressure reducing valves as required to regulate system pressure. Install in a location readily
accessible for maintenance and inspection.
B. Size reducing valves to supply the maximum steam requirements of the heating system or equipment indicated, at
the indicated inlet and outlet pressures.
C. Provide bypass around each reducing valve,with a globe valve equal in size to the area of the reducing valve seat
ring.
D. Install gate valves and unions around each reducing valve to facilitate removal and repair of reducing valves.
Unions may be omitted for reducing valves with flanged connections.
E. Install pressure gages on the low pressure side of each reducing valve and ahead of the shutoff valve plus one
downstream for the shutoff valve.
1. On two-stage reducing stations,install a drip trap and pressure gage upstream from the second stage reducing
valve.
F. Install strainers upstream for each reducing valve.
1. On two-stage reducing stations omit the strainer upstream from the second stage,unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
G. Install safety valves downstream from each reducing valve set a 5 psig higher that the reduced pressure when the
reduced pressure is under 35 psig;and at 10 psig higher than the reduced pressure,if the reduced pressure is above
35 psig or the first-stage of two-stage reducing.
3.08 SAFETY VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install relief valves in accordance with and where required by ASME B 31.1 - "Power Piping." Pipe discharge to
atmosphere outside the building,without stop valves. Terminate vent pipe with screened vent cap. Install a drip
pan elbow fitting adjacent to the safety valve. Pipe drip pan elbow drain connection to the nearest floor drain
without valves. Comply with ASN E Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for installation requirements.
3.09 TERNMAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Piping size for supply and return shall be same size as the equipment connections.
B. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations as close as possible to the equipment.
' 15520-9 No.99132-CP2
t
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. Where multiple,parallel control valves are installed,
only one bypass is required ,
D. Install vacuum breaker downstream from the control valve and bypass, and as close as possible to the coil inlet
connection. ,
E. Install pressure gages at coil inlet connections.
F. Pipe outlet from coils to drip leg. From drip leg,install an appropriate trap,sized at 3 times the condensate load of
the equipment,at 1/2 psig differential.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Preparation for testing: Prepare steam and condensate piping in accordance with ASME B 31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints including welds umnsulated and exposed for examination during the test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the reactions due to test pressure. If
temporary restraints are not practical,isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping. If a valve is used to isolate
the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against the test pressure without damage to the valve.
Flanged joints at which blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested
5. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than 1/3 higher than the test pressure,to protect against damage by
expansion of liquid or other source of overpressure during the test.
B. Testing: Test steam and condensate piping as follows:
1. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium,except where there is a risk of damage due to freezing.
Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workmen and compatible with the piping system components.
2. Use traps installed at high points in the system to release trapped air while filling the system Use drip legs
installed at low points for complete removal that liquid
3. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are properly isolated
Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low pressure filling lines are disconnected
4. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1.5 times
the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel,pump,valve,or 1
other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to.pressure at the bottom
of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE"
value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9.
5. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine the system for leakage.
Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test
until there are no.leaks.
3.11 CLEANING ,
A. Flush the system with clean water. Remove,clean,and replace strainer screens. ,
END OF SECTION 15520
15520-10 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15530
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections,apply to this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section.
' 1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 15140 Supports and Anchors.
1.02 SUADIARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air conditioning applications. This Section includes:
1. Pipes,tubing,fittings,and specialties.
2. Special duty valves.
' 3. Refrigerants.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 7 for roof curbs,piping supports,and roof penetration boots.
2. Division 7 for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations through basement walls and fire/smoke
barriers.
3. Division 15,Section 15190"Mechanical Identification"for labeling and identification of refrigerant piping.
4. Division 15,Section 15250"Mechanical Insulation"for pipe insulation.
C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include pre-charged tubing, refrigerant specialties, and
' refrigerant accessories furnished as an integral part of or separately with packaged air conditioning equipment.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for the following products:
1. Each type valve specified.
2. Each type refrigerant piping specialty specified.
B. Shop Drawings showing layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings including,but not necessarily limited
to,pipe and tube sizes,valve arrangements and locations,slopes of horizontal runs,wall and floor penetrations,and
equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate to equipment.
C. Brazer's Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that brazers comply with requirements specified under"Quality
Assurance"below.
i
15530-1 No.99132-CP2
D. Maintenance data for refrigerant valves and piping specialties, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual ,
specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section"Basic Mechanical Requirements."
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify brazing processes and brazing operators in accordance with ASME 'Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," ,
Section M"Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes: ,
1. ANSI B31.5: ASME Code for Pressure Piping-Refrigerant Piping. '
2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
3. State Building Codes.
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the installation of roof piping supports,and roof penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division
'. r
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work
include the following:
1. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:
a. Alco Controls Div,Emerson Electric. S
b. Danfoss Electronics,Inc.
c. EATON Corporation,Control Div. ,
d. Henry Valve Company.
e. Parker-Hannifin Corporation,Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Division.
f. Sporlan Valve Company.
2.02 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to Part 3, Article "PIPE APPLICATION" for identification of systems where the below specified
pipe and fitting materials are used.
B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 280,Type ACR, hard-drawn straight lengths, and soft-annealed coils, seamless copper
tubing. Tubing shall be factory cleaned,ready for installation, and have ends capped to protect cleanliness of pipe r
interiors prior to shipping.
C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88,Type L,hard-drawn straight lengths,and soft-annealed coils,seamless copper tubing. ,
2.03 F TTINGS
A. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B 16.22,streamlined pattern.
2.04 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Brazing Filler Materials: AWS A5.8,Classification BAg-1 (Silver).
15530-2 No.99132-CP2
' 2.05 VALVES
A. General: Complete valve assembly shall be UL-listed and designed to conform to ARI 760.
' B. Globe: 450 psig maximum operating pressure,275 deg.F maximum operating temperature;cast bronze body,with
cast bronze or forged brass wing cap and bolted bonnet; replaceable resilient seat disc; plated steel stem. Valve
shall be capable of being repacked under pressure. Valve shall be straight through or angle pattern,with solder-end
' connections.
C. Check Valves - Smaller Than 7/8 Inch: 500 psig maximum operating pressure, 300 deg. F maximum operating
' temperature; cast brass body,with removable piston, Teflon seat, and stainless steel spring; straight through globe
design. Valve shall be straight through pattern,with solder-end connections.
D. Check Valves - 7/8 inch and Larger: 450 psig maximum operating pressure, 300 deg. F maximum operating
' temperature; cast bronze body, with cast bronze or forged brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically
retained Teflon seat disc. Valve shall be straight through or angle pattern,with solder-end connections.
E. Solenoid Valves: 250 deg. F temperature rating,400 psig working pressure; forged brass,with Teflon valve seat,
two-way straight through pattern, and solder end connections. Provide manual operator to open valve. Furnish
complete with NEMA 1 solenoid enclosure with 1/2 inch conduit adapter, and 24 volt, 60 Hz. normally closed
holding coil.
2.06 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. General: Complete refrigerant piping specialty assembly shall be UL-listed and designed to conform to ARI 760.
B. Strainers: 500 psig maximum working pressure; forged brass body with monel 80-mesh screen, and screwed
cleanout plug;Y pattern,with solder end connections.
C. Moisture/liquid Indicators: 500 psig maximum operation pressure, 200 deg. F maximum operating temperature;
forged brass body,with replaceable polished optical viewing window,and solder end connections.
D. Filter-driers:500 psig maxiamm operation pressure;steel shell,flange ring,and spring,ductile iron cover plate with
steel capscrews, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Furnish complete with replaceable filter-
drier core kit,including gaskets,and standard capacity desiccant sieves to provide micronic filtration.
E. Suction Line Filter-Drier: 350 psig maximum operation pressure,225 deg.F maximum operating temperature,steel
shell, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Permanent filter element shall be molded felt core
surrounded by a desiccant for removal of acids and moisture for refrigerant vapor.
F. Suction Line Filters: 500 psig maximum operation pressure; steel shell, flange ring, and spring, ductile iron cover
plate with steel capscrews, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Furnish complete with
replaceable filter core kit,including gaskets,as follows:
G. Flanged Unions: 400 psig maximum working pressure, 330 deg. F maximum operating temperature; two brass
' tailpiece adapters for solder end connections to copper tubing; flanges for 7/8 inch through 1-5/8 inch unions shall
be forged steel, and for 2-1/8 inch through 3-1/8 inch shall be ductile iron; four plated steel bolts, with silicon
bronze nuts and fiber gasket. Flanges and bolts shall have factory-applied rust-resistant coating.
H. Flexible Connectors: 500 psig maximum operating pressure;seamless tin bronze or stainless steel core,high tensile
bronze braid covering,solder connections, and synthetic covering; dehydrated,pressure tested,mininmin.7 inch in
length-
15530-3 No.99132-CP2
2.07 REFRIGERANT '
A. Refrigerant No.22,in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 34.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAINMATION ,
A. Examine rough-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.
3.02 PIPE APPLICATIONS ,
A. Use Type L, or Type ACR(1-3/8 inch and smaller) drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and brazed
joints above ground,within building. '
B. If other than Type ACR tubing is used, clean and protect inside of tubing as specified in Article "CLEANING"
below.
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 - "The Safety Code for Mechanical
Refrigeration."
B. Install piping in as short and direct arrangement as possible to minimize pressure drop. '
C. Install piping for minimum number of joints using as few elbows and other fitting as possible.
D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and servicing of compressor and other equipment. Install valves and
specialties in accessible locations to allow for servicing and inspection.
E. Provide adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hanger, or between pipes for insulation
installation. Use sleeves through floors,walls,or ceilings,sized to permit installation of full thickness insulation.
F. Insulate suction lines. Liquid lines are not required to be insulated, except where they are installed adjacent and
clamped to suction lines,where both liquid and suction lines shall be insulated as a unit.
1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been eliminated.
G. Install branch tie-in lines to parallel compressors equal length,and pipe identically and symmetrically. '
H. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed to mechanical '
injury.
I. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot gas discharge piping with 1/2"per 10 feet downward slope away from the compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with 1/2 inch per 10 feet downward slope to the compressor,with no long traps
or dead ends which may cause oil to separate from the suction gas and return to the compressor in damaging
slugs.
155304 No.99132-CP2
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated,and where required to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
J. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
K. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted,unless expressly
indicated.
L. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications.
' M. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless
indicated to be exposed to view.
N. Install piping tight to slabs,beams,joists, columns,walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide
space to permit insulation applications,with 1 inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above
removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.
O. Locate groups of pipe parallel to each other,spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.
P. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel;pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal.
Q. Interior Miscellaneous Penetration: Where pipes pass through interior walls, partitions, ceilings, or floors, the
' acoustic and airflow resisting characteristics shall be maintained. Seal pipe penetrations using sleeves and special
sealers and material as prescribed in Division 7.
R. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls,partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the
fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.
S. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side down.
T. Install strainers immediately ahead of each expansion valve, solenoid valve, hot gas bypass valve, compressor
suction valve,and as required to protect refrigerant piping system components.
U. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter/driers and thermostatic expansion valves and in liquid
line to receiver.
' 1. Install moisture/liquid indicators in lines larger than 2-1/8 inch OD,using a bypass line.
V. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves,pressure regulating valves,expansion valves,and at connections
to compressors and evaporators.
' W. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection of compressors.
' 3.04 BANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 15 Section "SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS."
Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length.
2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
3. Pipe rollers complete supports for multiple horizontal runs,20 feet or longer supported by a trapeze.
15530-5 No.99132-CP2
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
C. Install hangers with the following minimum rod sizes and maximums acing: '
Nom Pipe Size Max.Span-Ft. Min.Rod Size-Inches '
1 7 3/8
1-1/2 9 3/8
2 10 3/8 '
3 12 1/2
3-1/2 13 1/2
4 14 5/8 ,
5 15 5/8
6 15 3/4
D. Support vertical runs at each floor. '
3.05 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS"Brazing Manual." ,
1. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes when heated. Avoid
breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation. '
2. CAUTION: When solenoid valves are being installed, remove the coil to prevent damage. When sight
glasses are being installed, remove the glass. Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible
internal parts of refrigerant specialties before brazing. Do not apply heat near the bulb of the expansion valve.
B. Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing, with an inert gas(ie.,nitrogen or carbon dioxide)to prevent formation of
scale.
C. Heat joints using oxy-acetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform brazing temperature.
3.06 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Install refrigerant valves where indicated,and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and driers,in liquid and suction lines at evaporators,and elsewhere as
indicated.
C. Install a full sized,3-valve bypass around each drier. ,
D. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in
horizontal lines with coil at the top. ,
E. Thermostatic expansion valves may be mounted in any position,as close as possible to the evaporator.
1. Where refrigerant distributors are used,mount the distributor directly on the expansion valve outlet. '
2. Install the valve in such a location so that the diaphragm case is warmer than the bulb. '
15530-6 No.99132-CP2
3. Secure the bulb to a clean,straight,horizontal section of the suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount
bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required make the connection where it will clearly reflect the pressure
existing in the suction line at the bulb location.
F. Install pressure regulating and relieving valves as required by ASHRAE Standard 15 and State Mechanical Code.
1 3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
' A. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping,fittings,and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow servicing and maintenance.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect, test, and perform corrective action of refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME Code B31.5, Chapter
B. Repair leaking joints using new materials,and retest for leaks.
3.09 CLEANING
A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR tubing, clean the tubing and fitting using following
cleaning procedure:
1. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, tintless cloth through the tubing by means of a
wire or an electrician's tape.
2. Draw a clean,tintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or pipe. Continue this procedure
until cloth is not discolored by dirk
3. Draw a clean,tintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry,through the tube or pipe to remove
remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint.
4. Finally,draw a clean,dry,tintless cloth through the tube or pipe.
3.10 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
' A. Verify actual evaporator applications and operating conditions, and adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain
proper evaporator superheat requirements.
1 B. Clean and inspect refrigerant piping systems in accordance with requirements of Division-15 Section 15050 Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods section.
C. Adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment with new materials and
products.
' 3.11 COMMISSIONING
A. Charge system using the following procedure:
1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test but before evacuation.
' 15530-7 No.99132-CP2
r
F
r
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump; until temperature of 35 deg F is indicated on vacuum
dehydration indicator. '
3. During evacuation,apply heat to pockets,elbows,and low spots in piping.
r
4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum pump and system
5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas,allow pressure to build up to 2 psi.
6. Complete charging of system,using new filter dryer core in charging line. Provide full operating charge.
B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shut-down,
r troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of refrigerant piping valves and refrigerant piping
specialties.
C. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 section"Project Closeout." ,
l
F
D. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect,with at least 7 days advance notice. ,
F
END OF SECTION 15530
i
r
r
F
n
15530-8 No.99132-CP2
' SECTION 15670
CONDENSING UNITS
PART 1: GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Division 15 Section 15050"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"sections apply to work of this section.
' 1.02 SUD'IIVIARY
A. Section includes:
' 1. Air-cooled condensing units.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 15030-Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment
2. Section 15530-Refrigerant Piping
' 3. Section 16142-Electrical Connections for Equipment
1.03 SUBMITTALS
' A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of selected model clearly
indicated,weights(shipping,installed,and operating),dimensions,required clearances,and methods of assembly of
components,furnished specialties and accessories;and installation and start-up instructions.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder-type wiring diagrams for power and control wiring required for final installation
of condensing units and controls. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and
' portions to be field-installed.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each condensing unit, control, and
accessory; including "trouble shooting" maintenance guide; plus servicing, and preventative maintenance
' procedures and schedule. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual; in accordance with
requirements of Division 1.
' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1. Capacity ratings for condensing units shall be in accordance with (ARI) Standard 360 "Standard for
Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment".
2. Refrigeration system of condensing units shall be constructed in accordance with ASHRAE Standard
ASHRAE 15"Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
3. Condensing units shall meet or exceed the minimum COP/Efficiency levels as prescribed in ASHRAE 90.1
"Energy Conservation in New Building Design".
4. Construction and testing of water cooled condensing units shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and
' Pressure Vessel Code,Section VIII.
5. Condensing units shall be listed by UL and have UL label affixed.
' 15670-1 No.99132-CP2
6. Comply with applicable requirements of State Building Codes.
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Handle condensing units and components carefully to prevent damage. Follow manufacturer's written instructions '
for rigging. Replace damaged condensing units or components.
B. Store condensing units and components in clean dry place off the ground. Protect from weather,water,and physical '
damage.
1.06 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY ,
A. Warranty on Motor/Compressor: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair,
within warranty period, motors/compressors with inadequate or defective materials and workmanship, including
leakage,breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for '
handling,installing,protecting,and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is
limited to component replacement only,and does not include labor for removal and reinstallation.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of substantial completion. i
PART 2: PRODUCTS '
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering air-cooled condensing units which ,
may be incorporated in the work include the following:
1. Dunbam Bush.
2. Carrier Air Conditioning;Div of Carrier Corp.
3. McQuay Air Conditioning Group;McQuay Inc.
4. Trane(The)Co;Div American Standard Inc. ,
5. York;Div of York International.
2.02 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS '
A. General: factory-assembled and tested air-cooled condensing units,consisting of casing, compressors, condensers,
coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls. Capacities and electrical characteristics are scheduled on the
Drawings.
B. Unit Casings: designed for outdoor installation and complete with weather protection for components and controls,
and complete with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and '
drives. Additional features include:
1. Steel, galvanized or zinc-coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated and finished with manufacturer's
standard paint coating; '
2. Lifting lugs to facilitate rigging of units;
3. Factory-installed metal grilles for protection of condenser coil during shipping,installation,and operation; '
4. Hinged and gasketed control panel door.
15670-2 No.99132-CP2 '
' C. Compressor: Rotary hermetic-type compressor, 1,750 RPM, designed for air-cooled condensing, complete with
sight glass, and backseating service access valves on suction and discharge ports. Capacity shall be controlled
through on/off operation of multiple compressors. Additional features include:
1. Capacity steps as scheduled,or greater number;
D. Controls: Operating and safety controls shall include high and low pressure cutouts,oil pressure cutout,compressor
winding thermostat cutout, 3-leg compressor overload protection, and condenser fan motors with thermal and
overload cutouts. Control transformer if required shall be 115-volts. Provide magnetic contactors for compressor
and condenser fan motors. Additional features include:
1. Automatic nonrecycling pumpdown,and timing device to prevent excessive compressor cycling.
E. Condensing Section: Condenser coil shall be seamless copper tubing mechanically bonded to heavy-duty,
configurated aluminum fins, with separate and independent refrigeration circuit for each compressor. Units shall
include liquid accumulator and subcooling circuit,and backseating liquid line service access valve. Condenser coils
shall be factory-tested at 450 psig,vacuum dehydrate,and filled with a holding charge of nitrogen.
' F. Condenser fans and drives: propeller-type condenser fans for vertical air discharge;either direct drive or belt drive.
Additional features include:
1. Permanent lubricated ball bearing condenser fan motors;
2. Separate motor for each condenser fan;
3. Constant speed condenser fan motors;
' 4. Each fan assembly shall be dynamically and statically balanced
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
' A. Verify roof structure, mounting supports, and membrane installations are completed to the proper point to allow
installation of roof mounted units. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install condensing units in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions. Install units plumb
and level,firmly anchored in locations indicated,and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
' B. Support:
1. Install roof-mounted units on equipment supports specified in Division 7. Anchor unit to supports with
removable fasteners.
2. Install ground-mounted units on 4"thick reinforced concrete pad,4"larger on each side than condensing unit.
Concrete is specified in Division 3. Coordinate installation of anchoring devices.
3. Air-Cooled Condensing Units: Connect refrigerant piping to unit;maintain required access to unit.
' a. Install furnished field-mounted accessories.
' 15670-3 No.99132-CP2
I - -
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing.
I. Charge systems with refrigerant and oil,and test for leaks. Repair leaks and replace lost refrigerant and oil. '
3.04 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide services of manufacturer's authorized service representative to provide start-up service and to instruct
Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of condensing units.
B. Start-up condensing units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate
compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfimctioning controls and equipment.
C. Train Owner's personnel on start up and shut-down procedures, troubleshooting procedures, servicing, and '
preventative maintenance schedule and procedures. Review with the Owner's personnel, the data contained in the
Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division One.
1. Schedule training with Owner,provide at least 7-day prior notice to Architect/Engmeer.
END OF SECTION 15670 '
i
I
i
156704 No.99132-CP2 '
SECTION 15830
HEATING TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this section:
' 1. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
2. Section 15100 Valves.
3. Section 15520 Steam and Condensate Piping.
' 4. Section 15891 Ductwork.
5. Section 15990 Testing and Balancing.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of terminal unit work is indicated by drawings and schedules,and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of terminal units required for project include the following:
1. Coils.
' C. Refer to Division 16 sections for the following work,not work of this section.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on terminal unit. Include starters, disconnects,
and required electrical devices,except where specified as finished,or factory-installed,by manufacturer.
2. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section.
D. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section,complying with requirements of Division 16 sections:
1. Control wiring between field-installed controls,indicating devices,and terminal unit control panels.
a. Control wiring and interlocks specified as work of Division 15 Section 15970 "Energy Management and
Control System".
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1. I=B—R Compliance: Test and rate baseboard and finned tube radiation in accordance with I=B--
R, provide
published ratings bearing emblem of I=B=R
2. ARI Compliance: Provide coil ratings in accordance with ARI Standard 410"Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling
and Air-Heating Coils".
' 3. ASHRAE Compliance: Test coils in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 33 "Methods of Testing Forced
Circulation Air Cooling and Heating Coils".
' 4. ARI Compliance: Test and rate fan-coil units in accordance with ARI Standard 440 "Room Fan-Coil Air-
Conditioners".
5. UL Compliance: Construct and install fan-coil units in compliance with UL 883 "Safety Standards for Fan
Coil Units and Room Fan Heater Units.
' 15830-1 No.99132-CP2
6. ARI Compliance: Test and rate unit ventilators in accordance with ARI Standard 330"Unit Ventilators". '
7. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components for terminal units which have been listed and labeled by UL.
8. State Building Code Compliance: Construct and install terminal units in, accordance with applicable '
requirements of State Building Codes.
1.04 SUBMITTALS '
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for terminal units showing dimensions, capacities, ratings,
performance characteristics,gages and finishes of materials,and installation instructions. '
B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction details, and field
connection details.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to terminal units. Submit ,
manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions
of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
D. Maintenance Data. Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions, filter replacement, motor
and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance
manuals;in accordance with requirements of Division 1. '
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Handle terminal units and components carefully to prevent damage,breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install '
damaged terminal units or components;replace with new.
B. Store terminal units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction '
debris,and physical damage.
C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading terminal units,and moving them to '
final location.
D. Deliver terminal units to job site tagged with label indicating project name,model number,unit number,and details
of installation(i.e.room number orientation,etc.).
PART 2: PRODUCTS '
2.01 COILS
A. General: Provide coils of size and in location indicated, and of capacities and having performance data as
scheduled. Certify coil capacities,pressure drops,and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410.
B. Heating Coils: '
1. Fins: Construct of continuous aluminum or copper configurated plate-fin type with full fin collars for accurate
spacing and maximum fin-tube contact.
2. Tubes: Construct of copper tubing,expanded into fin collars for permanent fin-tube bond and expanded into '
header for permanent leaktight joint.
3. Headers: Construct of round seamless copper tube. Hydrostatically test to 400 psi before assembly. ,
4. Casings: Construct of 16-ga continuous coated galvanized steel with fins recessed into channels to minimize
air bypass.
15830-2 No.99132-CP2
5. Testing: Proof test coils at 300 psi,leak test at 315 psi under water.
6. Coil Types: Provide the following coil types as indicated,and as scheduled.
a. Steam to 25 psi , 220°F: Provide 1 or 2-raw, 5/8" tubes, same-end connection coil. Provide brazed
tube-to-header joints.
' PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF COILS
A. General: Install coils as indicated,and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Mount coils on steel supports to form banks or stacks as indicated,brace, secure to air intake chamber. Place in
location to permit installation of bypass damper if required, provide steel baffles where required to prevent
' bypassing of air.
C. Pitch coil casings for drainage, not less than 1/8" toward return connections, except where drainage feature is
' included in coil design.
D. Provide for each steam coil unit: Steam supply, condensate return connection, strainer, gate valves, automatic
' temperature regulating valve,steam traps,as indicated.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces, vacuum clean terminal
coils and inside of cabinets.
' B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by
manufacturer.
C. Install new filter units for terminals requiring same.
END OF SECTION 15830
t
15830-3 No.99132-CP2
' SECTION 15850
AIR HANDLING
PART 1: GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section:
1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 15030 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of air handling units:
' 1. Inline centrifugal fans.
2. Power ventilators: roof-and wall-mounted exhausters.
3. Gravity ventilators.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 7 Section for roof curbs and equipment supports.
2. Division 15 Section 15854"Central Station Air-Handling Units"for package units that include fans.
' 3. Division 15 Section 15970"Energy Management and Control System"for direct digital control devices.
' 4. Division 15 Section 15985"Sequence of Operations"for control sequence descriptions.
'
5. Division 15 Section 15990 Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing for air-handling systems testing,adjusting,and
balancing requirements and procedures.
e6. Division 16 Section"Circuit and Motor Disconnects"for disconnect switches.
' 7. Division 16 Section"Motor Controllers"for motor starters.
8. Division 16 Section Motor Control Centers"
for starters and fusible switches.
' 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
' 1. Product data for selected models,including specialties,accessories,and the following:
' 15850-1 No.99132-CP2
a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. '
b. Certified fan sound power ratings.
c. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories.
d. Materials gages and finishes,including color charts.
e. Dampers,including housings,linkages,and operators. ,
2. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights,
required clearances,components,and location and size of field connections. '
3. Wiring diagrams that detail power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed
wiring and field-installed wiring. '
4. Product certificates, signed by manufacturers of air handling units, certifying that their products comply with
specified requirements.
5. Maintenance data for air handling units, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in
Division 1 and Division 15 Section 15010'Basic Mechanical Requirements".
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled.
B. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. '
C. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical '
Code."
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points. '
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written ,
instructions.
C. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,with protective crating ,
and covering.
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad '
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs,equipment supports,and roof penetrations specified in Division 7.
C. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS '
A. Furnish one additional complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan.
15850-2 No.99132-CP2 ,
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
` . A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufact:ueis offering products flint may be incorporated"in the Work
include the following:
1. Inline Centrifugal Fans:
a. Cook(Loren)Co.
b. FloAire,Inc.
c. Gaeenbeck Fan Corp.
d. ILG Industries,Inc.
e. Jena Industries,Inc.
£ Acme.
2. Centrifteal Roof Ventilators:
'I
a ACME Engineering and Manufacturing Corp.
b. Ammerman Company,Inc.
C. Carnes Company,Inc.
d. Central Blower Co.
s e. Cincinnati Fan&Ventilator Co.
£ Cook(Loren)Co.
g. Essick Air Products,Breidert.
f ' h. Cneenheck Fan Corp.
i, ILG Industries,Inc.
j. Jenn Industries,Inc.
k Penn Ventilating Co.
L Wetaire Corp.
G
3. Gravity Roof Ventilators
a. Acme Engineering&Mfg.Corp.
b." Ammerman Co. Subs of the General Resource Corp.
.
C. Carnes Co.,Inc.
d. Chelsea Fans&Blowers,Inc.
e. Loren Cook Co.
f Essick Air Products
g. Gireenheck Fan Corp.
IL Jenn Fan,Div,of Snyder General Corp.
i. Louvers&Dampers,Inc. "
j. Penn Ventilator Co.,Inc.
k k Q:ietaire Corp.
L Raydot,Inc.
m. Vent Products Co.,Inc.
n. ILG.
4. Inline Airfoil Fans
a. Trane
b. Joy
c. ht less-Winsmith,Inc.
15850-3 No.99132-M
I
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings
From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound
Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate,pressure,power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency
by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
2.03 FANS,GENERAL
A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled,factory tested,and factory finished,with indicated
capacities and.characteristics.
B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated
fan speed and motor horsepower.
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first
critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.
C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted,with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1. Service Factor: IA.
D. Belts: Oil-resistant,nonsparking,and nonstatic.
E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed pitch for use with
motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the adjustment range at fan
design conditions.
1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.
F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" (AFBMA L50) of 200,000 hours,
calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.
G. Factory Finish: The following finishes are required:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coating prior to final assembly..
2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
2.04 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. General Description: Inline,belt-driven,centrifugal fans consisting of housing,wheel,outlet guide vanes,fan shaft,
bearings,drive assembly,motor and disconnect switch,mounting brackets,and accessories.
B. Housing: Rigid structural members with formed galvanized steel housing with inlet and outlet flanges,and support
bracket adaptable to floor,side wall,or ceiling mounting.
C. Direct Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory-wired to discoffiect located on outside of
fan housing.
158504 No.99132-CP2
D. Belt-Drive Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan
housing,and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing.
E. Wheel: Aluminum,airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
2. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame.
3. Speed Control: Variable speed switch with on-off control and speed control for 100 to 50 percent of fan air
delivery,as indicated or required.
2.05 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. General Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive as indicated, centrifugal consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,
bearings,motor and disconnect switch,drive assembly,curb base,and accessories.
B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, hinged,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward, with rain and snow
drains.
C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D. Belt-Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing,with the following features:
1. Pulleys: Cast-iron,adjustable-pitch.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated,permanently sealed,self-aligning ball bearings.
3. Fan Shaft: Turned,ground,and polished steel drive keyed to wheel hub.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream
E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:
1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory-
wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
2. Bird Screens: Removable Y2-inch mesh, 16-gage,aluminum or brass wire.
3. Dampers: Counterbalanced,parallel-blade,backdraft dampers mounted in curb base,factory set to close when
fan stops.
4. Dampers: Motor-operated,parallel-blade,volume control dampers mounted in curb base.
a. Blades: Die-formed sheet aluminum
b. Frame: Extruded aluminum,with waterproof,felt blade seals.
C. Linkage: Nonferrous metals,connecting blades to counter weight or operator.
d. Operators: Manufacturer's standard pneumatic motor.
5. Roof Curb: Provide with a factory pre-fabricated roof curb.
15850-5 No.99132-CP2
2.06 GRAVITY INTAKE AND RELIEF HOODS
A. General Description: Pressure relief ventilator consisting of housing and accessories.
B. Housing: Heavy-gauge, removable, low silhouette top and outlet baffle; and square, one piece, hinged base.
Welded aluminum construction.
C. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:
1. Bird Screens: Removable, %:inch mesh, 16 gauge aluminum or bras§wire.
2. Relief Dampers: Counterbalanced,parallel-blade,backdraft dampers mounted in curb base.
3. Roof Curbs: Provide factory prefabricated roof curbs 18"high.
2.07 VANEAXL41 FANS
A. General Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive as indicated, variable pitch or adjustable pitch as indicated,
vaneaxial fans consisting of fan wheel and housing,straightening vane section,factory-mounted motor,an inlet cone
section,and accessories. (Trane Super Q,or equal)
1. Variable pitch fans include internally mounted, pneumatic actuator, externally mounted positive positioner,
and mechanical-blade-pitch indicator for variable volume operation.
B. Housings: Steel housing, 14-gage minim,m,with inlet bell and diffuser sections.
1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion flanges;inlet cone shall be welded to the
fan raceway.
2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream of the fan wheel designated to straighten the airflow.
C. Wheels: Cast-aluminum, axial-flow type, with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on cast-iron wheel plate keyed to
shaft with solid steel key.
1. Variable-Pitch Fans: Provide a factory-mounted actuator and blade pitch operating mechanism.
D. Fan Hub and Blade Bearing Assemblies: Cast aluminum,machines and fitted with threaded bearing wells to receive
blade bearing assemblies.
1. Blades: Replaceable,cast aluminum;factory-mounted and balanced to the hub assembly. .
2. Fan Shaft: Turned,ground,and polished steel.
3. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed,self-aligning,pillow-block-type ball bearings.
4. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated, self-aligning, pillow-block type; tapered roller bearings with double-
locking collars and two-piece,cast-iron housing.
E. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory-wired to disconnect located on outside of
fan housing.
F. Belt-Drive Units: Provide enclosure around belts and sheaves.
1. Motor Mounting: Adjustable base.
15850-6 No.99132-CP2
2. Sheaves: Adjustable.
3. Belts: Oil-resistant,nonsparking,and nonstatic.
G. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Heavy wire mech inlet screens on fans not connected to ductwork
2. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly-style for mounting with flexible connection to the discharge of the fan, or
direct-mounted to the discharge diffuser section.
3. Stall Alarm Probe: A sensing probe capable of detecting fan operation in stall and sending a signal to the
building automation system Control devices and sequence of operation are specified in other Division 15
sections.
4. Flow Measurement Port: Pressure measurement taps installed in the inlet of the fan to detect and signal air
flow readings to temperature control systems. Control devices and sequence of operation specified in other
Division 15 sections.
5. Airtight Acoustical Enclosure
2.08 MOTORS
A. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate the driven loads satisfactorily.
B. Motor Sizes: Minimum sizes and electrical characteristics as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so that the
driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range.
C. Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for continuous duty at full load
(Class A Insulation).
D. Service Factor. 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
E. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1,general purpose,continuous duty,Design B. Provide permanent-split
capacitor classification motors for shaft-mounted fans and capacitor start classification for belted fans.
1. Bases: Adjustable.
2. Bearings: The following features are required:
a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
b. Grease lubricated
c. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor.
3. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:
a. Open drip-proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
b. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.
4. Overload protection: Built-in,automatic reset,thermal overload protection.
5. Noise rating: Quiet.
15850-7 No.99132-CP2
6. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in accordance with
Division 15 Section 15030 "Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment". If efficiency not specified,
motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE
Standard 112,Test Method B.
7. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer,ratings, characteristics, construction, and special
features.
F. Starters,Electrical Devices,and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 16.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,
housekeeping pads,and other conditions affecting performance of fans.
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
3.02 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support units as described
below,using the vibration control devices indicated.
1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using housed spring isolators. Secure units to
anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base.
2. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.
a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7.
3. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural steel support flame using threaded steel rods and vibration
isolation springs.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around fan and ventilator units for service and maintenance.
3.03 EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided,with base 4 inches larger in both directions than
the overall dimensions of the supported unit.
B. Place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing units.
C. Allow concrete to cure before installation of units.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installations and connections are specified in Division 15 Section 15891 Ductwork and 15910 Ductwork
Accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connections.
B. Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply:
1. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 16.
15850-8 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15854
CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this section:
1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
3. Section 15030 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes constant-volume and variable volume, central-station air-handling units with coils for indoor
installations.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 15 Section 15250"Mechanical Insulation"for field-applied equipment insulation.
2. Division 16 Section"Circuit and MotorDisconnects"for field-installed disconnect switches.
' 3. Division 16
Section Motor Controllers' for field-mounted alternating-current starters.
4. Division 16 Section "Motor Control Centers" for motor control centers that are used for centralizing or
grouping controls in building projects.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
` A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
1. Product data for each central-station air-handling unit indicated,including the following:
a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
b. Certified fan sound power ratings.
c. Certified coil performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
d. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories.
e. Materials gages and finishes.
f. Filters with performance characteristics.
g. Dampers,including housings,linkages,and operators.
2. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing dimensions, required clearances, components, and location and
size of each field connection.
3. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and controls and differentiating between manufacturer-installed
wiring and field-installed wiring.
4. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of central-station air-handling units certifying that their products
comply with specified requirements.
15854-1 No.99132-CP2
5. Field quality control test reports specified in Part 3 of this Section.
6. Maintenance,data for central-station air-handling units for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual
specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Central-station air-handling units and components shall be designed, fabricated, and installed
in compliance with NFPA Standard 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems."
B. UL Compliance: Electric coils,along with the complete central-station air-handling unit,shall be listed and labeled
by Underwriters'Laboratories.
C. State Building Code Compliance: Construct and install central station air handling units in accordance with
applicable requirements of State Building Code.
D. ARI Certification: Central-station air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested in accordance
with the applicable portions of ARI 430-Standard for Central-Station Air-Handling Units and shall be listed and
bear the label of the Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute. `
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Deliver central-station air-handling units factory-assembled to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offeringproducts which may be incorporated in the Work
Pr Y rP
include the following:
1. Custom Air Handling Units
a. Haaken.
b. Racan.
c. Temptrol.
d. Trane Air Systems.
2. Modular Air Handling Units
a. Airtherm Manufacturing Co.
b. Carrier Air Conditioning.
c. McQuay Air Conditioning.
d. The Trane Co.
e. Tempmaster
f. York International Corp.
15854-2 No.99132-CP2
2.02 CUSTOM AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. General:
1. General Description: Factory assembled, consisting of fans, motor and drive assembly, coils, dampers,
plenums,filters,drip pans,and mixing dampers.
2. Types: Custom air-handling units included in this project are of the following types:
a. Draw through.
3. Motor and Electrical Components: Refer to Division 15 Section 15030, Electrical Requirements for
Mechanical Equipment.
B. Cabinet:
1. Materials: Formed and reinforced galvanized 16 gauge steel panels,with a* ininmiim number of shipping
splits as required by the jobsite conditions. Joints between sections installed and sealed by the
Contractor. Indoor units shall be provided with standard factory finish Units shall be rated 12 inches
w.g. with double wall perforated panels at the fan section and double wall solid panels at all other
sections, and high pressure flex connections to unit chasing. Floor shall be constructed of 14 gauge
checkerplate epoxy coated steel,and shall have a minimum deflection of 1/16"when subjected to a 200#
load. Casing shall be factory certified in writing by an Officer of the Company to withstand 12" of
pressure with a 1%leakage rate. Tests may be conducted on random on one or two units at the expense
of the Manufacturer to verify the stated leakage rate. Heavy duty structural c-channels(4 to 6 inch)shall
be provided for structural integrity during shipping and rigging,as well as to provide a means to elevator
the unit for proper removal of condensate. Tubular heavy gauge formed sheet metal is not acceptable.
Factory mounted lifting lugs,spreader bars and cables shall be provided to avoid damage to units during
rigging-
2. Insulation: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems"
a. Type: Doublewall glass-fiber insulation,2 inch thick and having a minimum density of 3#.
b. Location and Application: Factory applied with no mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of
panels.
3. Access Doors: Same materials, thickness (2 or 4 inch), and finishes as cabinet and complete with
stainless steel hinges, 10" diameter double pane viewing ports, Ventlok 310 handles, and bulb type
gasketing. Door must be the same thickness as the unit casing.
a. Fans shall have full-size (24"x 72"access doors sized and located to allow periodic maintenance
and inspections. All other doors shall be the size as shown on the Plans.
4. Double Wall,Insulated Bi-Sloped Drain Pans: Formed sections of stainless steel. Fabricate individual
drain pans for each coil in sizes and shapes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil
piping connections and return bends)and humidifiers when units are operating at the maximum cataloged
face velocity across the cooling coil.
a. Drain Connections: One side of the pan. Construct and install pan to provide adequate pitch to
drain.
b. Pan Top Surface Coating: Stainless Steel.
15854-3 No.99132-CP2
c. Units with more than one coil shall have intermediate drain pans and individual coil racking to
permit removal of a single coil out the side of the unit through an access panel. Removal of coils
through an access door is not allowed.
C. Fan Section:
1. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:
a. General: Sound power level ratings shall comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for
Calculating Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data" and shall be the result of tests made in
accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Ratings". Fans shall be licensed to
bear the AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.
b. Unit's fan performance rating for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and
efficiency shall be factory tested and rating established in accordance with AMCA Standard
210/ASHRAE Standard 51-Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
2. Fan Section Construction: Fan section shall be equipped with a steel channel base for integral mounting
of fan, and motor, and shall be mounted on seismically rated 2" isolators to reduce vibration to the
structure.
3. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fans shall be exact type with adjustable pitch blades.
Provide with backdraft dampers when more than one fan is installed in the fan housing. Fan wheels shall
be steel painted with zinc chromate primer and an enamel finish coat. Fan shaft shall be solid steel
turned,ground,and polished. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft.
4. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings selected for 200,000 hours average life,with extended
grease fittings.
5. Fan Drivers: Designed for a 1.4 service factor and factory mounted with final alignment and belt
adjustment made for installation.
a. Belt Drive: Motors and fan wheel pulleys shall be adjustable pitch for use with motors up to 10
HP,and fixed pitch for motors above 10 HP.
b. Motors mounted on the inside of the fan cabinet shall have OSHA approved wire mesh steel belt
guards with holes for tachometer reading.
D. Motors:
1. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate the driven loads satisfactorily.
2. Motor Sizes: Minimum 'size
�s Indicated. If not indicated, large enough so that the drive load will not
require the motor to operate in the service factor range.
3. Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for continuous duty at
full load(Class A Insulation).
4. Service Factor: 1.15 for plyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
5. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1,general purpose,continuous duty,Design B.
a. Bases: Adjustable.
15854-4 No.99132-CP2
b. Bearings: The following features are required:
1. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
2. Grease lubricated.
3. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial
thrust in motor.
c. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:
1. Open drip-proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
2. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.
d. Overload Protection: Built-in,automatic reset,thermal overload protection.
e. Noise Rating: Quiet.
f. Efficiency: Premium-efficiency motors shall have a efficiency as scheduled in Division
15 Section 15030 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment. All motors shall have a
higher efficiency than the NAP Rebate Guidelines for Motors in accordance with IEEE Standard
112,Test Method B.
g. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification or manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction,
and special features.
h. Starters, Electrical Devices, Marines Lights, GUI Receptacles, and Factory Wiring: Refer to
Section 15862 "Variable Speed Drives' for requirements. Provide where indicated on plans and
schedule. Include factory wiring of VFW,starters,marine lights,GUI receptacles,and disconnects
to an external junction box if so indicated on the plans or schedule. Other electrical devices and
connections are specified in Division 16.
E. Coils:
1. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:
a. Coil Performance Tests: Cooling and heating coils, except sprayed surface coil shall be factory
tested for rating in accordance with ARI 410-Standard for Forced-circulation Air-Cooling and Air-
Heating coils.
2. Coil Racks and Sections: Individual stainless steel coil racks for all cooling coils. Heating coils shall
utilize galvanized steel racks. All coil racks must be designed to permit removal of the coils through a
side access panel for maintenance and replacement.
3. Coils,General-Trainable,rigidly supported across the full face of the coil and pitched to allow drainage.
a. Fins: Aluminum or copper,constructed from flat plate with belled collars for tubes. Fins shall be
bonded to tubes by mechanically expanding copper tubes.
b. Tubes: Seamless steel.
C. Coil Casing: Stainless steel.
d. Headers for Water Coils: Copper,steel, or cast iron with connections for drain valve and air vent
and threaded piping connections. Pipes for these connections must extend through the side of the
casing for easy connection by Contractor.
15854-5 No.99132-CP2
F. Dampers:
1. General Leakage rate when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500-Test Method for Louvers,
Dampers and Shutters, shall not exceed 1 percent of air quantity calculated at 2,000 fpm face velocity
through damper and 4.0 inches wag.pressure differential.
a. Damper operators are specified,in Division 15 Section 15970 `Energy Management and Control
Systems'.
b. Dampers for outside, and exhaust air shall be low leakage, insulated Tamco Series 9000, no
substitute.
c. Dampers for return air,or bypass shall be Tamco Series 1000,no substitute.
G. Filter Section:
1. General: Filters shall comply with NFPA Standard 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating System
2. Extended Surface Filters: Provide filter section and media as indicated.
a. Pre-Filters: Provide disposable type air filters 2 inches thick, consisting of viscous coated fibers
with filtering media encased in fiberboard cell sides having perforated metal grids on each face to
provide media support Airflow resistance with clean media shall not exceed 0.10 inch wag.at face
velocity of 300 fpm, and filter arsenate efficiency of 70 to 82 percent based on ASHRAE Test
Standard 52-Method of Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing
Particulate Matter.
b. Extended Surface Self-Supporting Filters: Provide factory-fabricated, dry, extended surface, self-
supporting filters with holding frames;where indicated,in sizes indicated. Equip with UL Class I
fibrous media material constructed so that individual pleats are maintained in tapered form by
flexible internal supports under rated air flow conditions. Construct holding frames of 18 gauge
galvanized steel and provide suitable fasteners and gasketmg to hold filter units and prevent
unfiltered air particles between media frames and holding devices. Design holding frames which
are suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. Provide filters with rate face velocity of
500 fpm, initial resistance of 0.25"wag.with 60-65%dustpot efficiency, 0.40"wag. with 80-85% )�
efficiency,and 0.70"w.g.with 90-95%efficient,with final rated resistance of 1.0'wag.
H. Vibration Control:
1. Seismic Spring Isolators with Snubbers: Except as otherwise indicated, provide 2" vibration spring
isolators between telescoping steel housing with top and bottom loading plates, and with pad-type
isolator bonded to bottom of loading plate.
a. Equip top loading plate with equipment anchors as indicated or as required for support and
attachment.
b. Include pad-type isolator bonded on top of top loading plate,except on units with leveling bolts.
c. Include holes in bottom plate for bolting unit to substrate.
15854-6 No.99132-CP2
2.03 MODULAR AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. General:
1. General Description: Factory assembled, consisting of fans, motor and drive assembly, coils, damper,
plenums,filters,drip pans,and mixing dampers.
2. Types:Central-station air-handling units included in this project are of the following types:
a. Draw-through.
3. Motor and Electrical Components: Refer to Division 15 Section 15030 Electrical Requirements for
Mechanical Equipment.
B. Cabinet:
1. Materials: Formed and reinforced double wall galvanized steel panels(the inner wall shall be perforated at the
fan section and solid at all other sections), fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and
components,with joints between sections sealed.
a. Medium and high-pressure units shall be constructed with additional bracing and supports. Units rated
at 5.5 inches w.g. and higher shall connected to accessories sections with double-thickness neoprene-
coated flexible connection.
2. Insulation. Comply with NFPA Standard 90A "Standard for the Installation of A# Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems,"for insulation.
a. Type: Coated,glass-fiber insulation, 1 inch thick and having a minimum density of 1-1/2 pcf.
b. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface
of section panels downstream from and including the cooling coil section.
3. Access Panels and Doors: Same materials and finishes as cabinet and complete with hinges,latches,handles,
and gaskets.
a. Fan section shall have inspection and access panels and doors sized and located to allow periodic
maintenance and inspections.
4. Single-Wall Drain Pans: IAQ type double sloped drain pan formed of galvanized sheet steel. Fabricate pans
in sizes and shapes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections and return
bends) and humidifiers when units are operating at the maximum cataloged face velocity across the cooling
coil. F
a. Drain connections: The pan shall drain to the side of the unit nearest to the floor drain. Verify the
location on the plans. Construct and install pan to provide adequate pitch to drain.
b. Pan top surface coating: Elastomeric compound.
c. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan or a drain trough to collect condensate from
top coil.
C. Fans Section:
1. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:
158547 No.99132-CP2
a. General: Sound power level ratings shall comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data"and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with
AMCA Standard 300"Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified
Sound Ratings Seal.
b. Unit's fans performance ratings for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and
efficiency shall be factory tested and ratings established in accordance with AMCA Standard
210/ASHRAE Standard 51 -Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
2. Fan Section Construction: Fan section shall be equipped with a formed steel channel base for integral
mounting of fan,motor,and casing panels. The fan scroll,wheel,shaft,bearings,and motor shall be mounted
on a structural steel frame with frame mounted on base with vibration isolators.
3. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the maximum
rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fan wheel shall be double-width, double-inlet type with forward-
curved blades or backward-curved airfoil section blades as indicated. Forward-curved blade wheels shall be
galvanized steel or bonderized steel painted with baked-enamel finish Airfoil wheels shall be steel painted
with zinc chromate primer and an enamel finish coat. Fan shaft shall be solid steel, turned, ground, and
polished. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft
4. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings selected for 200,000 hours'average life, with grease fittings
extended to an accessible location outside the fan section.
5. Fan Drives: Designed for a 1.4 service factor and factory mounted with final alignment and belt adjustment
made after installation.
a. Belt Drive. Motors and fan wheel pulleys shall be adjustable pitch for use with motors up to and
including 15 HP and fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 15 HP.
b. Motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet shall have steel belt guards per OSHA Standards.
D. Motors:
1. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate the driven loads satisfactorily.
2. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so that the driven load will not
require the motor to operate in the service factor range.
3. Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for continuous duty at full load
(Class A Insulation).
4. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
5. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1,general purpose,continuous duty,Design B.
a. Bases: Adjustable.
b. Bearings: The following features are required:
1) Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.
2) Grease lubricated.
3) Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or axial thrust in
motor.
158548 No.99132-CP2
C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:
1) Open drip-proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
2) Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.
d. Overload protection: Built-in,automatic reset,thermal overload protection.
e. Noise rating: Quiet.
f. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in Division 15 Section
15030 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment. If efficiency not specified,motors shall have
a higher efficiency than"average standard industry motors"in accordance with IEEE Standard 112,Test
Method B.
g. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, and
special features.
6. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Refer to Section 15862 "Variable Speed Drives" for requirements,
provide where indicated. Other electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 16.
E. Coils:
1. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:
a. Coil Performance Tests: Cooling and heating coils,except sprayed surface coils, shall be factory tested
for rating in accordance with ARI 410- Standard for Forced-Circulation Air- Cooling and Air-Heating
Coils.
2. Coil Sections: Common or individual insulated, galvanized steel casings for heating and cooling coils. Coil
section shall be designed and constructed to facilitate removal of coil for maintenance and replacement and to
assure full air flow through coils.
3. Coils,General: Drainable,rigidly supported across the full face of the coil,and pitched to allow drainage.
a. Fins: Aluminum or copper, constructed from flat plate with belled collars for tubes. Fins shall be
bonded to tubes by mechanically expanding copper tubes.
b. Tubes: Seamless copper.
c. Coil Casing: Galvanized steel.
d. Headers for Water Coils: Steel or cast iron,with connections for drain valve and air vent and threaded
piping connections.
e. Water Coil Turbulators: Bronze,spring-type.
4. Direct-Expansion Refrigerant Coils: Designed and fabricated in compliance with ASHRAE Standard 15,
"Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." Coils shall have the following features:
a. Suction Headers and Distributor Tubes: Seamless copper.
b. Venturi-type refrigerant distributor, designed for low pressure drop, arranged for down feed with solder
connections,and having a maximum of 12 circuits for each distributor.
15854-9 No.99132-CP2
1) Coils with more than 12 circuits shall have two distributors.
2) Split circuit coils shall have two distributors.
F. Dampers:
1. General: Leakage rate when tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 - Test Method for Louvers,
Dampers and Shutters,shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity calculated at 2,000 fpm face velocity through
damper and 4.0 inches w.g.pressure differential.
a. Damper operators are specified in Division 15 Section 15970 "Energy Management and Control
Systems".
2. Provide inlet guide vane dampers as indicated or required.
G. Filters Section:
1. General: Filters shall comply with NFPA Standard 90A"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems."
2. Access Doors: Same material as cabinets complete with hinges,latches,handles and gaskets.
3. Extended Surface Filters: Provide filter section and media as indicated.
a. Pre-Filters: Provide disposable type air filters 2 inches thick, consisting of viscous coated fibers with
filtering media encased in fiberboard cell sides having perforated metal grids on each face to provide
media support Airflow resistance with clean media shall not exceed 0.10 inch w.g. at face velocity of
300 fpm, and filter arrestance efficiency of 70 to 82 percent based on ASHRAE Test Standard 52 -
Method of Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter.
b. Extended Surface Self-Supporting Filters: Provide factory-fabricated, dry, extended surface self-
supporting filters with holding frames; where indicated, in sizes indicated. Equip with UL Class 1
fibrous media material constructed so that individual pleats are maintained in tapered form by flexible
internal supports under rated air flow conditions. Construct holding frames of 18-ga galvanized steel and
provide suitable fasteners and gasketing to hold filter units and to prevent unfiltered air passing between
media frames and holding devices. Design holding frames which are suitable for bolting together into
built-up filter banks. Provide filters with rated face velocity of 500 fpm, initial resistance of 0.25"w.g.
with 60-65% dustspot efficiency, 0.40" w.g. with 80-85% efficiency, and 0.70" w.g. with 90-95%
efficiency,and final rated resistance of 1.0"w.g.
H. Vibration Control:
1. Spring Isolators, Housed: Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration isolation spring between
telescoping steel housings with top and bottom loading plates, and with pad-type isolator bonded to bottom of
loading plate. Include resilient inserts to separate and guide telescoping housings.
a. Equip top loading plate with equipment anchorages as indicated or as required for support and
attachment
b. Include pad-type isolator bonded to top of top loading plate,except on units with leveling bolts.
c. Include holes in bottom plate for bolting unit to substrate.
2.05 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one additional complete set of belts for each central-station air-handling unit
15854-10 No.99132-CP2
B. Furnish one additional gasket for each sectional joint of each central-station air-handling unit.
C. Provide one complete extra set of filters for each air handling system Install new filters at completion of air
handling system work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing work. Obtain receipt from Owner that new
filters have been installed
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAIVIINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,
housekeeping pads,and other conditions affecting performance of central-station air-handling units.
B. Examine rough-in for hydropic, condensate drainage piping and electrical to verify actual locations of connections
prior to installation.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
3.02 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Install central-station air-handling units level and plumb,in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using housed spring isolators. Secure units to
anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base.
2. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods and vibration
�P � PP g
isolation springs.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and maintenance.
3.03 EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Construct concrete equipment pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided Construct base 4 inches larger in both
directions than the overall dimensions of the supported unit
2. Place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing units.
3. Allow concrete to cure before installation of units.
4. Clean exposed steel form and apply 2 coats of rust-preventative metal primer.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 15510 "Hydropic Piping". The Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping,valves,fittings,and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Arrange piping installations adjacent to units to allow unit servicing and maintenance.
2. Connection piping to air-handling units with flexible connectors.
15854-11 No.99132-CP2
3. Connect condensate drain pans using 1-1/4-inch,Type M copper tubing. Extend to the nearest equipment or
floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.
B. Duct installations and connections are specified in Section 15891 "Ductwork" and 15910 "Ductwork Accessories".
Make final duct connections with flexible connections.
C. Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply:
1. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 16.
2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring is specified in Section 15970 "Energy Systems Management
and Control Systems".
3. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service representative to perform the
following:
1. Inspect the field assembly of components and installation of central-station air-handling units including piping,
ductwork,and electrical connections.
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.
3.06 ADJUSTING,CLEANING,AND PROTECTING
A. Adjust water coil flow,with control valves to full coil flow,to indicated gpm.
B. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
C. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel,fan
cabinet,and coils entering air face.
3.07 COMIVUSSIONING -
A. Final Checks Before Start Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-up:
1. Remove shipping,blocking,and bracing. 1
2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for piping, ductwork, and
electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and
disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor and verify proper motor rotation direction and verify fan wheel free rotation
and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system,align belts,and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings,pulleys,belts,and other moving parts with factory-recommended lubricants.
6. Set outside-air and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.
7. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
15854-12 No.99132-CP2
8. Install clean filters.
9. Verify manual and automatic volume control,and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are
in the full-open position.
10. Disable automatic temperature control operators.
B. Starting procedures for central-station air-handling units:
1. Energize motor,verify proper operation of motor,drive system,and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
a. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.
D. Refer to Division 15 Section 15990 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air-handling-system
testing,adjusting,and balancing.
3.08 TEMPORARY OPERATION
A. Manually operate air handling systems to provide suitable environment for installation of interior finishes. Perform
commissioning operations prior to starting units. Follow commissioning starting procedures and the following
manual operation sequence:
1. Open outdoor air dampers,close return air dampers,open all air terminals to full open. Verify filters installed,
heating coil operating (outdoor air temperatures below 40° F), condensate drain fimctioning, and electrical
protection devices installed. Start fan,monitor indoor and outdoor conditions, and manually operate heating
and cooling systems to control space conditions;shut down systems completely and close outdoor air dampers
at end of each work day.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel on the following:
1. Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shut down, troubleshooting, servicing, preventative
maintenance,and how to obtain replacement parts.
2. Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1 Section"Project
Closeout"and Division 15 Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
B. Schedule training with at least 7 days'advance notice.
END OF SECTION 15854
15854-13 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15891
DUCTWORK
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section:
1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements.
2. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
1.02 SUNEVIARY
A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air
conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2-inches to plus 10 inches water gage.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 for fire-resistant sealants for use around duct penetrations and fire damper installations in fire rated
floors,partitions,and walls.
2. Division 8 for wall-and ceiling-mounted access panels and doors for access to concealed ducts.
3. Division 10 for intake and relief louvers and vents connected to duct systems and installed in exterior walls.
4. Section 15250"Mechanical Insulation"for exterior duct and plenum insulation.
5. Section 15910"Duct Accessories"for flexible duct materials,dampers,duct-mounted access panels and doors,
and turning vanes.
6. Section 15854"Central Station Air Handling Units"for factory fabricated mechanical equipment.
7. Section 15932"Grilles Registers and Diffusers".
8. Section 15970"Energy Management Control Systems"for automatic volume control dampers and operators.
9. Section 15990"Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing".
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Sealing Requirements Definitions: For the purposes of duct systems sealing requirements specified in this Section,
the following definitions apply:
1. Seams: A seam is defined as joining of two longitudinally(in the direction of airflow)oriented edges of duct
surface material occurring between two joints. All other duct surface connections made on the perimeter are
deemed to be joints.
15891-1 No.99132-CP2
2. Joints: Joints include girth joints; branch and sub-branch intersections; so-called duct collar tap-ins; fitting
subsections; louver and air terminal connections to ducts; access door and access panel frames and jambs;
duct,plenum,and casing abutments to building structures.
1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air moving and distribution equipment and
other components of the air system Changes or alterations to the layout or configuration of the duct system must be
specifically approved in writing. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that the
proposed layout will provide the original design results without increasing the system total pressure.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components,profiles,
and finishes for the following items:
1. Duct Liner.
2. Sealing Materials.
3. Fire-Stopping Materials.
C. Shop drawings from duct fabrication shop, drawn to a scale not smaller than 1/4 inch equals 1 foot, on drawing
sheets same overall size as the Contract Drawings,to be used as coordination drawings for ductwork installation in
accordance with Section 15010"Basic Mechanical Requirements"and detailing the following information.
1. Fabrication,assembly,and installation details,including plans,elevations,sections,details of components,and
attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout,indicating pressure classifications and sizes in plan view. For exhaust duct systems, indicate the
classification of the materials handled as defined in this Section.
3. Fittings.
4. Reinforcing details and spacing.
5. Seam and joint construction details.
6. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
7. Terminal unit,coil,and humidifier installations.
8. Hangers and supports,including methods for building attachment,vibration isolation,and duct attachment.
9. Coordination with ceiling suspension members.
10. Spatial coordination with other systems installed in the same space with the duct systems.
11. Coordination of ceiling and wall mounted access doors and panels required to provide access to dampers and
other operating devices.
12. Coordination with ceiling-mounted lighting fixtures and air outlets and inlets.
D. Welding certificates including welding procedures specifications, welding procedures qualifications test records,
and welders'qualifications test records complying with requirements specified in"Quality Assurance"below.
E. Record drawings including duct systems routing,fittings details,reinforcing,support, and installed accessories and
devices,in accordance with Section 15010"Basic Mechanical Requirements"and Division 1.
F. Maintenance data for volume control devices,fire dampers,and smoke dampers,in accordance with Section 15010
"Basic Mechanical Requirements"and Division 1.
15891-2 No.99132-CP2
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code-Steel"
for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1 "Sheet Metal Welding Code."
B. Qualify each welder in accordance with AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved. Certify that their
qualification is current.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," except as indicated
otherwise.
2. NFPA 96, "Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors
for Commercial Cooking Equipment," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for kitchen hood duct systems, except as
indicated otherwise.
D. State Building Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of State Building Codes including mechanical
and plumbing sections.
1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sealant and fire-stopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing
about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and
mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
B. Store and handle sealant fire-stopping materials in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture,high or low temperatures,contaminants,or other causes.
C. Deliver and store stainless steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper,maintained through fabrication
and installation.
PART 2:PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Sheet Metal,General: Provide sheet metal in thicknesses indicated,packaged and marked as specified in ASTM A
700.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality, ASTM A 527, Coating Designation G 90. Provide mill
phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
C. PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel: UL-181 Class 1 Listing. Lock forming quality galvanized sheet steel with ASTM
A 527, Coating Designation G 90. Provide with factory-applied, 4-mil, PVC coating on the exposed surfaces of
ducts and fittings(exterior of ducts and fittings for underground applications, and the interior of ducts and fittings
for fume-handing applications)and 2-mil PVC coating on the reverse side of the ducts and fittings.
D. Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366,cold-rolled sheets,commercial quality,with oiled,exposed matte finish-
E.
inishE. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480, Type 316, sheet form, with No. 4 finish on exposed surface for ducts exposed to
view;Type 304,sheet form,with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.
15891-3 No.99132-CP2
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated,provide galvanized steel reinforcing where installed
on galvanized sheet metal ducts. For stainless steel ducts provide reinforcing of compatible materials.
G. Aluminum Sheet: Where indicated,provide aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper
H14.
H. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less;3/8-inch minimum diameter for
lengths longer than 36 inches.
I. Flexible Ducts: Spiral-wound spring steel with flameproof vinyl sheathing, or corrugated aluminum; complying
with Ul 181. Class I.
1. Where installed in unconditioned spaces other than return air plenums, provide 1" thick continuous flexible
fiberglass sheath with vinyl vapor barrier jacket.
2. Ducts in air return plenums must comply with Code flame and smoke requirements.
3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide flexible ductwork of one of the following:
Wiremold 86A
Wiremold 57LF
Wiremold 57LFK
Wiremold WC
Wiremold WCK
Thermaflex S.LP.10
Thermaflex M-K
2.02 DUCT LINER
A. General: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and TRVIA Standard AHC-101.
B. Materials: ASTM C 1071,Type H,with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
1. Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Density. 1-1/2 pounds.
3. Thermal Performance: "K-Factor"equal to 0.28 or better,at a mean temperature of 75 deg F.
4. Fire Hazard Classification: Flame spread rating of not more than 25 without evidence of continued
progressive combustion and a smoke developed rating of no higher than 50, when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 411.
5. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and ASTM C 916.
6. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel,suitable for adhesive attachment,mechanical attachment,or welding
attachment to duct. Provide fasteners that do not damage the liner when applied as recommended by the
manufacturer,that do not cause leakage in the duct,and will indefinitely sustain a 50-pound tensile dead load
test perpendicular to the duct wall.
a. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation, and without projecting more than 1/8 inch
into the airstream
b. Adhesive For Attachment of Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with the "Fire Hazard Classification" of
duct liner system
15891-4 No.99132-CP2
2.03 SEALING MATERIALS
I
A. General: The term sealant used here is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature;but also includes tapes
and combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics.
B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide,glass-fiber-fabric reinforced.
C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a modified
acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with the tape to form a hard,durable,airtight seal.
D. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, non-sag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying with FS
TT-S-001657,Type I;formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
E. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920,
Type S,Grade NS,Class 25,Use O.
2.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder actuated fasteners, or structural steel fasteners appropriate for
building materials. Do not use powder actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concretes or for slabs
less than 4 inches thick.
B. Hangers: Galvanized sheet steel,or round,uncoated steel,threaded rod.
1. Hangers Installed In Corrosive Atmospheres: Electro-galvanized,all-thread rod or hot-dipped-galvanized rods
with threads painted after installation.
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Conform with Table 4-1 in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1985
Edition,for sheet steel width and gage and steel rod diameters.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws,blind rivets,or self-tapping metal screws;compatible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36.
1. Where galvanized steel ducts are installed,provide hot-dipped-galvanized steel shapes and plates.
2. For stainless steel ducts,provide stainless steel support materials.
2.05 DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated,fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel, in accordance with
SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Tables 1-3 through 1-19, including their associated details.
Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness,reinforcing types and intervals,tie rod
applications,and joint types and intervals.
1. Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure
classification.
2. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting,seam marks,roller marks,stains,and
discoloration.
B. Static Pressure Classifications: Except where otherwise indicated,construct duct systems to the following pressure
classifications:
1. Supply Ducts: 3 inches water gage; 1 inch of water gage downstream of VAV boxes.
2. Return Ducts: 3 inches water gage,negative pressure.
3. Exhaust Ducts: 1%z inch water gage,negative pressure.
i'
15891-5 No.99132-CP2
15891-7 No.99132-CP2
L
6. Round Gored Elbows Gages: Same as for non-elbow fittings specified above.
7.- Flat Oval Elbows Gages: Same as longitudinal seam flat oval duct
L-
8. Pleated Elbows Sizes Through 14 Inches and Pressures Through 10 Inches: 26 gage.
i
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 DUCT INSTALLATION,GENERAL.
A. Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct
ys system for the specific duct pressure classification i
indicated. —
B. Install ducts with the fewest possible joints.
i_
C. Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions,changes in size and shape,and connections.
D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at connections kept to a minimum
E. Locate ducts,except as otherwise indicated,vertically and horizontally,parallel and perpendicular to building lines;
avoid diagonal runs. Install duct systems in shortest route that does not obstruct usable space or block access for
servicing building and its equipment.
F. Install ducts close to walls,overhead construction, columns,and other structural and permanent enclosure elements
of building. L
G. Provide clearance of 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or conceahnent of ducts, plus allowance for
insulation thickness,if any.
L
H. Install insulated ducts with 1-inch clearance outside of insulation.
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall L.
construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically
shown.
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work i
K Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment
spaces and enclosures.
L. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts penetrate interior partitions and exterior walls,and are exposed
to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same
gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. —
M. Fire Rated Walls: Where ducts penetrate fire rated walls,provide firestopping material as required to maintain wall
fire rating. Comply with all firestopping manufacturers installation directions and guidelines. L
N. Protect all ductwork and duct construction materials from damage,construction dust,moisture,and other sources.of
contamination when stored on the site awaiting fabrication or installation. Provide clean plugs to seal openings in
installed ductwork which might allow contaminants to enter.
O. Install all duct mounted control and alarm devices furnished as work of other Division 15 sections. Work to include '
temperature sensors,dampers,thermostats,smoke detectors,safety switches and pressure sensors. `L
15891-8 No.99132-CP2
P. Install actuators for all dampers and control devices for work of other Division 15 sections.
Q. Install flexible duct with maximum length of 4'-0"and as detailed.
3.02 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. General: Seal duct seams and joints as follows:
' B. Pressure Classifications Greater Than 4 Inches Water Gage: All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and wall
penetrations.
C. Pressure Classification 3 and Greater Water Gage: All transverse joints and longitudinal seams.
1. Pressure Classification Less than 2 Inches Water Gage: Transverse joints only.
D. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation.
3.03 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round,rectangular,and flat oval metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards,"Tables 4-1 through 4-3 and Figures 4-1 through 4-8.
B. Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch intersection.
' C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.
D. Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not exceeding 1/4 of the failure(proof test) load but
are not limited to the specific methods indicated
E. Install concrete insert prior to placing concrete.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in accordance with Division 15 Section
15910"Duct Accessories."
B. Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards,"Figures 2-7 and 2-8.
C. Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2-16
through 2-18.
D. Terminal Units Connections: Comply with SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards,"Figure 2-19.
3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust volume control devices as required by the testing and balancing procedures to achieve required air flow.
Refer to Division 15 Section 15990 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing for requirements and procedures for
adjusting and balancing air systems.
B. Vacuum ducts systems prior to final acceptance to remove dust and debris.
END OF SECTION 15891
S15891-9 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15910
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of the following Division 15 section applies to this section:
1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules,and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following:
1. Dampers.
a. Low pressure manual dampers.
b. Control dampers.
c. Counterbalanced relief dampers.
2. Fire and smoke dampers.
' 3. Turning vanes.
4. Duct hardware.
5. Duct access doors.
& Flexible connections.
' 7. Duct smoke detectors.
C. Refer to Division 15 Section 15990 for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork accessories;not work of this
section.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories,or types and sizes
required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. State Building Code Compliance: Comply with provisions of state mechanical codes.
2. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards,
Metal and Flexible".
' 3. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork
accessories,except as otherwise indicated.
4. UL Compliance: Construct,test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555 "Fire Dampers
and Ceiling Dampers".
5. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems",pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.
15910-1 No.99132-CP2
1.04 SUBN=ALS '
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including
dimensions,capacities,and materials of construction;and installation instructions. ,
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of ductwork accessory showing
interfacing requirements with ductwork,method of fastening or support,and methods of assembly of components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of duct accessory. ,
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of
Division 1.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 DAMPERS
A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multi-blade type, constructed in
accordance with SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards".
B. Control Dampers: Refer to Division 15 Section 15970 "Energy Management and Control Systems" for control
dampers;not work of this section. '
C. Counterbalanced Relief Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades,counterbalanced and factory-set to relieve
at indicated static pressure. Construct blades of 16-ga. alumimmi, provide 1/2" diameter ball bearings, 1/2" ,
diameter steel axles spaced on 9"centers. Construct frame of 2"x 1/2"x 1/8"steel channel for face areas 25 sq.R
and under,4"x 1-1/4"x 16-ga.channel for face area over 25 sq. ft. Provide galvanized steel finish on frame with
aluminum touch-up. ,
D. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering dampers which may be incorporated in the work
include the following:
1. Air Balance,Inc.
2. Airguide Corp.
3. American Warming&Ventilating,Inc.
4. Arrow Louver and Damper,Div.of Arrow United Industries,Inc.
5. Louvers&Dampers,Inc.
6. Nailor Hart.
7. Perm Ventilator Co.
8. Prefco.
9. Ruskin Mfg.Co.
10. Cesco Products.
11. United Air.
2.02 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Fire Dampers: Provide fire dampers, of types and sizes indicated. Construct casings of 20-ga. galvanized steel. ,
Provide fusible link rated at 160 to 1650F unless otherwise indicated. Provide damper with positive lock in closed
position,and with the following additional features: '
1. Damper Blade Assembly: Interlocking curtain type.
2. Blade Material: Steel,match casing.
Provide material and installation costs in bid for eight (8) extra fire dampers. Assume a damper size of 18x12.
Dampers are for locations not specifically shown on the drawings. Damper sizes are to be field verified at locations
required and ordered only after approval from the Architect and Engineer.
15910-2 No.99132-CP2
e B. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering fire dampers which may be
incorporated in the work include the following:
I. Air Balance,Inc.
2. American Warming&Ventilating,Inc.
3. Arrow Louver and Damper;Div.of Arrow United Industries Inc.
4. Louvers and Dampers,Inc.
5. Penn Ventilator Co.
6. Phillips-Aire.
7. Ruskin Mfg.Co.
8. Safe Air.
9. National Controlled Air.
10. Cesco Products.
11. Prefco.
' 12. Nailor.
13. United Air.
14. Greenheck.
' 2.03 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated turning vanes and vane runners, constructed in accordance with
SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards".
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of 1-1/2" wide curved blades set at 3/4" o.c.,
supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2"o.c.,and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Provide acoustic turning vanes constructed of airfoil shaped aluminum extrusions with
perforated faces and fiberglass fill.
D. Subject.to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering turning vanes which may be incorporated in the
work include the following:
1. Aero Dyne Co.
2. Airsan Corp.
3. Anemostat Products Div.;Dynamics Corp.of America.
4. Barber-Colman Co.
05. Duro Dyne Corp.
6. Environmental Elements Corp.;Subs.Koppers Co.,Inc.
7. Hart&Cooley Mfg.Co.
8. Register&Grille Mfg.Co.,Inc.
9. Souther,Inc.
2.04 DUCT HARDWARE
A. General: Provide duct hardware,manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project,for the following:
1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet,and elsewhere as indicated,duct test holes, consisting
of slot and cover,for instrument tests.
1 2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper,quadrant lock device on one end of shaft;and end bearing plate on
other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for
externally insulated ductwork.
15910-3 No.99132-CP2
B. Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering duct hardware which may be incorporated in the '
work include the following:
1. Ventfabrics,Inc.
2. Young Regulator Co.
2.05 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. General: Provide where indicated,duct access doors of size indicted.
B. Construction: Construct of same or greater gage as ductwork served, provide insulated doors for insulated ,
ductwork. Provide flush frames for un-insulated ductwork,extended frames for externally insulated duct Provide
one size hinged, other side with one handle-type latch for doors 12" high and smaller, 2 handle-type latches for
larger doors.
C. Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering duct access doors which may be incorporated in
the work include the following:
1. Air Balance Inc. ,
2. Duro Dyne Corp.
3. Register&Grille Mfg.Co.,Inc.
4. Ruskin Mfg.Co.
5. Ventfabrics,Inc.
6. Zuni Industries,Inc.;Air Systems Div.
7. Cesco Products.
8. Nailor.
2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Construct
flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and
equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and '
torsional movement,and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering flexible connections which may be incorporated in
the work include the following:
1. American/Elgen Co.;Energy Div.
2. Duro Dyne Corp.
3. Flexaust(The)Co.
4. Ventfabrics,Inc.
2.07 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Duct smoke detectors supplied under Division 16 and installed by this contractor.
2.08 EXTRA STOCK
A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner,one link for every 10 installed of each temperature range;obtain receipt.
15910-4 No.99132-CP2 ,
' PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
' A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions,with applicable portions of
details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to
ensure that products serve intended function.
B. Install fuming vanes in square or rectangular 900 elbows in supply and exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as
indicated.
C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure,with latches operable from either side,except outside only
' where duct is too small for person to enter.
D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories
properly with other work.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while
system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof
performance.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for
proper action.
1. Label access doors in accordance with Division 15 Section 15190 Mechanical Identification.
' 2. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 15 Section 15990 Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing.
B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up
paint.
' END OF SECTION 15910
' 15910-5 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15932
GRILLES,REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
PART 1: GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this section:
1. Section 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements
2. Section 15891 Ductwork
3. Section 15910 Ductwork Accessories
' 4. Section 15990 Testing,Adjusting and Balancing
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules,and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of air outlets and inlets required for project include the following:
' 1. Ceiling air diffusers and return registers and grilles.
2. Wall registers and grilles.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Finns regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and
capacities required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Codes and Standards:
' 1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for Air Outlets
and Inlets".
' 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70 "Method of
Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets".
3. ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under requirements of ADC
1062"Certification,Rating and Test Manual".
4. ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal.
5. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method for Louvers,
Dampers and Shutters".
6. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
7. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A"Standard for the Installation
of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following:
' 15932-1 No.99132-CP2
1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model '
number,size,and accessories furnished
2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating construction, finish, and
mounting details.
3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability,temperature and '
velocity traverses,throw and drop,and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.
B. Samples: Submit 3 samples of each type of finish furnished '
C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air outlet and inlet,indicating
materials and methods of assembly of components.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists.
Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of
Division 1. '
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber- board type containers. Identify on outside of '
container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris
from entering and settling in devices.
B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where '
possible,store indoors;when necessary to store outdoors,store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS ,
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated,provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers where shown;of size,
shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for
complete installation ,
B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minim, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and
drop,and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.
C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems,and
that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support Refer to general ,
construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air
diffuser.
D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type,capacity,and with accessories and finishes as listed on diffuser schedule.
The following requirements shall apply to nomenclature indicated on schedule:
1. Diffuser Faces: '
a. Round: Round housing,core of concentric rings,round duct connection.
b. Square: Square housing,core of square concentric louvers,square or round duct connection
C. Linear: Extruded aluminum continuous slot,single or multiple.
15932-2 No.99132-CP2 '
2. Diffuser Mountings:
a. Lay-in: Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling exposed suspension tee bars and rest on top surface
of tee bar.
' b. Duct-mounted.
3. Diffuser Patterns:
a. Fixed: Fixed position core with concentric rings or louvers for radial air flow around entire perimeter of
diffuser.
' b. Adjustable: Manual adjustable core with concentric rings or louvers, fully adjustable for horizontal to
vertical air flow.
4. Diffuser Dampers:
a. Opposed Blade: Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly,key operated from face of diffuser.
b. Integral: Combination volume control and pattern adjustment for linear diffusers.
' 5. Diffuser Accessories:
a. Equalizing Deflectors: Adjustable parallel blades in frame for straightening air flow.
' b. Blank-Off Baffles: Arc segments designed to fit into diffuser housing to divert air flow from impinging
on obstruction,and to create directional pattern.
c. Operating Keys: Tools designed to fit through diffuser face and operate volume control device and/or
' pattern adjustment.
6. Diffuser Finishes:
' a. White Enamel: Semi-gloss white enamel prime finish.
E. Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering diffusers which may be incorporated in the work
' include the following:
1. Anemostat Products Div.;Dynamics Corp.of America.
' 2. Carries Co.;Div.of Wehr Corp.
3. Krueger Mfg.Co.
4. Titus Products Div.;Philips Industries,Inc.
5. Tuttle&Bailey;Div.of Interpace Corp.
' 6. J&J Register.
7. E.H.Price.
8. Nailor.
9. Metal Air.
2.02 WALL REGISTERS AND GRILLES
' A. General: Except as otherwise indicated,provide manufacturer's standard wall registers and grilles where shown;of
size,shape,capacity and type indicated;constructed of materials and components as indicated,and as required for
complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide wall registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw
and drop,and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.
' 15932-3 No.99132-CP2
C. Wall Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent wall systems, '
and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with accurate fit and adequate support Refer to
general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall construction which will contain each type of wall
register and grille.
D. Types: Provide wall registers and grilles of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on register ,
and grille schedule. The following requirements shall apply to nomenclature indicated on schedule:
1. Register and Grille Materials:
a. Steel Construction(ST): Manufacturer's standard stamped sheet steel frame and adjustable blades. '
b. Aluminum Construction(AL): Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum frame and adjustable blades.
2. Register and Grille Faces:
a. Horizontal Straight Blades: Horizontal blades, individually adjustable, at manufacturer's standard '
spacing-
b. Vertical Straight Blades: Vertical blades,individually adjustable,at manufacturer's standard spacing. '
c. Horizontal 450 Fixed Blades: Horizontal blades,fixed at 450,at manufacturer's standard spacing.
3. Register and Grille Patterns:
a. Single Deflection: 1 set of blades in face. '
b. Double Deflection: 2 sets of blades in face,rear set at 900 to face set.
4., Register and Grille Dampers: ,
a. Opposed Blade: Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly,key operated from face of register. '
5. Register and Grille Accessories:
a. Operating Keys: Tools designed to fit through register or grille face and operate volume control device '
and/or pattern adjustment.
6. Register and Grille Finishes: '
a. White Enamel: Semi-gloss white enamel prime finish
E. Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering registers and grilles which may be incorporated in '
the work include the following:
1. Anemostat Products Div.;Dynamics Corp.of America.
2. Carnes.Co.;Div.of Wehr Corp.
3. Krueger Mfg.Co.
4. Titus Products Div.;Philips Industries,Inc.
5. Tuttle&Bailey;Div.of Interpace Corp. '
6. J&J Register.
7. E.H.Price.
8. Nailor.
9. Metal Air.
2.03 SPARE PARTS
A. Furnish to Owner,with receipt,3 operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require them. ,
159324 No.99132-CP2
' PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
' A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with
' recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended fimctions.
B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface installation of air
outlets and inlets with other work.
C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans".
Unless otherwise indicated,locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules.
' END OF SECTION 15932
15932-5 No.99132-CP2
' SECTION 15973
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification sections,apply to work of this section.
B. Division 15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.
' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of pneumatic control systems work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by
requirements of this section.
1. Control sequences are specified on the Control Sequence and Points Schedule data sheets attached to the end
of this section.
B. Refer to other Division 15 sections for installation of instrument wells,and valve bodies in mechanical systems;not
work of this section.
D. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section,complying with requirements of the N.E.C.:
1. Control wiring between field-installed controls,indicating devices,and unit control panels.
2. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on controls and/or unit control panels. Include
starters,disconnects,and required electrical devices, except where specified as finished,or factory-installed,
' by manufacturer.
3. Interlock wiring between electrically-operated equipment units; and between equipment and field-installed
' control devices.
a. Interlock wiring specified as factory-installed is work of this section.
' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pneumatic control equipment, of types
' and sizes required,and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms specializing and experienced in pneumatic control system installations for not less
than 5 years.
' C. Codes and Standards:
1. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical components of pneumatic control systems which have been UL-listed
and labeled,and comply with NEMA standards.
15973-1 No.99132-CP2
2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and devices for pneumatic '
control systems.
3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems"where applicable to controls and control sequences.
4. State Building Code Compliance: Comply with the requirements of State Mechanical Code.
1.04 SUBMITTALS '
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device and compressed air station '
famished, indicating dimensions, capacities,performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes, also
include installation and start-up instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each pneumatic control system,containing the following information: '
1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans,pumps,coils,dampers,valves,and control devices.
2. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control '
3. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-
installed and portions to be field-installed
4. Provide details of faces of control panels,including controls,instruments,and labeling.
5. Include verbal description of sequence of operation. ,
C. Samples: Submit sample of each type of furnished thermostat cover,in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists for each type of control device, and
compressed air stations. Include that type data, product data and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in
accordance with requirements of Division 1. '
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain cartons while shipping, '
storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage,and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment.
Store equipment and materials inside and protect from weather.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS '
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering pneumatic control systems which may be
incorporated in the work include the following: ,
1. Andover Controls Corp.
2. Commercial Div;Honeywell,Inc.
3. Environmental Controls Div;Barber-Coleman Co.
4. Johnson Controls,Inc.
15973-2 No.99132-CP2 '
' 5. Landis&Gyr Powers,Inc.
6. Trane Sentinel Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide pneumatic control products in sizes and capacities indicated, consisting of valves, dampers,
thermostats, and other components as required for complete installation. Except as otherwise indicated, provide
manufacturer's standard materials and components as published in their product information; designed and
constructed as recommended by manufacturer, as required for application indicated. Provide pneumatic control
systems with the following functional construction features:
B. Air Piping: Seamless copper tubing, Type K or L, ASTM B 88; with cast-bronze solder joint fittings, ANSI
B16.18; or wrought-copper solder joint fittings, ANSI B16.22; except brass compression-type fittings at
connections to equipment.
C. Air Piping: Virgin polyethylene nonmetallic tubing,ASTM D 2737,and with flame-retardant harness for multiple
tubing. Use compression or push-on polyethylene fittings.
' D. Control Valves: Provide factory fabricated pneumatic control valves of type, body material and pressure class
indicated. Where type or body material is not indicated, provide selection as determined by manufacturer for
installation requirements and pressure class, based on maximum pressure and temperature in piping system.
Provide valve size in accordance with scheduled or specified maximum pressure drop across control valve. Equip
control valves with heavy-duty pneumatic actuators,with proper shutoff rating for each individual application.
' 1. Water Service Valves: Equal percentage characteristics with rangeability of 50 to 1,and maximum full flow
pressure drop of 5 PSIG.
' 2. Steam Service Valves: Linear characteristics with rangeability of 30 to 1, and maximum full flow pressure
drop of 80%of inlet pressure for low pressure systems,and 42%for high pressure systems.
3. Single Seated Valves: Cage type trim,providing seating and guiding surfaces for plug on"top and bottom"
guided plugs.
4. Double Seated Valves: Balanced plug type, with cage type trim providing seating and guiding surfaces on
"top and bottom"guided plugs.
5. Valve Trim and Stems: Polished stainless steel.
' 6. Packing: Spring-loaded Teflon,self-adjusting.
E. Pneumatic Actuators: Size pneumatic actuators to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient
reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action as specified. When so specified in
sequence of operation, where more than 2 actuators are to be operated in sequence to each other,provide position
feedback positive positioners with adjustable startpoint and operating range.
' F. Indicating Controllers: Provide temperature,humidity, static pressure, dewpoint, etc., controllers of high capacity
receiver controller type,fiilly adjustable,direct or reverse acting,2-pipe non-bleed design,capable of accepting 1 or
2 transmitter inputs with separate third input port for local or remote control point readjustment, and adjustable
' proportional band. Provide direct reading replacement scales to match range on input devices or separate
adjustment switches with calibrated dials.
1. Provide, at each sensing input controller, 1-1/2" diameter dial indicator with scales to match input range (in
OF,relative humidity,inches of water)for convenience in calibration and adjustment.
2. Locate panel mounted indicators within sight of controller.
15973-3 No.99132-CP2
3. Equip control output air line(branch pressure with either quick-connect test plug or with permanently installed '
1-1/2"diameter pressure gage.
4. Provide controllers for equipment room use which have been designed and constructed to not be affected by '
high ambient temperatures and humidities;to operate on force balance principle,and to be corrosion resistant
for high humidity service.
5. Provide controllers as indicated for critical constant temperature applications, of indicating type as specified
for equipment room use,and with automatic pneumatic reset feature that will reset control point as function of
load changes,in order to maintain fixed temperature by eliminating effect of proportional band setting.
G. Space and Duct Humidity Sensors: Provide sensors with minimum sensing span of 15 to 75, or 65 to 95%relative '
humidity for 3 to 15 PSIG pressure change, corrosion resistant and temperature-compensated and with factory
calibrated adjustment.
H. Dew Point Sensors: Provide dew point sensors which employ non-reactive organic material to give precise dew '
point readings of not more than plus-or-minus 1.50F(IOC),incorporating integral draft shield as part of instrument
when used with air velocities in excess of 50 FPM. Provide dew point sensors to operate over minimum dew point '
temperature range suitable for application with adjustable set point and reset ratio. Provide one additional bobbin
assembly with each dew point sensor.
1. Provide system or combination of instruments which is capable of operating for at least one year period '
without maintenance(wetting-sleeve type units are not acceptable).
I. Low Limit Controllers: Provide unit-mounted low limit controllers, of rod-and-tube.type, with adjustable '
proportional band.
J. Pneumatic Control Panels: Provide control panels to house pneumatic controls for each supply fan system and for '
each miscellaneous control subsystem as required,with suitable brackets for either wall or floor mounting. Locate
panel adjacent to systems served
1. Fabricate panels of 16-gage furniture-grade steel, or 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy, totally enclosed on '
four sides,with hinged door and keyed lock,with manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish and color.
2. Provide UL-listed cabinets for use with line voltage devices. '
3. Panel Mounted Equipment: Include controllers,relays,and automatic switches;except devices not included as
work of this section. Mount device with adjustments accessible through front of panel
4. Door-Mounted Equipment: Flush-mount (on hinged door) manual switches, including damper "minimum '
OFF"positioning switches,"manual-automatic"switches,dial thermometers,and gages.
5. Graphics: For those systems so specified,provide color-coded graphics laminated plastic displays on doors,to
schematically show subsystem being controlled Provide protective sheet of clear plastic bonded to entire
door to prevent damage to symbols.
K Central(Master) Control Panels: Provide central control panels of fully enclosed steel cubical type, with locking ,
doors and/or locking removable backs. Match finish of panels and provide multi-color graphic displays,
schematically showing system being controlled '
L. Replacement Materials: Equip pneumatic damper motors, valve motors, controllers, thermostats and positioning
relays with replaceable diaphragms and relay mechanisms. '
M. Electrical Requirements: Provide electric-pneumatic or pneumatic-electric switches, electrical devices and relays
that are UL-listed and of type which meet current and voltage characteristics of project.
159734 No.99132-CP2 '
' N. Clocks: Provide time clocks that are specified as part of temperature control sequences, of 7-day, 24-hour type,
with weekend and skip-a-day features. Provide time clocks with 10-hour spring carry-over to maintain clock
movement in case of power failure.
' O. Provide thermostats with fixed or adjustable setting to operate at not less than 75OF(240C)above normal maximum
temperature at their location in air handling system. Comply with requirements of NFPA 90A.
1. Provide manual reset type thermostats.
2. Provide automatic reset type thermostats with control circuit arranged to require manual reset at central control
panel. Provide pilot light and reset switch on panel, clearly labeled to indicate operation of fire protection
thermostat.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
' A. Examine areas and conditions under which pneumatic control systems are to be installed. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, roughing-in drawings and
details shown on drawings.
' B. Connect into the existing pneumatic control system and extend to new system. This Contractor shall field verify
existing pressures and main air piping size to determine where connection to existing system shall be made prior to
bid. If there is insufficient air volume at location of new control panels include connection directly to the existing
air compressor and provide a new pressure reducing valve and oil filter for the new controls. No new air
compressor is included in this project. Report compressor run time to Owner with as-built drawings.
C. Control Air Piping: Accessible tubing is defined as that tubing run in mechanical equipment rooms; inside
mechanical equipment enclosures, such as heating and cooling units, instrument panels etc.; in pipe chases, or
suspended ceilings with easy access. Inaccessible tubing is defined as that tubing run in concrete slabs; furred
walls;or ceilings with no access.
1. Provide copper tubing with maximum unsupported length of 3'-0",for accessible tubing run exposed to view.
Polyethylene tubing may be used in lieu of above,when run within adequately supported,rigid enclosure,such
as metallic raceways,or EMT. Terminal single-line connections less than 18"in length may be copper tubing,
or polyethylene tubing run inside flexible steel protection. Accessible tubing run in concealed locations,such
as pipe chases,suspended ceilings with easy access,etc.,may be copper or polyethylene bundled and sheathed
tubing with encasement suitable for use in air return plenum applications.
2. Provide copper or polyethylene tubing for inaccessible tubing, other than in concrete pour. If polyethylene
tubing is used,install in EMT.
' 3. Provide copper or polyethylene tubing when installed in concrete pour. If copper is used,protect at floor line
with EMT extending 6" above floor and 6"into pour. Pressure test before and after pour for leak and pinch.
' If polyethylene is used, provide EMT conduit in pour and extend 6" above floor line; pull tubing through
conduit after pour.
4. Pressure Test control air piping at 30 psi for 24 hours. Test fails if more than 5 PSI loss occurs.
5. Fasten flexible connections bridging cabinets and doors,neatly along hinge side,and protect against abrasion.
Tie and support tubing neatly.
15973-5 No.99132-CP2
6. Number-code or color-code tubing, except local individual room control tubing, for future identification and ,
servicing of control system
D. Unit Mounted Equipment: Ship electric-pneumatic relays, pneumatic-electric switches, valves, dampers, damper '
motors to system manufacturer for mounting and wiring at factory.
E. Control Wiring: Install control wiring, without splices between terminal points, color-coded. Install in neat
workmanlike manner,securely fastened. Install in accordance with National Electrical Code. '
1. Install circuits over 25-volt with color-coded No. 12 wire in electric metallic tubing.
2. Install circuits under 25-volt with color-coded No. 18 wire with 0.031" high temperature 105°F plastic '
insulation on each conductor and plastic sheath over all.
3. Install electronic circuits with color-coded No.22 wire with 0.023"polyethylene insulation on each conductor '
with plastic jacketed copper shield over all.
4. Install low voltage circuits located in concrete slabs, masonry walls, exposed in occupied areas, or other ,
inaccessible locations,in electrical conduit.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Start-Up: Start-up, test, and adjust pneumatic control systems in presence of manufacturer's authorized '
representative. Demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment '
B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up
paint
C. Final Adjustment: After completion of installation, adjust thermostats, control valves, motors and similar ,
equipment provided as work of this section.
1. Final adjustment shall be performed by specially trained personnel in direct employ of manufacturer of '
primary temperature control system-
3.04
ystem3.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES '
A. Owner's Instructions: Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for one 8-hour day to instruct
Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of pneumatic control systems. '
1. Schedule instruction with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and Architect/Engineer of
training date.
1
15973-6 No.99132-CP2 '
' CONTROL SEQUENCE AND POINTS SCHEDULE
FOR: Existing Air Handling Systems
1. GENERAL
A. Air Handling Systems: All equipment indicated shall be controlled by the existing pneumatic control panel
currently controlling the listed units. Modify the existing control system to provide the sequences listed
' below. Existing control sequences not mentioned shall remain unchanged.
1. AREA SERVED:
Air Handling Unit S-1,S-2
B. Provide the chilled water valves and pneumatic actuators;refer to equipment schedules for 2 or 3 way valves.
Installation specified under another DIV 15 section.
2. CONTROL SEQUENCE
' A. Occupied Mode
1. Economizer Control
a. The outside air damper,return air damper,and relief air damper shall modulate to maintain the
mixed air setpoint.
' b. The outside air damper shall be closed to minimum position when the outside air enthalpy is greater
than the return air enthalpy,the outside air temperature is greater than 80.0 degrees,the outside air
enthalpy is greater than 26.0 BTU/1b.,or the system is indexed to the cooling mode.
2. Chilled Water Coil Valve Control
a. The system shall be indexed to the mechanical cooling mode when chilled water is available,the
outside air dampers are fi l open,the outside air temperature is greater than 58.0 degrees,and the
number of cooling requests exceeds the operator specified number.
b. The hot water control valve shall be closed and the outside air damper shall close to its minimum
position.
C. The chilled water coil valve shall modulate to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint. On
multiple coil installations,modulate each coil section control valve in sequence such that a section
control valve is fully open before the next section begins to modulate.
' d. When the number of"heating requests"exceeds the operator specified number,the discharge air
temperature shall be increased to prevent over cooling.
' B. Unoccupied Mode
1. Cooling coil valve shall be fully closed.
END OF SECTION 15973
15973-7 No.99132-CP2
' SECTION 15990
TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification sections,apply to work of this section.
B. Related Sections:
1. General requirements for testing agencies are specified in the Division 1 Section Quality Control Services.
2. Other Division 15 Sections specify balancing devices and their installation, and materials and installations of
mechanical systems.
3. Individual Division 15 system sections specify leak testing requirements and procedures.
1.02 SUNEVIARY
A. The Owner will select,hire, and pay for services of a testing, adjusting, and balancing contractor as defined under
this section. This section is included for reference only.
B. Test,adjust,and balance the following mechanical systems:
1. Supply air systems,all pressure ranges.
2. Return air systems.
3. Exhaust air systems.
4. Verify temperature control system operation.
C. Test systems for proper sound and vibration levels.
D. This Section does not include:
1. Testing boilers and pressure vessels for compliance with safety codes;
2. Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems;
3. Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and balancing devices. If devices must be added to
achieve proper adjusting and balancing, refer to the respective system sections for materials and installation
requirements.
4. Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems leakage tests.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Systems testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building environmental
systems to produce the design objectives. It includes:
1. the balance of air and water distribution;
2. adjustment of total system to provide design quantities;
3. electrical measurement;
15990-1 No.99132-CP2
4. verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls; '
5. sound and vibration measurement.
B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.
C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment(e.g.,reduce fan speed,
throttling).
D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and terminals) according to
specified design quantities.
E. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield reproducible results.
F. Report forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for submission and review. These
data should also form the permanent record to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system. There are supply inlets on
water terminals,supply outlets on air terminals,return outlets on water terminals,and exhaust or return inlets on air
terminals such as registers,grilles,diffusers,louvers,and hoods.
H. Main: Duct or pipe containing the system's major or entire fluid flow.
I. Submain: Duct or pipe containing part of the systems'capacity and serving two or more branch mains.
J. Branch main: Duct or pipe serving two or more terminals.
K Branch: Duct or pipe serving a single terminal.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Agency Data:
1. Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meets the qualifications specified
below.
B. Engineer and Technicians Data:
1. Submit proof that the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the technicians
proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified below.
C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures and agenda
proposed to be used for this project.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to test, adjust, and balance the
building systems. Include this information in maintenance data specified in Division 1 and Section 15010.
E. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms prepared by the AABC or NEBB are
proposed.
F. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms,if other than those standard forms prepared by the NEBB are proposed.
15990-2 No.99132-CP2
G. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the Test and
Balance Engineer. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted,and balanced in
accordance with the referenced standards;are an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed;are
a true representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing
procedures;and are an accurate record of all final quantities measured,to establish normal operating values of the
systems. Follow the procedures and format specified below.
1. Draft reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures,prepare draft reports on the
approved forms. Draft reports may be hand written, but must be complete, factual, accurate, and legible.
Organize and format draft reports in the same manner specified for the final reports. Submit 2 complete sets
of draft reports. Only 1 complete set of draft reports will be returned.
2. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports, type written, and
organized and formatted as specified below. Submit 2 complete sets of final reports.
3. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the referenced standard for each
respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced Bind report forms complete with schematic
systems diagrams and other data in reinforced,vinyl,three-ring binders. Provide binding edge labels with the
project identification and a title descriptive of the contents. Divide the contents of the binder into the below
listed divisions,separated by divider tabs:
a. General Information and Summary
b. Air Systems
c. Hydronic Systems
d. Temperature Control Systems
e. Special Systems
f Sound and Vibration Systems.
4. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information,forms and data:
a General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing, adjusting, and balancing
agency,Contractor,Owner,Architect,Engineer,and Project. Include addresses,and contact names and
telephone numbers. Also include a certification sheet containing the seal and name address, telephone
number,and signature of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in this division a listing of the
instrumentations used for the procedures along with the proof of calibration.
'b. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing as a minimum,um,the information
indicated on the standard report forms prepared by the AABC and NEBB,for each respective item and
system. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each
respective report form
H. Calibration Reports: Submit proof that all required instrumentation has been calibrated to tolerances specified in
the referenced standards,within a period of six months prior to starting the project.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and Balance Engineer's Qualifications: A Professional Engineer (either on the installer's staff or an
independent consultant), registered in the State in which the services are to be performed, and having at least 3-
years of successful testing,adjusting,and balancing experience on projects with testing and balancing requirements
similar to those required for this project.
15990-3 No.99132-CP2
B. Agency Qualifications:
1. Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting the qualifications
specified below,to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical
systems identified above, to produce the design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for
conformity to design, measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as
required to meet design specifications,and recording and reporting the results.
2. The independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency certified by National Environmental Balancing
Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and balancing disciplines
required for this project, and having at least one Professional Engineer registered in the State in which the
services are to be performed,certified by NEBB as a Test and Balance Engineer.
C. Agency Qualifications:
1. Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting the qualifications
specified below,to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical
systems identified above, to produce the design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for
confomrity to design, measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as
required to meet design specifications,and recording and reporting the results.
2. An independent testing,adjusting,and balancing agency certified by Associated Air Balance Council(AABC)
in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and having at least one Professional
Engineer registered in the State in which the services are to be performed, certified by AABC as a Test and
Balance Engineer.
D. Codes and Standards:
1. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing of Environmental Systems".
2. AABC: 'National Standards for Total System Balance."
3• ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 1984 Systems Volume,Chapter 37.Testing,Adjusting,and Balancing.
E. Pre-Balancing Conference: Prior to beginning of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, schedule and
conduct a conference with the Architect and representatives of installers of the mechanical systems. The objective
of the conference is final coordination and verification of system operation and readiness for testing,adjusting,and
balancing.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be My operational prior to beginning procedures. 1�
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Test,adjust,and balance the air systems before hydronic,steam,and refrigerant systems.
B. Test, adjust and balance air conditioning systems during summer season and heating systems during winter season,
including at least a period of operation at outside conditions within 5 deg F wet bulb temperature of maximum
r. summer design condition, and within 10 deg F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. Take
final temperature readings during seasonal operation.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
A. Not Used.
159904 No.99132-CP2
1
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING
A. Before operating the system,perform these steps:
1. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the design intent.
2. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of all air handling equipment, outlets(supply, return, and exhaust)
and temperature control diagrams.
3. Compare design to installed equipment and field installations.
4. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to determine variations of
installation from design.
5. Check filters for cleanliness.
6. Check dampers (both volume and fire) for correct and locked position, and temperature control for
completeness of installation before starting fans.
7. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended
procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required outlet volumes to permit a crosscheck with required
fan volumes.
8. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct traverses.
9. Place outlet dampers in the full open position.
10. Prepare schematic diagrams of system"as-built"ductwork and piping layouts to facilitate reporting.
11. Lubricate all motors and bearings.
12. Check fan belt tension.
13. Check fan rotation.
3.02 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEM BALANCING
A. Before operating the system perform these steps:
1. Open valves to full open position. Close coil bypass valves.
2. Remove and clean all strainers.
3. Examine hydropic systems and determine if water has been treated and cleaned.
4. Check pump rotation.
5. Clean and set automatic fill valve for required system pressure.
6. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is completely full of water.
7. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and operating freely(automatic type
or to bleed air completely(manual type).
15990-5 No.99132-CP2
8. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
9. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
10. Check and set operating temperatures of chillers to design requirements.
11. Lubricate all motors and bearings.
3.03 MEASUREMENTS
A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the tolerances specified in the
referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly maintained and protected against damage.
B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards.
C. Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring accuracy and are best suited to the fimction
being measured.
D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Use instruments with mininmmm scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale ranges proper for the value being
measured.
F. When averaging values,take a sufficient quantity of readings which will result in a repeatability error of less than 5
percent. When measuring a single point,repeat readings until 2 consecutive identical values are obtained
G. Take all readings with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax.
H. Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved in estimating average of rapidly fluctuation
readings.
I. Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task.
3.04 PERFORMING TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the detailed procedures
outlined in the referenced standards.
B. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow
adequate performance of procedures.
C. Patch insulation,ductwork,and housings,using materials identical to those removed.
D. Seal ducts and piping,and test for and repair leaks.
E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.
F. Mark equipment settings,including damper control positions,valve indicators,fan speed control levers,and similar
controls and devices,to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable,permanent identification materials.
G. Retest,adjust,and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications,and resubmit test results.
3.05 TESTING FOR SOUND AND VIBRATION
A. Test and adjust mechanical systems for sound and vibration in accordance with the detailed instructions of the
referenced standards.
15990-6 No.99132-CP2
3.06 RECORD AND REPORT DATA
A. Record all data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance with, and on the forms
recommended by the referenced standards,and as approved on the sample report forms.
B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be
successfully balanced.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training:
1. Tram the Owner's maintenance personnel on troubleshooting procedures and testing,adjusting, and balancing
procedures. Review with the Owner's personnel,the information contained in the Operating and Maintenance
Data specified in Division 1 and Section 15010.
2. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect/Engineer with at least 7 days prior notice.
END OF SECTION 15990
15990-7 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 15995
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provision of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
specification sections,apply to this and all other sections of Division 15.
B. This Section is Supplemental to Section-1700(Project Closeout)of this Project Manual.
1.02 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. In addition to requirements of Section 01700 of this Project Manual,this Contractor(s)shall complete,sign and date
the following.
1. Preliminary check list of inspection,test and start-up certifications prior to request for final inspection.
Item Witnessed Date
*Domestic Water Piping
Piping System Flush&Clean
*Domestic Water Piping
System Sanitization
*Domestic Water Piping System
Pressure Test
*Steam and Condensate Piping
System Flush&Clean
*Steam and Condensate Piping
System Pressure Test
*Sanitary Waste and Vent System
Pressure Test and Inspection
Certification
*Storm Sewer Pressure Test
*Refrigeration Piping Systems
Pressure Test
*Ductwork Leak Pressure Test
*Test and Balance Report
*Air Handling Unit
Start-up
15995-1 No.99132-CP2
2. Preliminary check list of items of required completion.
Provide equipment submittals not received.
Provide record documents.
Provide maintenance manuals.
Patch and caulk all wall and floor penetrations at piping and ductwork sleeves. Seal between sleeve
and piping or ductwork as required by specifications.
Provide sleeves at all piping and ductwork wall and floor penetrations.
Clean up debris caused by mechanical work
Provide nameplates on all mechanical equipment listing manufacturer, model number, capacity,
static pressure,head,rpm and motor horsepower.
Provide all valves as shown on plans,detailed and where called for within the specifications.
Provide valve tags numbered in sequence along with chart indicating location,valve type, size and
flow rate if applicable.
Provide thermometers, pressure gages and flow measuring devices where shown on plans and
details.
Provide saddles and sleeves on all insulated piping as called for in the specifications.
Provide anchors and alignment guides as detailed and where shown on plans.
Adjust hangers to distribute weights evenly.
Provide touch-up paint to match original on all equipment scratched during installation.
Provide piping and ductwork identification,as directed in specification,on all piping and ductwork
systems
Provide vibration isolation on all equipment,piping and ductwork systems connected to rotating or
moving equipment as described in the specifications.
Align pump,fan and motor shafts to result in equipment operation with the least vibration possible.
Provide insulation on all hot surfaced or cold surfaced equipment as described in specifications.
Provide fire protection service as detailed on plans.
Provide sprinkler head cabinet with(6)six spare sprinkler heads,and sprinkler head wrench.
Provide water hammer arrestors on all solenoid valves and at flush valves.
All hose bibbs and wall hydrants shall be equipped with vacuum breakers. _
Provide state approved backflow preventers on all make-up water connections to non potable water
systems.
Provide water pressure reducing valves where shown and detailed on plans.
Provide pressure temperature relief valves on all pressure valves as detailed on plans,and indicated
in specifications.
Clean and flush piping systems and provide certification this has been performed
Disinfect domestic water system,flush and provide certification this has been performed.
Pressure test piping systems and provide certification this has been performed.
Clean all strainer screens after cleaning and flushing of systems is completed
Adjust all faucet handles to a line parallel with wall behind sink
Adjust all bubbler handles to 180°from bubbler spout and adjust flow rate.
Insulate roof drain bodies and all horizontal storm drainage piping.
Clean plumbing fixtures and remove all stickers,caulk between plumbing fixture and wall.
Check all plumbing fixtures for proper operation and leaks.
Provide escutcheons on all service piping,at wall,serving plumbing fixtures.
Replace any plumbing fixtures damaged.
All equipment shall be piped,ducted,valved and or installed as detailed on plans.
Provide panels for accessing control valves in all cabinet unit heaters, convector and radiation
covers.
All control wiring shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor and or his Subcontractor.
Coordinate with all subcontrators to insure all control wiring is provided.
Provide extended oilers and grease fitting for motors and bearing not readily accessible to
maintenance.
Provide extra set filters for all filter housings.
15995-2 No.99132-CP2
Provide complete extra set of belts for each central station air handling unit.
All duct joints shall be sealed.
Provide access panels for all fire,smoke,control dampers and heating coils.
Provide drip pan and insulation on exhaust fan plenums and gravity relief hoods as detailed on
plans. Alternate methods will not be acceptable.
Provide guards on all thermostats.
Provide caps on all riser/stop supplies to plumbing fixtures.
Straighten all bent fins on heating elements.
Clean ductwork of construction debris,dust and dirt
Furnish Owner training for all mechanical systems as described in specifications.
Provide Owner with thermostat keys and setting tools.
Provide test and balance reports.
Provide system diagrams adhered to face of each temperature control panel as described in
specification.
Calibrate all thermostats.
Clean all coil faces of construction dust and dirt.
Provide all grilles,registers and diffusers for all supply,return,exhaust and relief duct openings.
Provide all flow control fittings on plumbing fixtures as described in the specification and required
by local and state code.
Provide male hose thread connection on all strainer/trap test blow-off connections.
All gravity intake hoods shall be minimum of T-0"above.roof
Caulk and seal storm drain outfalls at exterior walls.
All valves shall be installed in accessible locations.
Provide condensate piping from all intake plenum cooling coil and heat exchanger drain pans to
nearest floor drain.
Signature Date
END OF SECTION 15995
15995-3 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections,apply to this and other sections of Division 16.
B. This Section is hereby made a part of all other Sections of Division 16 as fully as if repeated in each therein.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 15030: "Electrical Requirements For Mechanical Equipment"for factory-installed motors,controllers,
accessories,and connections.
2. Section 16050: "Basic Electrical Materials And Methods"for materials and methods common to the remainder
of Division 16,plus general related specifications including:
a. Access to electrical installations.
b. Excavation for electrical installations within the building boundaries.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for electrical installations. The following
administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in
Division 1:
1. Submittals.
2. Coordination drawings.
3. Record documents.
4. Operating,Maintenance and Warranty Data Manuals.
5. Rough-ins.
6. Electrical installations.
7. Cutting and patching.
B. Perform Electrical work which is finished work,tested and ready for operation:
1. Apparatus, appliances, material or work not indicated or any incidental accessories necessary to make the
work a complete and operational system, even though not specified nor shown on the drawings, are to be
provided.
2. _ Should,there.be any discrepancies or, a question of intent, refer the matter to.the Architect/Engineer for
decision before ordering equipment or materials and before starting any related work, or in a timely manner
during bidding for incorporation into addendum's.
3. Where work connects to that of another trade, or to wiring or equipment in place, take measurements in the
field to make connecting work come true and line up with the item being connected.
4. Where work specified under other Divisions of the Specifications connects to equipment which is a part of
Division 16,provide proper connection(s)to such equipment.
' 16010-1 No.99132-CP2
C. Definitions: The terms listed below are defined as follows when used in Division 16 and only Division 16.
1. "Work": Labor and materials of the Contractor and/or Subcontractor.
2. "Furnish": Obtain, coordinate, submit the necessary drawings, deliver to the job site in new condition and
guarantee.
3. "Install": Receive at the job site,unload,store,set in place,connect,place in operation and guarantee.
4. "Provide": Furnish and install.
5. "Connect": Bring service to the equipment and make final attachment including necessary disconnect
switches,control switches,outlets,etc.
6. "Conduit": Includes, in addition to conduit, all fittings, pull boxes, hangers, and other supports and
accessories related to such conduit.
7. "Concealed": Hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, above ceilings, embedded in construction,
walls,in crawl spaces or buried.
8. "Exposed": Not installed underground nor concealed as defined above.
9. 'Building Structure" or "Building Structural Members": Consists of steel columns, steel beams, steel joists
(top chord and at panel points), concrete walls and concrete block walls. Metal decking,joist bridging and
bottom chords of bar joists shall not be construed as building structure nor as a building structural member for
the purpose of support.
1.03 SUBMrffALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Section
for"Submittals"as follows:
1. Shop Drawings and Samples: Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1. Refer to
individual sections of Division 16 for supplementary requirements and additional copies that may be required.
a. Specifically mark drawings requiring special processing to meet production and delivery schedules.
b. Submit and review all Shop Drawings and other pertinent information before equipment is purchased or
before fabrication or erection of materials is started.
C. Submit drawings that have been reviewed by the Electrical,General and installing Contractors relative to
capacity, arrangement and physical dimensions and mark the drawings approved prior to submitting to
Architect/Engineer for his final review.
2. Product Data: Submit in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Section 01300
"Submittals"and Section 01700"Project Closeout".
3. Record Documents: Prepare Record Documents in accordance with Division 1 Section 01700, "Project
Closeout"and Section 01720"Project Record Documents".
4. Maintenance Manuals: Prepare Operating, Maintenance and Warranty Data Manuals in accordance with
Division 1,Section 01700,"Project Closeout".
16010-2 No.99132-CP2
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Workmanship:
I. Provide materials that are new and free from defects. Provide equipment that is factory finished, painted or
galvanized. Repair marred finish to match original finish.
2. Provide materials that are assembled and cocted in a neat and workmanlike manner by workers
experienced and skilled in the trade required iniach=a of work and comply with current codes, standards
and recommended practice.
3. Provide materials that bear the Underwriter's Laboratories label and that are used and installed for the purpose
approved whenever such U.L.standards,listings,or classifications exist.
4. Perform work such as painting, patching, welding or carpentry related to the work of this Division, by the
appropriate trade experienced in that work,but provided for under this Division.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. Materials and workmanship to comply with applicable codes. As a minimum, codes include all State and
Federal laws, local ordinances, Utility Company regulations and requirements and recommendations of the
following:
a. State and Local Building codes.
b. State Industrial Commission Regulations.
C. State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations.
d. National Electric Code.
e. State and Local Electrical Codes.
f. Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations.
2. If these specifications with accompanying drawings are in any way at variance with these codes,be governed
by the above cited codes and make this installation accordingly, except where the drawings or specifications
call for a higher quality of work than required by the Code.
3. Comply with the following Standards where referenced by the following abbreviations:
AIA: American Insurance Association
AIA: American Institute of Architects
ANSI: American National Standards Institution
ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials
EPA: Environmental Protection Agency
FM: Factory Mutual Insurance Association
IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IES: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
IPCEA: Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
NBS: National Bureau of Standards
NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA: National Fire Protection Association
NSC: National Safety Council
UL: Underwriter's Laboratories
NBFU: National Board of Fire Underwriters
ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association
OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970
ETL: Electrical Testing Laboratory
CBM: Certified Ballast Manufacturer
ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
16010-3 No.99132-CP2
1.05 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to the General Conditions and Division 1 for approval requirements.
B. Where approved substitutes are used, the Contractor assumes responsibility for physical dimensions and other
resulting changes. This responsibility extends to include extra work required by other trades as result of the
substitution.
C. Substituted equipment which requires additional costs by other trades in its application shall have such costs borne r
by the Contractor furnishing the equipment.
1.06 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Prepare coordination drawings detailing major elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment and
materials in relationship with other systems,installations,and building components. Indicate locations where space
is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the
efficient flow of the Work,including(but not necessarily limited to)the following:
1. Indicate the proposed locations of major raceway systems,equipment,and materials. Include the following:
a. Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic
maintenance.
b. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
C. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
d. Equipment connections and support details.
e. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during
construction.
3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their
relationship to other penetrations and installations.
B. Consult the drawings and specifications of Mechanical and other trades for correlating information and lay out work
so that it will coordinate with other trades. Verify dimensions and conditions (i.e. - ductwork routing and
elevations,finished ceiling heights,footing and foundation elevations,beam depths,etc.)with the Architectural and
Structural drawings. If conflicts occur such that resolution is not possible by the affected trades on the job, the
Architect/Engineer shall be notified so that the proper changes can be made to avoid extra cost to the Owner.
C. Where work must be replaced due to the failure of the Contractor to verify the conditions existing on the job,such
replacement must be accomplished at no cost to the Owner. This shall apply to shop fabrication work as well as to
work fabricated in place.
D. Throughout the course of the work, minor changes and, adjustments to the installation may be requested by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall make adjustments without additional cost to the Owner,where such adjustments are
necessary to the proper installation and operation within the intent of the Contract Documents. This does not
include work already completed.
E. Equipment outlines shown on detail plans of = 1'-0" scale or larger and/or dimensions indicated on the plans are
limiting dimensions. Do not install any equipment that exceeds the equipment outlines shown or reduces indicated
clearances.
16010-4 No.99132-CP2
1.07 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section 01720, "Project Record
Documents." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1,indicate installed conditions for:
1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control devices;
distribution and branch electrical circuitry;and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements.
2. Approved substitutions,Contract Modifications,and actual equipment and materials installed.
1.08 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare operating, maintenance and warranty data manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section 01730,
"Operating,Maintenance And Warranty Data." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1,include the
following information for equipment items:
1. Description of function,normal operating characteristics and limitations,performance curves,engineering data
and tests,and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating
instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter
operating instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and
reassembly;aligning and adjusting instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules and software.
B. Instruct the Owner's designated operating personnel fully and completely in the operation of each electrical system
at the time it is put into service. Obtain a statement from the Owner to the effect that the Owner's designated
personnel have been instructed and provided with the specified training.
C. Submit to the Engineer, two (2) Operating, Maintenance, and Warranty Data Manuals. Submit these manuals in
portfolio form neatly edited with similar equipment grouped, tabbed and indexed. Provide printed or typewritten
materials. Include the following with each manual:
1. Shop drawings, approved manufacturer's bulletins, and other appropriate data from specific manufacturer and
other sources relating to the approved care,maintenance,and operating instructions required of each piece of
equipment furnished and/or installed. Shop drawings, manufacturer's bulletin, and other data shall be
appropriately marked to reflect the"as-built"condition.
2. List of electrical equipment together with the equipment manufacturer, local representative and local
distributor and installing contractor. Arrange the list in neat columnar form with current telephone numbers
and address provided forlistedrepresentative and distributors.
3. Test reports.
1.09 PERMITS,LICENSES AND FEES
A. Permits and licenses: Provide both temporary and permanent permits and licenses required in connection with the
installation and that are secured by the Contractor responsible for that phase of the work. Fees and expenses
required for such permits and licenses shall be paid for by the Contractor.
B. Make all arrangements with each Utility Company and pay all service charges associated with new services or
modifications to existing services.
16010-5 No.99132-CP2
C. Provide inspections as requested by each Contractor as required by regulating agencies and/or regulations. Include
and pay all charges for inspections by regulating agencies of installations of plans and specifications.
D. Provide the Owner with a certificate of final inspection and approval by enforcement authorities.
1.10 INSPECTION OF SITE
A. Before submitting a proposal on the work contemplated, bidder shall examine the site of the proposed work and
thoroughly familiarize himself with existing conditions and limitations affecting the performance of his work. No
extra compensation will be allowed because of misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved nor bidders
lack of knowledge of existing conditions which he could have discovered or reasonably anticipated prior to bidding.
1.11 COST BREAKDOWN
A. Submit a cost breakdown according to General Conditions of the Contract. Include project name, location,
Architect/Engineer,Contractor and daze.
1. List the cost breakdown for labor and material separately and include a total.
2. Breakout and detail the cost according to specification sections.
1.12 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE
A. Scope: Provide and maintain a complete temporary electric power service for the use by the Contractors and
subcontractors during the construction period. Coordinate all requirements with the Owner and size as required
Comply with NEC,OSHA,NFPA,UL and all state and local codes and regulations.
1. Remodeled Areas: Existing lighting and power may be used for temporary services. Do not exceed the energy
demand of the existing service capacity,and repair or replace, at no cost to the Owner, any damage resulting
from misuse,overloading or faulty equipment.
B. Provide and maintain a temporary lighting system within the building for use by all trades during the construction
period.
1. Performance: Provide adequate lighting suitable for conditions for high quality workmanship and for safety
lighting throughout the area of construction. Provide minimum requirements of one (1) 200 watt lighting
outlet per 400 SF or at least one per room.
2. Temporary Exit and Safety Lighting: Provide and maintain an exit, egress and safety lighting system where
required by code and OSHA.
C. Provide and maintain a temporary power distribution system within the building for use by all trades during the
construction period.
1. Locate duplex receptacles throughout and on each floor so that any point within the building or construction
area can be reached by a 100 ft. extension cord. Provide all duplex outlets Ground Fault Interrupter Circuit
(GFCI)protected.
2. Services or energy costs for welders, grinders, electric heaters, pipe threaders, and similar heavy loads which
require power greater than the services specified shall be the responsibility of each Contractor or subcontractor
requiring such service.
D. Provide and maintain a temporary telephone system for connections of construction trailers where necessary. Do
not connect temporary telephone system to the existing site communications systems.
16010-6 No.99132-CP2
E. Provide and maintain a temporary power system for connections of construction trailers where necessary.
1.13 CORRECTIVE PERIOD
' A. Provide a guarantee and maintain the stability of work and materials and keep same in perfect repair and condition
for the period of one(1)year after the final completion of the work as evidenced by issuance of the final certificate
by the Architect.
B. Correct defects of any kind immediately and at Contractor's expense, due to faulty work or materials appearing
during the above mentioned period and made to the entire satisfaction of the Owner and Architect/Engineer. Such
reconstruction and repairs shall include damage to the finish or the building resulting from the original defect or
repairs thereto.
C. This guarantee shall not apply to injuries occurring after final acceptance and due to wind,fire, violence, abuse or
carelessness or other Contractors or their employees or the agents of the Owner.
D. This guarantee shall not apply where other guarantees for different lengths of time are specifically called for.
1.14 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels,
and other information needed for identification.
PART 2: PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 ROUGH-IN
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be
connected.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements.
3.02 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials, and equipment.
Comply with the following requirements:
1. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. The
electrical drawings and the electrical specifications are both complimentary to each other. If discrepancies
exist.between the,electrical drawings-and the electrical specificationsi bid the greater, cost and/or greater
quantity between them. If discrepancies exist between the electrical contract documents and the architectural
contract documents, the architectural contract documents take precedence. Notify the Engineer/Architect of
discrepancies in writing during the bid period. If discrepancies are not reported or if not resolved during the
bid period, bid the greater cost and/or greater quantity of such discrepancies. Discrepancies will be resolved
after award of contract.
2. Contract documents are diagrammatic;do not scale for rough-in requirements. Verify all dimensions by field
measurements. Coordinate with the Architect/Engineer for final locations of devices close to comers,
windows,etc.where questionable before final rough-in.
I
16010-7 No.99132-CP2
3. Do not construe contract documents as shop drawings or a bill of materials. Contract documents show intent
of design and equipment lists and schedules are included for convenience to the Contractor. Provide any items
shown on the plan but not shown on a list or schedule or the reverse;this shall not relieve the contractor from
furnishing the complete installation.
4. Arrange for chases,slots,and openings in other building components during progress of construction,to allow
for electrical installations.
5. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete
and other structural components,as they are constructed.
6. Sequence,coordinate,and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the
Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
7. Install systems,materials, and equipment where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned to provide
the maximum headroom possible.
8. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services.
Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.
Provide required connection for each service.
9. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination
drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents,
recognizing that outlet devices, switches, panels, cabinets, fixtures and special equipment are shown on the
drawings only in a schematic manner and not necessarily in their specific location. The contractor shall be
responsible for exact locations of the outlets and equipment to form a fimctional and aesthetic installation
either by careful review of all architectural reflected ceiling plans, elevations, tile patterns, surface finishes,
and equipment arrangement or by consultations with the Architect/Engineer and other trades involved. Where
coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the
Architect/Engineer.
10. Install systems,materials,and equipment level and plumb,parallel and perpendicular to other building systems
and components,where installed exposed in finished spaces.
11. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment
components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of
interference with other installations.
12. Install systems,materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a
specified slope.
3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General: Perform,cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1 Section 01045, "Cutting And Patching." In
addition to the requirements specified in Division 1,the following requirements apply:
1. Perform cutting,fitting,and patching for electrical equipment and materials required to: a
a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.
b. Remove and replace defective Work.
c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents.
d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.
e. Install specified equipment and materials in existing construction.
f. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to provide for Architect
observation of concealed Work.
g. Install specified work in new construction already completed.
16010-8 No.99132-CP2
' C. Conceal Conduit and EMT,unless indicated otherwise,within finished walls,ceilings,and floors. Keep raceways at
least 6 inches(150-mm)away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install horizontal raceway
runs level and square and at proper elevations.
D. Elevation of Raceway: Where possible,install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
E. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of conductors within raceways.
F. Provide supports for raceways as specified elsewhere in Division 16.
' G. Prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure protection. Test conduits with ball
mandrel. Clear any conduit which rejects the ball and mandrel.
H. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends are not
' visible above the finished slab.
I. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless otherwise indicated,keep the legs
' of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel.
J. Provide raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for the use and
location. For intermediate steel conduit,use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings except as otherwise indicated.
' K. Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building
construction and obstructions except as otherwise indicated. This does not apply to conduits in crawl spaces.
' L. Raceways embedded in slabs: Install in middle third of the slab thickness where practical and leave at least 1 inch
(25 mm)concrete cover. Tie raceways to reinforcing rods or otherwise secure them to prevent sagging or shifting
during concrete placement. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in the concrete. Run conduit larger than 1-
' inch (25 mm) trade size, parallel with or at right angles to the main reinforcement; where at right angles to the
reinforcement, the conduit shall be close to one of the supports of the slab. Where nonmetallic conduit is used,
raceways must be converted to rigid steel conduit or IMC before rising above floor.
M. Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow the
surface contours as much as practical.
' 1. Run exposed,parallel,or banked raceways together on common supports where practical.
2. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows
' may be used in banked runs only where they can be installed parallel. This requires that there be a change in
the plane of the run such as from wall to ceiling and that the raceways be of the same size. In other cases
provide field bends for parallel raceways.
N. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight
1. Make raceway terminations tight Where joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide
' electrical continuity of the raceway system.
2. Where terminations are subject to vibration, use bonding bushings to assure electrical continuity. Where
subject to vibration or dampness,use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
O. Tighten set-screws of threadless fittings with suitable tool.
' P. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings,align the raceway to enter squarely and
install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut,
use two lockouts,one inside and one outside the box.
' 16110-5 No.99132-CP-2
Q. Where terminating in threaded hubs,screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire '
protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and
tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.
R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use no. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not ,
less than 200-1b (90 kg)tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of the pull
wire.
S. Telephone and Signal System Raceways 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to the above requirements, '
install in maximum lengths at 150 feet(45 m)and with a maximum of two 90-deg bends or equivalent. Install pull
or junction boxes as necessary to comply with these requirements. '
T. Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at
suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways,
install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or ,
surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated:
1. Where conduits enter or leave hazardous locations.
2. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations,such as the boundaries of refrigerated spaces and
air-conditioned spaces.
3. Where required by the NEC.
U. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an
adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to
equipment with rigid steel conduit;flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches(150 mm)above the floor. Where '
equipment connections are not made under this contract, install screwdriver-operated threaded plugs flush with
floor.
V. Flexible Connections: Install a short length(maximum of 6 ft. or 1,830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and '
semi-recessed lighting fixtures, for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement, and for all
motors. Install liquid-tight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor across
flexible connections. Minimum trade size: %Z"for motors;%Z"for light fixture drops. '
W. Provide all conduits with expansion fittings where the conduits cross building joints. Provide expansion fittings for
conduit with continuous horizontal runs over 100 feet and that is without a minimum of two 90°bends. ,
X. Surface Metal Raceway: Provide a separate green ground conductor in raceway from the junction box supplying
the raceway to receptacle or fixture ground terminals:
1. Select each surface metal raceway outlet box to which a lighting fixture is attached to be of sufficient diameter '
to provide a seat for the fixture canopy.
2. Where a surface metal raceway is used to supply a fluorescent lighting fixture having central stem suspension
with a.backplate and a canopy, with or without extension ring, the backplate and canopy will serve as the
outlet box and no separate outlet box need be provided.
3. Provide surface metal raceway outlet box, in addition to the backplate and canopy, at the feed-in location of
each fluorescent lighting fixture having end stem suspension.
4. Where a surface metal raceway extension is made from an existing outlet box on which a lighting fixture is '
installed,provide a backplate slightly smaller than the fixture canopy,and an additional surface mounted outlet
box need not be installed.
16110-6 No.99132-CP-2 '
' Y. Provide telephone,signal system and communication raceway with bushings at each non-connected end.
Z. Do not support raceways from mechanical ductwork or equipment, except where required to connect to the
equipment.
3.03 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
t A. Specially protect all metallic conduit buried in earth against corrosion and deterioration by one of the following
methods:
' 1. Coat entire conduit and fitting with two (2) coats of Bitumastic #50 in field. Use threaded type for all
couplings. Make the junction points of all couplings watertight after couplings have been assembled. Where
bitumastic paint is applied,the paint must be thoroughly dry prior to backfilling.
' 2. Wrap conduit with vinyl tape,3M scotchwrap#43 or an approved equal.
3. Use Occidental Coating Co. OCAL-40 mil PVC coated conduit and fittings. Paint all nicks in plastic coated
conduit with plastic material as recommended by manufacturer.
B. For buried conduit outside the building perimeter,provide drain tees in each conduit run and pitch conduit to drain
tee. Provide gravel drain pocket below drain tee. Install drain tees a maximum of 100 feet apart on long runs.
' 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; clear all blockages and remove burrs,
dirt,and construction debris.
' END OF SECTION 16110
16110-7 No.99132-CP-2
SECTION 16120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1: GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division
' 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Section apply to this Section:
1. Section 16010: "Basic Electrical Requirements".
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 07240: "Firestopping".
2. Section 16135: "Cabinets, Boxes and Fittings" for connectors for Terminating Cables in boxes and other
electrical enclosures.
' 3. Section 16190: "Supporting Devices" for supports and anchors for fastening cable directly to building
finishes.
4. Section 16195: "Electrical Identification"for insulation color coding and wire and cable markers.
' 5. Section 16741: "Remodeled Telephone Distribution Systems".
6. Section 16743: "Remodeled Data Wiring Distribution Systems".
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building wires, cables and associated splices, and connectors and terminations for power,
lighting,control and related wiring systems rated 600 volts and less.
' 1.03 SUBMITTALS
' A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections:
1. Product Data: Submit for electrical wires,cables and connectors.
2. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide conductors and cables specified in this Section that are"Listed"and"Labeled":
1: The terms-"Listed"and"Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70;Article 100.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. NFPA 70: "National Electrical Code":
' a. Conform to applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of insulating
materials.
' b. UL Compliance: Provide components which are listed and labeled by UL under the following
standards.
1. UL Std. 83: Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.
' 16120-1 No.99132-CP-2
2. UL Std.486A: Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors. '
C. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standards:
1. WC-5: Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical '
Energy.
d. IEEE Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standard: '
1. Std 82: Test procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors.
1.05 COORDINATION '
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.
B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and as approved by the
Architect/Engineer.
PART 2: PRODUCTS ,
2.01 MANUFACTURERS '
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following:
1. Wire and Cable: '
a. American Insulated Wire Corp.(Leviton Manufacturing Co.)
b. Anaconda. ,
c. Carol Cable Co.Inc.
d. Coleman/Communications Cable,Inc.
e. Cyprus. '
f Pirelli.
g. Rome Cable Co.
h. Southwire Company. '
i. Triangle.
2. Connectors for Wires and Cable Conductors:
a. AMP,Inc. ,
b. Buchanan.
c. Burndy.
d. General Signal;O-Z/Gedney Co.
e. Ideal.
f. Square D Company.
g. Thomas and Betts Corp. '
h. 3M Company;Electric Products Division.
2.02 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES ,
A. General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature,conditions and location where indicated.
B. Conductors: Provide solid phase conductors for power and lighting circuits No. 10 AWG and smaller. Provide '
stranded conductors for sizes No.8 AWG and larger and all neutral conductors.
C. Conductor Material: Soft drawn copper for all wires and cables(aluminum is not allowed). ,
16120-2 No.99132-CP-2 '
' D. Minimum wire size: No. 12 AWG for power connections; control wiring No. 14 AWG minimum Analog/digital
signals and instrumentation wiring: No. 16 AWG minimum; current transformer secondary: No. 10 AWG
minirrnim
' E. Insulation: Provide THHN/THWN insulation for all conductors size 500KCMIL and larger, and No. 8 AWG and
smaller. For all other sizes, provide THHN/THHW or XHHW insulation as appropriate for the locations where
installed. Provide all insulation rated 600 volt and 90°C.
F. Color Coding for phase identification to be in accordance with Table 1,Part 3 below.
' G. Jackets: Factory-applied nylon or PVC external jacketed wires and cables for pulls in raceways over 100-feet in
length,for pulls in raceways with more than three equivalent 90 degree bends,for pulls in conduits underground or
under slabs on grade,and where indicated.
' H. Cables: Provide the following type(s) of cables in NEC approved locations and applications where indicated.
Provide cable UL listed for particular application:
' 1. Portable Cord: Type S.
2. Armored cable and metal-clad cable will not be allowed.
3. Plenum and fire rated fire alarm wires/cables when not installed in conduit.
2.03 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Provide UL-listed factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and
classes for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater than
those of the wires upon which used. Use connectors suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
' A. Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of conductors and cables. Do not proceed with the installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
3.02 WIRING METHOD
A. Use the following wiring methods as indicated:
' 1. Wire: Install all wire in raceway unless specifically noted otherwise in other sections of this specification or
on.the drawings.,
2. Portable Cord Type S: For flexible pendant leads to outlets and equipment where permitted by Code and as
indicated.
' 3. Service Entrance: Type THWN in raceway.
4. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN in raceway.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install electrical wire,cables,and connectors according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA's
"Standard of Installation"and in compliance with NEC sized as indicated on the plans.
' 16120-3 No.99132-CP-2
B. Coordinate cable installation with other Work '
C. Pull Conductors: Pull simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use UL listed and
manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary, of a type that does not deteriorate
conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall ,
pressure values.
D. Use pulling means including,fish tape,cable,rope,and basket-weave wire/cable grips,that will not damage cables '
or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable.
E. Increase wire sizes on 120 volt 20 amp branch circuits over 100 feet to No. 10 AWG. '
F. Install recessed fixture leads and continuous row fluorescent fixture wiring with type THHN 90°C wire or as
required by code.
G. Install all wiring in boiler rooms or other high ambient temperature areas with 90°C wire.
H. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. ,
I. Install splice and tap connectors which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation rating than
conductors being spliced.
J. Provide splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material. '
K. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to terminal points with
no excess. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal.
L. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface
contours where possible. '
M. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten
electrical connectors and terminals,including screws and bolts,in accordance with manufacturer's published torque '
tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated,tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A.
N. Support cables according to Section 16050`Basic Electrical Materials and Methods". '
O. Identify wires and cables according to Section 16050"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
P. Seal ground cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section 07240"Firestopping".
3.03 CONNECTIONS '
A. Conductor Splices: Keep to minimum.
B. Install splices and tapes that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors
being spliced.
C. Use splice and tap connectors compatible with conductor material.
D. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet,with at least 12 inches(300 mm)of slack.
E. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. '
1
16120-4 No.99132-CP-2 ,
1 F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
G. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap connector for aluminum conductors.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prior to energizing,check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to
assure requirements are fulfilled.
B. Prior to energizing,test wires and cables for electrical continuity,short-circuits and grounds.
C. Testing: On installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,demonstrate product
capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Section
7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.
D. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate proper functioning. Correct
malfimctioning conductors and cables at project site, where possible, and re-test to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise,remove and replace with new units and retest.
E. TABLE 1: Color Coding for Phase Identification:
1 1. Color code secondary service,feeder,and branch circuit conductors as follows:
208Y/120 Volts Phase
Black A
Red B
Blue C
White Neutral
Green Ground
2. Identify at all terminations and in all pull boxes.
END OF SECTION 16120
1
1
1
16120-5 No.99132-CP-2
' SECTION 16123
OPTICAL FIBER CABLING SYSTEMS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
1. Section 16010: 'Basic Electrical Requirements".
2. Section 16050: 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 16743: "Remodeled Data Wiring Distribution Systems".
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section includes product and installation requirements for the following:
1. Fiber-optic(FO)cables.
2. Fiber-optic connectors and couplers.
3. Innerduct.
4. Fiber(Optic)Distribution Center(FDC).
5. Fiber-optic transmitters and receivers.
6. Fiber-optic sources and detectors.
7. Fiber-optic repeaters.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications
Sections:
1. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
2. Product Certificates: Signed by the communication system manufacturers, certifying that the cables are
suitable for the connected equipment as described in Quality Assurance below.
1.04.QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Connected Equipment Manufacturer Certification: Where cables specified in this Section are used to provide signal
paths for systems specified in other sections of these Specifications, or for systems furnished under other contracts,
obtain review of the cable characteristics and certification for use with the connected system equipment by the
connected equipment manufacturers.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. Electrical Component Standard: Provide work complying with applicable requirements of NFPA 70,
"National Electrical Code",including Article 770.
16123-1 No.99132-CP-2
2. UL Compliance: For cables that may be run in plenum ceilings or other air-handling spaces, provide cables
tested for compliance with applicable requirements of UL Standard 910, "Test Method for Fire and Smoke
Characteristics of Electrical and Optical-fiber Cables Used in Air-handling Spaces". In addition,provide FO
cables that have passed the UL VW-1 flame test.
3. EIA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of EIA Standards EIA-440, -455, 458, -475, -509,
and-568SC pertaining to optical-fiber cable and system component construction and installation.
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in factory containers or cable reels. Store in clean dry space in original containers. Protect
products from fumes and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage.
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate with installation of wires/cables,electrical boxes and fittings,and raceways.
B. Sequence installation of optical-fiber cabling systems with other work to minimize possibility of damage during
construction.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide optical-fiber cabling products of one of the
following(for each type of FO product):
1. FO Cables:
a. West Penn.
b. Alpha Communication.
c. AMP,Inc.
d. Lucent Technologies Network Systems.
e. Belden Div.,Cooper Industries.
f. Comscope Corp.
g. Chromatic Technologies,Inc.
h. Fibertron.
i. Guardian Products Div.;General Cable Corp.
j. Optical Cable Corp.
k. Southwire Company.
2. FO Connectors and Couplers:
a. AMP,Inc.
b. Lucent Technologies Network Systems.
c. FONS Corp.
d. Hubbell Premises Wiring,Inc.
e. Thomas and Betts Corp.
f. 3M.
3. Innerduct:
a. Provide plenum rated innerduct for all fiber optic cable runs.
1) Secor.
16123-2 No.99132-CP-2
4. Fiber Distribution Center(FDC)and Wall Interconnect Center(W.I.C.):
a. Lucent Technologies Network Systems.
b. Secor.
5. FO Transmitters and Receivers:
a. AMP Netcon.
b. Lucent Technologies Network Systems.
c. Honeywell,Inc.
d. Fiber Optic Group;Belden Corp.
e. General Electric Co.
£ ITT Corp.
_ g. Motorola,Inc.
h. Thomas and Betts Corporation.
i. 3M.
j. Vicon Industries,Inc.
6. FO Sources and Detectors:
a. Lucent Technologies Network Systems.
b. Honeywell,Inc.
c. Motorola,Inc.
d. General Electric Corp.
7. FO Repeaters:
a. Lucent Technologies Network Systems.
b. Honeywell,Inc.
c. Optical Cable Corp.
d. Times Fiber Communications,Inc.
2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide an optical fiber cabling system and components as described or indicated.
2.03 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Fabricate Optical-Fiber Cabling Systems using manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by
published product information,and in sizes,types,and performance characteristics as indicated.
B. FO Cables: Factory-fabricated,single channel,low-loss,glass type,fiber-optic multimode graded-index cables with
the following operational and construction features:
a. Number of fibers: 8.
b. Core diameter: 62.5 microns.
C. Cladding diameter: 125 microns.
d. Jacketing,outside diameter: 250 microns.
e. Maximum attenuation: 4.OdB/850 nm.
£ Minimum bandwidth: 500 MHz-km.
g. Numerical aperture: 0.2(nominal).
h. Cable weight: 7.5 kg/km.
i. Maximum installation load: 500 N(112.4 lb).
J. Maximum operational load: 150 N(33.7 lb).
k. Minimum bend radius(unloaded): 3 cm(1.18 in).
1. Operating temperature range: -20 to+70 deg C.
16123-3 No.99132-CP-2
C. FO Connectors: Stainless steel,fiber-optic cable connectors,capable of terminating FO glass cables,with diameters
ranging from 125 through 1000 microns. Fabricate connectors with optical-fiber,self-centering,axial
alignment mechanisms. Select resilient tip SC type connectors with quick-connect features and with insertion loss
of not greater than 1.0 dB.
D. FO Couplers: As recommended by cable manufacturer,of the following types:
1. T-coupler.
2. Star-coupler.
3. Splitter/combiner.
E. FO Video Transmitters and Receivers: Compatible with each other and possessing the following system operational
and construction features:
1. System band width; 10 Hz to 5 MHz
2. Transmitter input impedance: 75 ohms.
3. Input voltage: Ito 3.
4. Dynamic range: 50 dB.
5. Linearity: less than 1 percent.
6. Output load impedance: 75 ohms.
7. Optical attenuation: -30 dB.
8. Operating wavelength: 820 nm.
9. Optical connectors: SMA type.
10. Power requirements: 14 to 18 VAC,60 Hz
11. Operating temperature: 0 to 50 deg C.
F. FO Sources: Light-emitting diode (LED) semiconductors compatible with transmitter and system circuitry and
characteristics. Select LEDs compatible for use with transmitter driver circuits.
G. FO Detectors: Capable of detecting light and converting that electromagnetic energy into electrical signals.
Fabricate with PIN silicon photodiodes with a high output impedance current source providing currents of not less
than 1 microampere. Select PIN photodiodes compatible for use with receiver output circuitry.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions with the Installer present for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting the performance of optical-fiber cabling system. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Install optical-fiber cabling for project applications as follows:
1. For data communication systems:
a. Video display screens.
b. Data processing peripherals.
c. Local area networks(LANs).
d. Electronic cash registers.
16123-4 No.99132-CP-2
2. For communications systems:
a. Television systems.
b. MATV systems.
c. Background music systems.
d. Intercom networks.
e. Telephone systems.
3. For building management systems:
a. Lighting control and monitoring systems.
b. Central HVAC control and monitoring systems.
c. Energy management systems.
d. Elevator control and monitoring systems.
�i 3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fiber-optic cables and associated equipment and devices in accordance with industry standards and
manufacturer's written instructions. Install in innerduct in building interiors and in conduit when exterior.
B. Install fiber-optic cable without damage to fibers,cladding,or jacket. Ensure that media manufacturer's
recommended pulling tensions are not exceeded. Do not at any time bend cables to smaller radii than minimums
recommended by manufacturer.
C. Install FO cables simultaneously where more than one cable is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling
lubricant where necessary;compound used must not deteriorate cable materials. Do not use soap. Use a pulling
means,including fish tape,rope,and basket-weave grips,that will not damage media or raceway. Install in rigid
steel conduit where run exposed below 11'-0"A.F.F.
D. No splices are allowed,except at indicated splice points.
E. Install outdoor(loose tube)or exterior type cable continuous and into interior of building(when routed from
exterior to interior)all the way to the first coupling but not greater distance into building than allowed by code.
3.04 GROUNDING
A. Provide grounding connections for system components as required by manufacturer's written instructions.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prior to usage,test all equipment and components in accordance with manufacturer's published test procedures. In
addition,test the cable installation with an optical time domain reflectometer(OTDR)with strip chart recording
capability and anomaly resolution to within one foot in runs up to 1,000 feet in length. Test all cable segments for
faulty connectors,splices,and terminations and for the integrity of the cable and its component parts. Replace
malfunctioning or damaged items with new materials,then retest until satisfactory performance is achieved.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
A. Subsequent to hook ups of FO system to signal sources and destination equipment,operate systems to demonstrate
proper functioning. Replace malfunctioning FO cabling system items with new materials,and then retest until
satisfactory performance is achieved.
16123-5 No.99132-CP-2
B. Documentation: Use the above time domain reflectometer to make strip chart recordings of transmission
characteristics,wave form,and performance of all segments of the installation at the time of commissioning. Also,
use an optical loss test set(OLTS)to measure the optical transmission loss on each optical fiber path in the system.
Record loss data in a form with provision for at least 50 additional loss data entries during future maintenance
operations. Bind the OTDR recordings and the record of OLTS results in a cable record book indexed for easy
reference and with provision for additional data entry during future maintenance operations. Turn book over to the
Owner's authorized representative upon completion of commissioning.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Clean components of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation.
END OF SECTION 16123
16123-6 No.99132-CP-2
SECTION 16135
CABINETS,BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
1. Section 16010: 'Basic Electrical Requirements".
2. Section 16050: "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section includes cabinets,boxes and fittings for electrical installations and certain types of electrical fittings not
covered in other sections. Types of products specified in this Section include:
1. Outlet and device boxes.
2. Pull and junction boxes.
3. Floor boxes and service fittings.
4. Cabinets.
5. Hinged cover enclosures.
6. Boxes and fittings for hazardous locations.
B. Conduit-body-type electrical enclosures and wiring fittings are specified in Section 16110: "Raceways".
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. "Cabinets": Enclosures designed either for surface or flush mounting and having a frame, or trim,in which a door
or doors may be hung.
B. Device Box": An outlet box designed to house a receptacle device or a wiring box designed to house a switch.
C. "Enclosure": A box,case,cabinet,or housing for electrical wiring or components.
D. "Hinged Door Enclosure": An enclosure designed for surface mounting and having swinging doors or covers
secured directly to and telescoping with the walls of the box.
E. "Outlet Box": A wiring enclosure where current is taken from a wiring system to supply utilization equipment.
F. "Wiring Box": An enclosure designed to provide access to wiring systems or for the mounting of indicating devices
or of switches for controlling electrical circuits.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections:
1. Product Data: Submit for cabinets,enclosures,and floor boxes.
16135-1 No.99132-CP-2
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
I. UL"Listing"and"Labeling": Provide items and components provided under this section that are as defined in
NFPA 70,Article 100."Listed"and"Labeled"by UL.
2. National Electrical Code Compliance: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70, "National
Electrical Code."
3. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standard 250, 'Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts
Maximum)."
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following:
1. Metal Outlet Boxes and Small Wiring Boxes:
a. Appleton.
b. General Signal/O-Z/Gedney.
c. Raco,Inc.
d. Steel City.
2. Floor Boxes:
a. Provide a fully recessed four(4)compartment, combination floor box assembly-Walker#RFB4-SS, or
approved equal, complete with two (2) receptacles and two (2) #RFB-37-SSRJ (#RFB-GFI-SS GFI
receptacle)device brackets, #RAKM 11 flush access hatch with carpet trim plate and wire management
blocks in carpeted areas and #RAKM TR-Buff flush carpet plates and trim ring in all other areas
wherever floor boxes are indicated on drawings unless noted otherwise. Use cast type floor boxes in
poured concrete on grade only. Walker type#RFB4-CI in lieu of Walker#RFB4-SS.
b. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell.
2. Raco,Inc.
3. Steel City.
3. Cabinets:
a. Challenger.
b. Cutler-Hammer&Westinghouse;Eaton Corp.
c. General Electric.
d. Hoffman Engineering Co.
e. ITE Semens.
f. Square D Co.
2.02 CABINETS,BOXES,AND FITTINGS,GENERAL
A. Electrical Cabinets,Boxes,and Fittings: Provide types, sizes, and NEMA enclosure classes indicated. Where not
indicated,provide units of types,sizes,and classes appropriate for the use and location. Provide all items complete
with covers and accessories required for the intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations.
16135-2 No.99132-CP-2
2.03 MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Sheet Steel: Flat-rolled,code-gage,galvanized steel.
B. Fasteners for General Use: Corrosion resistant screws and hardware including cadmium and zinc plated items.
C. Fasteners for Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware.
D. Cast Metal for Boxes,Enclosures,and Covers: Copper-free aluminum except as otherwise specified.
E. Exterior Finish: Gray baked enamel for items exposed in finished locations except as otherwise indicated.
F. Painted Interior Finish: Where indicated,white baked enamel.
G. Fittings for Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures: Conform to UL 14B. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel for conduit
hubs,bushings and box connectors.
2.04 METAL OUTLET,DEVICE,AND SMALL WIRING BOXES
A. General: Conform to UL 514A, "Metallic Outlet Boxes,Electrical,"and UL 51413, "Fittings for Conduit and Outlet
Boxes." Provide boxes of type, shape, size, and depth to suit each location and application and as noted herein.
Provide outlet boxes 4" square minimum with single-gang mud ring unless noted otherwise, such as in masonry
walls.
B. Steel Boxes: Conform to NEMA OS 1, "Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports."
Provide steel boxes with stamped knockouts, threaded screw holes and accessories suitable for each location
including mounting brackets and straps,cable clamps,exterior rings and fixture studs.
C. Cast-Aluminum Boxes: Copper free aluminum threaded raceway entries, and features and accessories suitable for
each location including mounting ears,threaded screw holes for devices and closure plugs.
' D. Cast-Iron Boxes: Iron alloy, waterproof, with threaded raceway entries and features and accessories suitable for
each location,including mounting ears,threaded screw holes for devices and closure plugs.
E. Steel Flush Floor Boxes: Sheet steel, concrete tight, fully adjustable,with stamped knockouts, adjusting rings, and
aluminum floor plates. Where indicated, provide multi-section boxes with concealed individual section covers
under a common flush floor plate. Provide for a duplex receptacle in one of the concealed section covers and a
communication jack in the others. Provide carpet flange where the floor covering is carpet.
F. Service Fittings for Floor Outlet Boxes: Surface mounted horizontal, cast aluminum type 3-inches high, suitable for
finished spaces and finished in satin aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. Provide duplex receptacle or 1-inch
' bushed opening for telephone or other communications service as indicated. Equip fitting for attaching flat to floor
box cover.
2.05 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. General; Comply with UL 50, Electrical Cabinets and Boxes", for boxes over 100 cubic inches volume. Provide
boxes with screwed or bolted on covers of material same as box and of size and shape to suit application.
B. Hot-Dipped Galvanized Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly,
construct with internal structural steel bracing;hot-dip galvanize after fabrication. Provide gasketed cover.
C. Cast-Aluminum Boxes: Molded of copper free aluminum, with gasketed cover and integral threaded conduit
entrances. Provide boxes for direct burial in earth or sidewalk gasketed water tight.
S
16135-3 No.99132-CP-2
2.06 CABINETS
A. General: Comply with UL 50,"Electrical Cabinets and Boxes."
B. Construction: Provide sheet steel,NEMA 1 class except as otherwise indicated. Provide cabinet with a box and a
front consisting of a one piece frame and a hinged door. Arrange door to close against a rabbet placed all around
the inside edge of the frame,with a uniformly close fit between door and frame. Provide concealed fasteners, not
over 24-inches apart,to hold fronts to cabinet boxes and provide for adjustment. Provide flush or concealed door
hinges not over 24-inches apart and not over 6-inches from top and bottom of door. For flush cabinets, make the
front approximately 3/4 inch larger than the box all around. For surface mounted cabinets,make front same height
and width as box. Equip doors over 30"high with 3-point catches.
C. Doors: Provide double doors for cabinets wider than 24-inches. Telephone cabinets wider than 48-inches may
have sliding or removable doors.
D. Locks: Provide combination spring catch and key lock,with all locks for cabinets of the same system keyed alike.
Provide locks of a type to permit doors to latch closed without locking.
2.07 STEEL ENCLOSURES WITH DOOR COVERS
A. General: Comply with UL 50, "Cabinets and Enclosures" and NEMA ICS 6, 'Enclosures for Industrial Controls
and Systems."
B. Construction: Provide sheet steel, 16 gage,minimum,with continuous welded seams and NEMA class as indicated;
arranged for surface mounting.
C. Door Covers: Provide hinged directly to cabinet and removable, with approximately 3/4-inch flange around all
edges, shaped to cover edge of box. Provide handle operated, key locking latch. Make individual door width no
greater than 24-inches. Provide multiple doors where required. Provide door covers over 30"high with three point
catches.
D. Mounting Panel: Provide painted removable internal mounting panel for component installation.
E. Enclosure: Provide NEMA 12 except as indicated. Where door cover gasketing is required, provide neoprene
gasket attached with oil-resistant adhesive,and held in place with steel retaining strips. For all enclosures of class
higher than NEMA 1,use hubbed raceway entrances.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Locations: Install items where indicated and where required to suit code requirements and installation conditions.
B. Cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused conduit hubs.
C. Support and fasten items securely in accordance with Section 16190,"Supporting Devices".
D. Install sizes adequate to meet NEC volume requirements,but in no case smaller than sizes indicated.
E. Remove sharp edges where they may come in contact with wiring or personnel.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Cabinets: Flush mounted,NEMA enclosure type 1 except as otherwise indicated.
16135-4 No.99132-CP-2
2. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components, and materials as indicated,
including but not limited to removal of electrical items indicated to be removed for demolition and items made
obsolete by the new Work.
' 3. Protect the structure,furnishings,finishes,and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.
4. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequately to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to
adjacent areas.
5. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations,protect adjacent installations.
6. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components in renovated or remodeled areas using new materials
that match existing materials using experienced Installers. Refer to the materials and methods required for the
surface and building components being patched and for installer's qualifications.
7. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation
using experienced Installers. Refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building
' components being patched and for installer's qualifications.
3.04 CLEAN UP
A. Maintain the premises at all times, free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish caused by the Contractor's
employees or work, including demolition work. Upon completion of work, remove rubbish, tools, scaffolding,
demolition materials and equipment, and surplus materials from and about the building, and leave work areas
"broom clean" or its equivalent. In case of dispute,the Owner shall remove the rubbish and charge the cost to the
Contractor.
B. After tests have been made and accepted, the Electrical Contractor shall go over the complete job and clean light
fixtures, panels and other equipment installed by him, leaving the area(s)under contract in a clean and a complete
working order. Remove temporary identification and install permanent identification.
3.05 PAINTING
A. Refinish all electrical equipment damaged during shipping and/or installation to its original condition. Remove all
rust;prime and paint per manufacturer's recommendations for finish equal to original.
END OF SECTION 16010
r
16010-9 No.99132-CP2
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Section applies to this Section:
' 1. Section 16010: 'Basic Electrical Requirements".
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application with electrical
installations as follows:
1. Selective demolition including:
a. Non-destructive removal of materials and equipment for reuse or salvage as indicated.
b. Dismantling electrical materials and equipment made obsolete by these installations.
2. Excavation for underground utilities and services,including underground raceways and equipment.
3. Miscellaneous metals for support of electrical materials and equipment.
4. Wood grounds,nailers,blocking,fasteners,and anchorage for support of electrical materials and equipment.
r5. Joint sealers for sealing around electrical materials and equipment; and for sealing penetrations in fire and
smoke barriers,floors,and foundation walls.
6. Concrete equipment bases for equipment.
7. Touch-up painting.
8. Coordinate with Division 8 Contractor for locations and installation of access panels and doors in walls,
ceilings,and floors for access to electrical materials and equipment.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions apply to excavation operations:
1. "Additional Excavation": Where excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, if unsuitable bearing
materials are encountered,continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are reached. The Contract Sum
' may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification.
2. "Subbase": As used in this Section refers to the compacted soil layer used in pavement systems between the
subgrade and the pavement base course material.
' 16050-1 No. 99132-CP-2
3. "Subgrade": As used in this Section refers to the compacted soil immediately below the slab or pavement
system.
4. "Unauthorized Excavation": Consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or
dimensions without specific direction from the Architect.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections:
1. Product Data: Submit for each type of product specified including the following products:
a. Joint sealers.
2. Shop Drawings: Detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and wood supports and r
anchorage for electrical materials and equipment.
3. Schedules: Indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition prior to
commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of electrical service,and details for dust and noise
control.
a. Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy as specified in Division 1
Section 01010,"Summary of the Work".
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
2. Listing and Labeling: Provide products that are"Listed"and"Labeled".
a. The Terms"Listed"and"Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,Article 100.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and application of joint sealers.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products including joint sealer materials in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing
about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and
mixing instructions for multi-component materials. ,
B. Store and handle products including joint sealer materials in compliance with the manufacturers'recommendations
to prevent their deterioration and damage.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditions Affecting Selective Demolition: The following project conditions apply:
1. Protect adjacent materials indicated to remain. Install and maintain dust and noise barriers to keep dirt, dust,
and noise from being transmitted to adjacent areas. Remove protection and barriers after demolition
operations are complete.
16050-2 No.99132-CP-2 '
2. Locate, identify, and protect electrical services passing through demolition area and serving other areas within
the construction area requiring services to be maintained. Maintain services to all areas outside demolition
limits. When services must be interrupted,install temporary services for affected areas.
3. Outages:
a. Provide temporary service to uninterruptable loads during an outage.
b. Perform all work during outages on a premium time basis.
B. Conditions Affecting Excavations: The following project conditions apply:
' 1. Maintain and protect existing building services which transit the area affected by selective demolition.
2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,
' lateral movement,undermining,washout,and other hazards created by excavation operations.
3. Site Information: Subsurface conditions were investigated during the design of the Project. Reports of these
investigations are available for information only; data in the reports are not intended as representations or
warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn from this information.
4. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in excavation areas. If utilities are not indicated to be
removed,support and protect services during excavation operations.
5. Use of explosives is not permitted.
C. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within the limits
permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do not apply joint sealers to wet substrates.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate electrical equipment installation with other building components.
B. Coordinate the shut-off and disconnection of electrical service with the Owner and the Utility Company.
1. Scheduling Outages:
a. Provide 72 hours advance notice in writing to the Owner with copies to the Architect/Engineer of any
electrical power outage to the building or any area in the building.
b. Any outage may be canceled by the Owner up to two hours before scheduled outage time at no cost to the
Owner.
2. Notify the Architect at least 5 days prior to commencing demolition operations.
3. Perform demolition in phases as indicated.
C. Arrange for chases, slots and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for electrical
' installations.
D. Coordinate installing required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural
components as they are constructed.
E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work.
Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
' 16050-3 No.99132-CP-2
F. Coordinate connecting electrical service to components fiunished under other Sections.
G. Coordinate connecting electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply
with requirements of governing regulations,franchised service companies,and controlling agencies.
H. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where electrical items requiring access are concealed by
finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section 08305"Access Panels".
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,crushed stone,crushed slag,
or natural or crushed sand. ,
B. Drainage Fill: Washed,evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel,with 100 percent
passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve,and not more than 5 percent passing a No.4 sieve.
C. Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM,
SW,and SP;free of clay,rock,or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension;debris;waste;frozen materials;and
vegetable and other deleterious matter.
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A. Steel plates,shapes,bars,and bar grating: ASTM A 36.
B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.
C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Schedule 40,welded.
E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout,
recommended for interior and exterior applications.
F. Fasteners: Zinc-coated,type,grade,and class as required.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 Common or Standard
Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber
shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2,and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than
19 percent.
B. Construction Panels: Plywood panels;APA C-D PLUGGED INT,with exterior glue;thickness as indicated, or if '
not indicated,not less than 15/32 inches.
2.04 JOINT SEALERS
A. General: Joint sealers,joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates
under conditions of service and application.
B. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Refer to Division 7 for sealers.
16050-4 No.99132-CP-2
2.05 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Forms and Reinforcing Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and as
indicated on the drawings.
2.06 FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide UL-rated fire-stopping material for penetrations and sleeves that pass through walls and floors. Provide the
fire-stopping material that matches the fire rating of the wall or floor.
B. Conform to requirements of Section 07240"Firestopping".
PART 3: EXECUTION
1 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and application of joint sealers and access panels. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.
3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights or other
location criteria are not indicated.
B. Install items level,plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, except where
otherwise indicated.
rC. Install equipment to facilitate service,maintenance,and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of
disconnecting,with minimum interference with other installations.
D. Give right of way to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.03 PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALERS
A. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint sealers to comply
with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer.
B. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect adjacent areas from
spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing
joint seal.
3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
' A. General: Demolish,remove,demount,and disconnect abandoned electrical materials and equipment indicated to be
removed and not required to be salvaged or saved.
B. Materials and Equipment To Be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing electrical materials and
equipment indicated to be removed and salvaged,and deliver materials and equipment to the location designated for
storage.
C. Light fixtures and equipment removed and not reused shall be offered to the Owner for his maintenance stock.
Fixtures and equipment not retained by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be legally
disposed of by the Contractor.
' 16050-5 No.99132-CP-2
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for legally disposing of the existing ballasts and lamps slated for demolition.
Ballasts and lamps removed under this contract for demolition shall be kept intact, boxed and delivered to a
certified hazardous waste disposal services and lamps to a certified hazardous lamp recycle service. Provide Owner
with proper documentation for this work.
E. Electrical Materials and Equipment: Demolish,remove,demount,and disconnect the following items: '
1. Inactive and obsolete raceway systems.
a. Raceways embedded in floors,walls,and ceilings may remain if such materials do not interfere with
new installations. Remove all wire from unused raceway systems. Remove materials above ,
accessible ceilings.
2. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Division 1 and Section 16010,
"Basic Electrical Materials". ,
3.05 EXCAVATION
A. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace as required for stability of
excavation.
B. Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and
authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open.
1. Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is allowed to remain, cut top of
sheeting at an elevation of 30 inches below finished grade elevation.
C. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and ordinances.
D. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from
flooding project site and surrounding area
1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of bearing materials.
Provide and maintain de-watering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.
2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey '
surface water to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
E. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill.
Place,grade,and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip-line of trees
indicated to remain.
2. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or
fill.
F. Trenching: Excavate trenches for electrical installations as follows:
1. Excavate trenches to a uniform width,sufficiently wide to provide ample working room and to a minimum of 6
to 9 inches clearance on both sides of raceways and equipment.
2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required.
3. Limit the length of open trench to that in which installations can be made and the trench backfilled within the
same day.
16050-6 No.99132-CP-2 ,
4. Where rock is encountered, cant' excavation below required elevation and backfill with a layer of crushed
stone or gravel prior to installation of raceways and equipment. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or
gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and electrical installations.
G. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than
35 deg F(1 deg Q.
H. Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for each area classification
listed below,using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section.
1. Under walks and pavements,use a combination of subbase materials and excavated or borrowed materials.
2. Under building slabs,use drainage fill materials.
' 3. Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock bearing surface and for
correction of unauthorized excavation.
' 4. Other areas,use excavated or borrowed materials.
I. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits,but not until completion of the following:
1. Inspection,testing,approval,and locations of underground utilities have been recorded.
2. Removal of shoring and bracing,and backfilling of voids.
' 3. Removal of trash and debris.
J. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8 inches in loose depth for
' material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by
hand-operated tampers.
K. Before compaction,moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each
layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification specified
below. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy,frozen,or contain frost or ice.
L. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures,piping,and equipment to required elevations. Prevent
displacement of raceways and equipment by carrying material uniformly around them to approximately same
elevation in each lift.
' M. Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction,providing minimum percentage of density specified for
each area classification indicated below.
1. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of
maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesive soils),
determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and not less than the following percentages of relative density,
determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049,for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density
relationship(cohesionless soils).
a. Areas Under Structures,Building Slabs and Steps,Pavements: Compact top 12 inches of subgrade and
each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material,or 95 percent
relative density for cohesionless material.
b. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to
90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless
material.
' 16050-7 No.99132-CP-2
C. Other Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 85 percent
maximum density for cohesive soils,and 90 percent relative density for cohesionless soils.
2. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction,
uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture content and '
to prevent water appearing on surface during,or subsequent to,compaction operations.
N. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at electrical installation excavations during the period 12 months after
Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material,
compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of
surface or finish to match adjacent areas.
3.06 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and ,
anchor electrical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding shall comply with AWS"Structural Welding Code." ,
3.07 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut,fit,and place wood grounds,milers,blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, alignment,and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive
finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.08 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS
A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated,except where more stringent requirements apply.
1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joints sealants.
2. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic-emulsion joint sealants.
B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form ,
smooth,uniform beads;to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent
surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
C: Installation of Fire-Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming,packing, and other accessory materials,to
fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and walls,to provide fire-stops with fire-resistance ratings
indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established
by testing and inspecting agency.
3.09 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS
A. Coordinate with the General Contractor for access door needs. Access doors will be located by the Architect and
provided by the General Contractor.
16050-8 No.99132-CP-2 ,
3.10 TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A. Thoroughly clean damaged areas and provide primer, intermediate,and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at
each location.
B. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive
coats.
END OF SECTION 16050
1
r
' 16050-9 No.99132-CP-2
SECTION 16060
DEMOLITION
PART 1: GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
' 1. Section 16010: "Basic Electrical Requirements".
2. Section 16050: "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
' C. Related Sections:
1. Section 02070: "Selective Demolition".
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the demolition of all electrical systems as noted herein and on the Drawings.
' PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Provide equipment and materials for patching and extending work as specified in individual sections.
PART 3: EXECUTION
' 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Bidding contractor is to field visit the site during Bidding.
tB. Examine areas and existing conditions and verify that field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown
on Drawings.
' C. Verify wiring and equipment that is abandoned serves only abandoned facilities and equipment.
D. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to
Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.
E. Beginning of demolition indicates installer accepts existing conditions.
' 16060-1 No.99132-CP-2
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical systems scheduled for removal in walls,floors,and ceilings.
B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain continuity to existing systems in service during construction.
Work must not be performed on energized equipment or circuits.
C. Existing Electrical Service: Existing system shall remain in service until modified system is complete and ready for '
service. Disable system only to make switchovers and/or connections. Obtain permission from Owner and
Architect/Engineer at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system Minimize outage duration.
Provide temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
D. Existing Fire Alarm System Existing system shall remain in service until modified system is ready for service and
is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and/or connections. Notify Owner, Architect/Engineer and
local fire service and alarm company at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system Minimize
outage duration. Provide temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
E. Existing Telephone System Existing system shall remain in service until modified system is complete and ready '
for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and/or connections. Notify Owner, Architect/Engineer and
Telephone Utility Company at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system Minimize outage
duration. Provide temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
F. Existing Data System: Existing system shall remain in service until modified system is complete and ready for '
service. Disable system only to make switchovers and/or connections. Obtain permission from Owner and
Architect/Engineer at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system Minimize outage duration. ,
Provide temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
G. Existing Television System Existing system shall remain in service until modified system is ready for service and
is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and/or connections. Notify Owner,Architect/Engineer and
local fire service and alarm company at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system Minimize
outage duration. Provide temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
H. Existing Security System Existing system shall remain in service until modified system is complete and ready for
service. Disable system only to make switchovers and/or connections. Notify Owner, Architect/Engineer and
Telephone Utility Company at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system Minimize outage ,
duration. Provide temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
I. Existing Sound System Existing system shall remain in service until modified system is complete and ready for
service. Disable system only to make switchovers and/or connections. Obtain permission from Owner and ,
Architect/Engineer at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system Minimize outage duration.
Provide temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under Provisions of Section 02070, "Selective Demolition" and this
section, and as indicated on the Drawings. The Owner shall be offered materials and equipment slated for
demolition. Legally dispose of all demolition material and equipment that the Owner has been offered but not
accepted
B. Remove,relocate,and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
16060-2 No.99132-CP-2
' D. Remove all exposed abandoned conduit and wiring, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes.
Cut conduit flush with walls and floors,and patch surfaces.
E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is
abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed.
F. Disconnect and remove panelboards and distribution equipment that has been abandoned and remove any fuses in
main switchboard serving the abandoned equipment.
G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.
' H. Disconnect and remove abandoned light fixtures. Remove brackets,stems,hangers,and other accessories.
I. Repair construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
' J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel
as appropriate.
K. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as
specified.
' 3.04 LAMP AND BALLAST DISPOSAL
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of the existing ballasts and lamps slated for demolition. Ballasts
' and lamps removed under this contract for demolition shall be kept intact, boxed and delivered to a certified
hazardous waste disposal services and lamps to a certified hazardous lamp recycle service. Provide Owner with
proper documentation for this work.
3.05 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Thoroughly inspect before reinstallation, all used equipment that is to be reinstalled. Report any defects to the
Engineer/Architect in writing. Instructions for corrective measures will be given at the time. If no defects are
reported, the equipment and materials shall be included under the Contractor's one year guarantee as outlined in
Section 16010.
B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace any damaged circuit
breakers and provide closure plates for any vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised
circuiting arrangement.
' C. Luminaries: Clean existing luminaries on all exterior and interior surfaces and replace all lamps, ballasts, and
broken electrical parts,in areas of remodeling.
3.06 INSTALLATION
A. Reinstall relocated equipment and materials under the provisions of Division 1.
e
END OF SECTION 16060
' 16060-3 No.99132-CP-2
' SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
' 1. Section 16010: "Basic Electrical Requirements".
2. Section 16050: "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 16120: "Conductors and Cables"for other wiring methods.
2. Section 16135: "Cabinets,Boxes and Fittings"for boxes used with conduit and tubing systems.
' 3. Section 16140: "Wiring Devices".
4. Section 16190: "Supporting Devices"for raceway supports.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Raceways for electrical wiring. Types of raceways in this section include the following:
a. Electrical metallic tubing(EMT).
b. Flexible metal conduit.
c. Intermediate metal conduit.
d. Liquid tight flexible conduit.
' e. Rigid metal conduit.
f. Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
g. Surface raceways.
h. Wireway.
i2. Couplings and fittings for raceways. Type of couplings and fittings include:
a. Set screw types,except raintight compression to be used in damp locations.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
' A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
' 1. Product Data for the following products:
a. Surface raceway and fittings.
b. Wireway and fittings.
2. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's written installation instructions for wireway,surface raceway,
and nonmetallic raceway products.
' 16110-1 No.99132-CP-2
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE '
A. Codes and Standards:
1. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70, "National '
Electrical Code."
2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. '
3. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standards pertaining to electrical raceway
systems. ,
4. Listing and Labeling: Provide raceway products and components which are"Listed and Labeled"by UL.
a. The terms"Listed"and"Labeled":as defined by the National Electrical Code,Article 100. '
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate with other Work,including metal and concrete deck installation,as necessary to interface installation of '
electrical raceways and components with other Work.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS ,
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following:
1. Conduit and Tubing:
a. Appleton Electric Co.
b. Carlon. '
c. Crouse-Hinds Division,Cooper Industries,Inc.
d. Killark Electric Mfg.Co.
e. General Signal;O-Z/Gedney ,
f. Raco,Inc.
g. Triangle PWC,Inc.
2. Wireway: ,
a. Circle AW Products.
b. Hof fan Engineering Co. '
C. Square D Co.
3. Surface Metal Raceway:
a. Airey-Thompson Co.,Inc.
b. Butler Mfg.Co.,Walker Div.
C. Hoffman Engineering Co.
d. Square D Co.
e. The Wiremold Co.,Electrical Sales Division.
f. Mono Systems. '
g. Cableready,Inc.
h. Versa-Duct.
16110-2 No.99132-CP-2 ,
' 4. Couplings and fittings for conduit bodies:
a. Appleton Electric Co.
' b. Crouse-Hinds Division,Cooper Industries,Inc.
C. General Signal;O-Z/Gedney.
d. Thomas and Betts Corp.
2.02 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings: ANSI C80.1. Provide threaded fittings.
B. Intermediate Steel Conduit and fittings: UL 1242. Provide threaded fittings.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings: ANSI C80.3 with steel set-screws or steel compression-type fittings.
' D. Flexible Metal Conduit: UL 1,zinc-coated steel.
' E. Liquid tight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: UL 360. Fittings shall be specifically approved for use with this
raceway.
2.03 WIREWAYS
A. General: Provide electrical wireways of types,sizes,and number of channels as indicated. Fittings and accessories
including but not limited to couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, and end caps
' shall match and mate with wireway as required for a complete system Where features are not indicated, select to
fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable provisions of NEC.
' B. Wireway covers: Provide screw on type.
2.04 SURFACE RACEWAYS
' A. General: Sizes and channels as indicated. Provide fittings that match and mate with raceway.
B. Surface Metal Raceway:
' 1. Construct of galvanized steel with snap-on covers,with 1/8-inch mounting screw knockouts in base
approximately 8 inches o.c. Finish with manufacturer's standard baked on gray enamel.
' 2. Provide raceways of types suitable for each application required.
2.05 CONDUIT BODIES
' A. General: Types, shapes, and sizes as required to suit individual applications and NEC requirements. Provide
matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws.
' B. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use metallic conduit and tubing bodies. Use bodies with threaded hubs for threaded
raceways.
' C. Nonmetallic Conduit: Use nonmetallic conduit bodies conforming to UL 514 B.
r
t
' 16110-3 No.99132-CP-2
PART 3: EXECUTION '
3.01 WIRING METHODS
A. Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods: '
1. Exposed: Rigid or intermediate metal conduit(not EMT).
2. Concealed: Rigid or intermediate metal conduit(not EMT). '
3. Underground branch circuits only,Single Run: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. '
4. Underground branch circuits only,Grouped: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for transformers and hydraulic, '
pneumatic,or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment.
6. Indoors or Outdoors: Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for connection to vibrating equipment and hydraulic, ,
pneumatic,or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment in moist or humid location or corrosive atmosphere,
or where subject to water spray or dripping oil,grease,or water.
7. Feeder. Rigid or intermediate metal conduit(not EMT). '
8. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA Type 3R or Type 4.
B. Indoors: Use the following wiring methods: ,
1. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: Flexible metal conduit for transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic or
electric solenoid or motor-operated equipment. '
2. Exposed: Electrical metallic tubing IMC or rigid metallic conduit.
3. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing or rigid metallic conduit.
a. The use of metal clad(MC)cable is prohibited except for light fixtures installed above lay-in acoustical '
tile ceilings. Does not include light control devices such as switches of which conduit and wire is
required-
4.
equired4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA Type 1,except in damp or wet locations use NEMA Type 4,stainless steel. '
5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid Steel Conduit.
6. In Concrete: ,
a. Electrical metallic tubing or rigid metallic conduit: In concrete slabs above grade and not in contact with
earth if gland compression concrete fittings are used. '
b. Rigid metallic conduit(not EMT;not IMC): In slabs on grade or in direct contact with earth.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Size all conduits for quantity and size of conductors according to N.E.C.(National Electrical Code)unless
noted on the drawings. Install electrical raceways in accordance with manufacturer's written installation
instructions,applicable requirements of NEC,and as noted below or herein.
B. IMC may be used in lieu of rigid conduit except in hazardous classified areas or where direct buried in earth. '
16110-4 No.99132-CP-2 '
B. Hinged Cover Enclosures: NEMA type 12 enclosure except as indicated.
C. Hinged Cover Enclosures Outdoors: Install drip hood,factory tailored to individual units.
D. Outlet Boxes and Fittings: Install outlet and device boxes and associated covers and fittings of materials and
NEMA types suitable for each location and in conformance with the following requirements:
1. Interior Dry Locations: Sheet metal type 1.
2. Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Cast metal,NEMA type 31L
3. Wet Locations: NEMA type 4 enclosures.
E. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types suitable for each location
except as otherwise indicated.
F. Floor Boxes: In slabs on grade and wet locations, use NEMA type 4 boxes. At other locations in slabs, use
concrete-tight NEMA 1 boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES
A. Outlets at Windows and Doors: Locate close to window trim. For outlets indicated above doors refer to
architectural elevations for mounting height above finished floor. Specific mounting height shown on the plans will
be to the center of the outlet box.
B. Column and Pilaster Locations: Locate outlet boxes for switches and receptacles on columns or pilasters so the
centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions.
C. Locations in Special Finish Materials: For outlet boxes for receptacles and switches mounted in desks or furniture
cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block,marble,brick,stone or wood walls,utilize rectangular shaped boxes with
square corners and straight sides. Install such boxes without plaster rings. Saw cut all recesses for outlet boxes in
exposed masonry walls.
D. Gasketed Boxes: At the following locations,use cast metal, threaded hub type boxes with gasketed weatherproof
covers:
1. Exterior locations.
2. Where surface mounted on unfinished walls, columns or pilasters. (Cover gaskets may be omitted in dry
locations).
3. Where exposed to moisture laden atmosphere.
4. At food preparation equipment within four 13.of steam connections.
5. Where indicated.
E. Mounting: Mounr outlet boxes`for switches'with the long axis vertical oras indicated. Mount boxes for receptacles'
vertically oras indicated. Mount three or more gang boxes with the long axis horizontal. Locate box covers or
device plates so they will not span different types of building finishes either vertically or horizontally. Locate boxes
for switches near doors on the side opposite the hinges and close to door trim.
F. All outlets in stud wall and gyp board or ceiling space: For fixtures,where wiring is concealed,use outlet boxes 4-
inches square by 1-1/2-inches deep,minimum;for single devices use single plaster ring.
G. Cover Plates for Surface Boxes: Use plates sized to box front without overlap.
H. Do not mount outlets installed back-to-back; offset a minimum of 6" in non-fire rated walls. In fire rated walls
back-to-back,mount outlets offset 24"minimum.
16135-5 No.99132-CP-2
I. Protect outlet boxes to prevent entrance of plaster, and debris. Thoroughly clean foreign material from boxes
before conductors are installed.
J. Concrete Boxes: Use extra deep boxes to permit side conduit entrance without interfering with reinforcing,but do
not use such boxes with over 6-inch depth.
K. Floor Boxes: Set floor boxes level and adjust to floor surface. Install flush in concrete floor slabs so they are
completely enveloped in concrete except for the top. Where normal slab thickness will not envelop box as specified
above, provide increased thickness of the slab. Provide each compartment of each floor box with grounding
terminal consisting of a washer-in-head machine screw, not smaller than no. 10-32, screwed into a tapped hole in
the box. Adjust covers of floor boxes flush with finished floor.
L. Provide 2Y2"deep masonry type outlet boxes where installed in concrete block. Cut into the lower part of the block
to allow the lower edge of the plate to overlap the joint. Mount all similar devices at heights consistent in a room or
area.
M Existing Outlet Boxes: Where extension rings are required to be installed, drill new mounting holes in the rings to
align with the mounting holes on the existing boxes when existing holes are not aligned.
N. Provide all outlet box barriers between switches where required by code.
O. Provide stainless steel blank coverplates for all power and communication outlet boxes when empty conduiVbox
system is provided and when devices are not installed.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Box Selection: For boxes in main feeder conduit runs,use sizes not smaller than 8-inches square by 4-inches deep.
Do not exceed 6 entering raceways and 6 leaving raceways in a single box:
1. Cable Supports: Install clamps,grids,or devices to which cables may be secured. Arrange cables so they may
be readily identified. Support cable at least every 30-inches inside boxes.
2. Mount pull boxes in inaccessible ceilings with the covers flush with the finished ceiling.
3. Size: Provide pull and junction boxes for telephone,signal, and other systems at least 50 percent larger than
would be required by Article 370 of NEC, or as indicated. Locate boxes strategically and provide shapes to
permit easy pulling of future wires or cables of types normal for such systems.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS AND HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES
A. Install cabinets and hinged cover enclosures with fronts straight and plumb. Support at each corner.
B. Install with tops 78-inches above floor.
C. Set cabinets in finished spaces flush with walls.
3.06 GROUNDING
A. Provide electrical grounding connections for metallic cabinets, boxes,enclosures and components as indicated and
instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing
requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL
Standard 486A. Where wiring to item includes a grounding conductor,provide a grounding terminal in the interior
of the cabinet,box or enclosure.
16135-6 No.99132-CP-2
3.07 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation of system, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish and
components. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches,
abrasions and weld marks.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, to ensure
that coatings,finishes,and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion:
i1. Galvanized Finish: Repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Painted Finish: Repair damage using matching corrosion inhibiting touch-up coating recommended by the
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16135
' 16135-7 No.99132-CP-2
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Section apply to this Section:
1. Section 16010: 'Basic Electrical Requirements".
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 16135: "Cabinets,Boxes and Fittings."
2. Section 16170: "Circuit and Motor Disconnects"for devices other than snap switches and plug/receptacle sets
used as disconnects for motors.
3. Section 16195: "Electrical Identification"for requirements for legends to be engraved on wall plates.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles
2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles
3. Plugs
4. Plug Connectors
5. Switches
6. Incandescent Lamp Dimmer-Switches
7. Device Plates
8. Floor Service Outlets
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections:
1. Product Data: Submit for each type of product specified.
2. Shop Drawings: Legends for receptacles and switch plates.
3. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in Operation, Maintenance and Warranty Data
Manuals specified in Division 1.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code"for devices and installation.
2. Comply with NEMA WDL
16140-1 No.99132-CP-2
3. Listing and Labeling: Provide wiring devices which are"Listed"and"Labeled":
a. The Terms"Listed"and"Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,Article 100.
1.05 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule installation of finish plates after the surface upon which they are installed has received final finish.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
B. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Floor Service-Outlet Assemblies: One for each 10,but not less than 1.
2. TVSS Receptacles: One for each 8 installed,but not less than 2.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following:
1. Wiring Devices:
a. Arrow Hart.
b. Hubbell Inc.;Wiring Devices Div.
C. Leviton Mfg.Co.,Inc.
d. Pass and Seymour/Legrand Inc.;Wiring Devices Div.
e. Eagle Electric Mfg.Co.,Inc.
2. Multi-Outlet Assemblies:
a. Airey-Thompson Co.
b. Wiremold.
2.02 WIRING DEVICES
A. General: Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings for applications
indicated which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other applicable UL and NEMA standards.
Provide[gray]color devices and device plates as specified below at each device outlet,unless indicated otherwise.
2.03 RECEPTACLES
A. Receptacles: Provide as scheduled in Table 1, Part 3 below. Comply with UL 498 and NEMA WD 1. Pass and
Seymour/Legrand Catalogue numbers are used; other approved manufacturers shall use their equivalent product.
Provide 0.030 minimum triple contacts,use#688 brass on line contacts,provide back-wired terminal isolated from
strip,provide one piere brass trap uni-ground and provide sample if requested.
16140-2 No.99132-CP-2
1 C. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter(GFCI)Receptacles: Provide as indicated in Table 1,Part 3 below;provide"feed-
thru" type ground-fault circuit interrupter, with integral heavy-duty NEMA WD-6, Configuration 5-20R duplex
receptacles arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Provide unit designed for
installation in a 2-3/4 inch(70 mm)deep outlet box without adapter,grounding type.
D. Receptacles,Isolated Grounded: Provide 20 amp isolated ground receptacle as indicated in Table 1,Part 3 below;
provide with orange triangle on face, divise to match color of other new devices 120 volt A.C. wrap around
mounting strap and ground slots electrically insulated from mounting strap:
1. Green grounding screw terminal.
2. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated-ground receptacles.
3. Isolation Method: Integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.
1 E. Receptacles,Transient-Voltage Surge-Suppressor(TVSS): Provide as scheduled in Table 1,Part 3 below;provide
pin and sleeve design and surge protection components complying to NEMA WD 6,Configuration 5-20R.. Provide
active protection(LED)and features indicated:
1. Duplex Type: With integral TVSS in line-to-ground,line-to-neutral,and neutral-to-ground.
2. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors;rated a nominal clamp level of 500 transient suppression
voltage and minimum single-transient pulse energy dissipation of 140 J line-to-neutral,and 70J line-to-ground
and neutral-to-ground.
3. Active TVSS Indication: Light visible in face of device to indicate device"active"or"no longer active".
4. Identification: Distinctive marking on face of device denotes TVSS-type unit.
2.04 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being
connected.
1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with type SOW-A jacket. Green-insulated grounding
conductor,and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.
2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.
2.05 SWITCHES
A. Switches: Provide quiet type AC heavy duty switches as indicated in Table 2,Part 3 below. Comply with UL 20
and NEMA WDL Pass and Seymour catalogue numbers are used; other approved manufacturers shall use their
equivalent product.
B. Combination Switch and Receptacle: Both devices in a single gang unit with plaster ears and removable tab
connector that permit separate or common feed connection:
1. Switch: 20 A, 120/277-V ac.
2. Receptacle: NEMA WD 6,Configuration 5-15R.
C. Dimmer Switches: Provide modular, full-wave, solid-state dimmer switches with integral, quiet ON/Off switches
and audible and electromagnetic noise filters conforming to NEMA WD 1,mounted in outlet boxes as indicated and
in accordance with the following:
16140-3 No.99132-CP-2
1. Control: Continuously adjustable slide, toggle or rotary knob. Single-pole or three-way switch to suit
connections.
2. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular dimmer switches for incandescent fixtures, with switch poles and
wattage as indicated, 120-volts, 60-Hz, with continuously adjustable rotary, knob slide or toggle, anodized
aluminum face,single-pole,and with soft-tap or other quiet ON/OFF switch. Equip with electromagnetic filter
to eliminate noise,RF and TV interference,and with 5 inch(130 mm)wire connecting leads.
2.06 WALL PLATES
A. General: Provide single and combination types that match corresponding wiring devices with sizes, and with
ganging and cutouts as indicated:
1. Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached.
2. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates. '
3. Provide wall plate color to match wiring devices,except as otherwise indicated.
4. Provide wall plates with engraved legend[where indicated].
5. Conform to requirements of Section 16195,"Electrical Identification".
B. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features:
1. Material and Finish: 0.04 inch thick,type 302 satin finished stainless steel in finished spaces.
2. Material and Finish: steel plate,galvanized in unfinished spaces.
3. Weather proof. Gasketed stainless steel duplex cover.
2.07 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Flush Type:
1. General: Provide flush floor box unit, constructed of a cast-iron base, a steel coverplate, and a steel wiring
compartment cover to allow wiring feed-thru from one compartment to another-
a.
nothera. Provide modular flush-type,single or dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
b. Provide box fully adjustable and a maximum of 2-7/16"deep.
c. Use design compatible with floor outlet wiring methods indicated.
d. Provide 20-amperes, 125-volts,gray duplex receptacles.
e. NEMA WD 6,Configuration 5-20R,where indicated.
f. Provide with 3/4 inch or 1 inch NPT, 1 inch long, locking nipple for installation where compatible with
wiring method.
2. Additional Features:
a. Compartmentation: Banner separates power and signal compartments.
b. Housing Material: Die-cast aluminum,satin finished.
c. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6,Configuration 5-20R,gray finish,unless otherwise indicated.
d. Signal Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening,unless otherwise indicated.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Walker#RFB4-SS,or approved equal with services indicated on plans,unless noted otherwise.
b. Walker#RFB4-CI,or approved equal,where installed in slab on grade.
2.08 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching
assembly of raceways and receptacles.
16140-4 No.99132-CP-2
B. Raceway Material: Metal,with manufacturer's standard finish.
C. Wire: No. 12 AWG.
2.09 FINISHES
A. Color: Gray,unless otherwise indicated or required by Code.
PART 3: EXECUTION
' 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated,in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
' applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project
requirements.
B. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as necessary to interface
installation of wiring devices with other Work:
1. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from excess building materials, dirt,
and debris. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure.
2. Install galvanized steel wallplates in unfinished spaces.
�+ 3. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.
4. Install wall plates after painting work is completed.
5. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and
grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,multigang wall plates.
6. Patch all floors and/or walls around floor and/or wall boxes installed in pre-fabricated walls with concrete to
match floors and/or walls.
C. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer.
D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
E. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets and telephone/power service poles are installed to suit arrangement of
partitions and furnishings.
F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's
published torque tightening values for wiring'devices: Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not
indicated,tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. Use
properly scaled torque indicating hand tool.
G. Provide surge protection receptacles(TVSS) at all locations adjacent to computer/data outlets and where indicated
on drawings.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance.
' 16140-5 No.99132-CP-2
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Section 16195"Electrical Identification".
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper.
B. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch-circuit equipment grounding conductor.
C. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Connect to isolate-ground conductor routed to designated isolated equipment ground ,
terminal of electrical system.
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. ,
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits. Ensure proper
polarity and ground continuity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and
demonstrate compliance with requirements,operating each operable device at least six times.
B. Test ground fault circuit interrupter(GFCI) operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance
with manufacturer recommendations.
C. Check TVSS receptacle indicating lights for normal indication.
D. Replace damaged or defective components.
E. TABLE 1
RECEPTACLES '
MFGR CURRENT VOLTAGE SINGLE/ NEMA UL NOTES
CAT RATING RATING DUPLEX CONFIG- GRADE
NO. AMPS URATION
PASS&SEYMOUR 20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HEAVY DUTY
#5362A
PASS&SEYMOUR 20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HEAVY DUTY (1)
(#WP-26L-20)2091-Gry GFI INTEGRAL
PASS&SEYMOUR
#IG 6300 20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HEAVY DUTY ISOLATED
GROUND
PASS&SEYMOUR
#IG 6362-GRY SP 20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HOSPITAL (2)SURGE
GRADE SUPPRESSOR
NOTES:
(1) Protects downstream receptacles on same circuit;provide weatherproof covers for outdoor units and as noted.
(2) Transient voltage surge suppression outlet(TVSS)and LED indications.
16140-6 No.99132-CP-2 ,
1 F. TABLE 2
SWITCHES
MFGR TYPICAL LOAD VOLTAGE POLES UL NOTES
CAT APPLICATION RATING RATING GRADE
NO. (AC)
PASS&SEYMOUR CONTROL LIGHTS 20A 120/277 1 HEAVY DUTY
#20ACGRY
PASS&SEYMOUR CONTROL LIGHTS 20A 120/277 3-WAY HEAVY DUTY
#20ACGRY
PASS&SEYMOUR SWITCH&PILOT 20A 120/277 1 HEAVY DUTY (1)
#20ACI"L
LIGHTOLIER DIlVIlVIER SWITCH 60OW MIN. 120 1 HEAVY DUTY (2)
2P-600 SERIES
NOTES:
r (1) Pilot light"on"when switch is"on".
(2) Derate dimmer switch per manufacturer's recommendations where dimmers are ganged together.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Internally clean devices,device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained,or improperly painted wall plates or
devices.
END OF SECTION 16140
16140-7 No.49132-CP-2
SECTION 16170
CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
' Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
1. Section 16010: "Basic Electrical Requirements".
2. Section 16477: "Fuses".
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 16481: "Motor Controllers" for combination type starters which incorporate disconnect switches in
the same enclosure as the starter and manual motor starters which include the disconnect function as part of the
starter switch assembly.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes circuit and motor disconnects.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections:
' 1. Product Data: Submit for each type of product specified.
' 2. Maintenance Data: For circuit and motor disconnects,for inclusion in Operating,Maintenance and Warranty
Data Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 16 Section 16010,'Basic Electrical Requirements".
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1. Electrical Component Standards: Provide components complying with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code",
and which are listed and labeled by UL. Comply with UL Standard 98 and NEMA Standard KS 1.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following:
' 1. Cutler-Hammer&Westinghouse;Eaton Corp.
2. General Electric Co.
16170-1 No.99132-CP-2
3. ITE Electrical Products Division Siemens
4. Square D Company.
2.02 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches in types, sizes, duties, features,ratings, and enclosures as
indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure except for outdoor switches and other indicated locations, provide NEMA
3R enclosures with raintight hubs. For motor and motor starter disconnects,provide units with horsepower ratings ,
suitable to the loads. Switches shall be quick-make,quick-break with visible blades with door open. Switches shall
be dead front with a door interlock.
B. Fusible Switches: Provide heavy duty switches, with fuses of classes and current ratings indicated. See Section 1
16477, "Fuses" for specifications. Where current limiting fuses are indicated, provide switches with non-
interchangeable feature suitable only for current limiting type fuses.
C. Fractional HP disconnect switches shall be a manual motor switch without overload protection. Switches shall be
horse power rated. Switch shall be Square D Class 2510,or an approved equal.
D. Non-fusible Disconnects: Provide heavy duty switches of classes and current ratings as indicated.
E. Double-Throw Switches: Provide heavy duty switches of classes and current ratings as indicated.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Electrical Interlocks: Provide number and arrangement of interlock contacts in switches as required.
B. Provide auxiliary control circuit disconnects as required.
C. Special Enclosure Material: Provide special enclosure material as follows for switches indicated:
I. Stainless Steel Type 304.
2. Molded fiberglass reinforced plastic. ,
3. Heavy cast aluminum.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated and where required by the above Code.
Comply with switch manufacturers'printed installation instructions.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuits and
demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Except as otherwise indicated, do not test switches by
operating them under load. However,demonstrate switch operation through six opening/closing cycles with circuit
unloaded. Open each switch enclosure for inspection of interior, mechanical and electrical connections, fuse
installation, and for verification of type and rating of fuses installed. Correct deficiencies, then re-test to
demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace defective units with new units and re-test.
END OF SECTION 16170 ,
16170-2 No.99132-CP-2 '
' SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES
tPART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I
Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
1. Section 16010: 'Basic Electrical Requirements".
2. Section 16050: "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
' C. Related Sections:
1. Division 5 Section 05500, "Metal Fabrications" for requirements for miscellaneous metal items involved in
' supports and fastenings.
2. Division 7 Section 07900, "Sealants and Caulking" for requirements for firestopping at sleeves through walls
and floors that are fire barriers.
3. Refer to other Division 16 sections for additional specific support requirements that may be applicable to
specific items.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers,supports,
anchors,sleeves,inserts,seals,and associated fastenings.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Codes and Standards:
1. Electrical Component Standard: Component and installation shall comply with NFPA 70,'National Electrical
Code."
2. Electrical components shall be listed and labeled by UL,ETL,CSA,or other approved,nationally recognized
testing and listing agencies that provide third-party certification follow-up services.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following:
1. Slotted Metal Angle and U-Channel Systems:
a. Allied Tube&Conduit
b. B-Line Systems,Inc.
C. Unistrut Diversified Products
' 16190-1 No.99132-CP-2
2. Conduit Sealing Bushings: ,
a. Cooper Industries,Inc.
b. Killark Electric Mfg.Co. ,
C. General Signal/O-Z/Gedney.
d. Raco,Inc.
e. Thomas&Betts Corp.
2.02 COATINGS
A. Coating: Protect supports, support hardware, and fasteners with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent
corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic. Provide hot-
dip galvanized products for use outdoors.
2.03 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES '
A. Raceway Supports: Provide clevis hangers,riser clamps, conduit straps,threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling
trapeze hangers,wall brackets,and spring steel clamps.
B. Fasteners: Provide types,materials,and construction features as follows:
1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.
2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.
3. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel,designed specifically for the intended service.
C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Provide factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for
sealing around conduit, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve,
malleable iron body,neoprene sealing grommets or rings,metal pressure rings,pressure clamps,and cap screws.
D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Provide factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and
insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of
conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable-iron casting with hotdip
galvanized finish.
E. U-Channel Systems: Provide 14 gauge steel channels,with 9/16-inch-diameter holes,at a minimum of 8 inches on ,
center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same
manufacture.
2.04 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES '
A. General: Shop-or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel components.
B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and ,
machine bolts to"form rigid supports.
C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:
1. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide supporting devices that fasten to electric components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC
requirements. '
16190-2 No.99132-CP-2 ,
' B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installations.
C. Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements:
1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports.
2. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a safety factor of at
' least four. Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less than 200 lbs, provide additional
strength until there is a minimum of 200 lbs safety allowance in the strength of each support.
3. Provide individual and multiple(trapeze)raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways.
Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing
hanger rods and conduits.
' 4. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers.
5. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of
hangers only for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above
suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners,use 1/4-inch-diameter or larger threaded
steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing.
6. Space supports for raceways in accordance with NEC.
7. Support exposed and concealed raceway within 24 inches of a box and access fittings. Provide support at the
box independently of the raceway.
8. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed
conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals.
D. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors.
E. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same structural
safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards,
disconnects,control enclosures,pull boxes,junction boxes,transformers,and other devices.
F. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used,
attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved type of fastener
not more than 24 inches from the box.
G. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire-rated floors and walls for raceways and cable
installations. For sleeves through fire-rated wall or floor construction,apply UL-listed firestopping sealant in gaps
' between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables in accordance with"Fire Resistant Joint Sealers"requirement of
Division 7 Section 07900,"Sealants and Caulking".
H. Conduit Seals: Provide seals for conduit penetrations of slabs on grade and exterior walls below grade and where
indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal.
I. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated,fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building
' structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards,
transformers,boxes,disconnect switches,and control components.
' J. Low Voltage Wiring Supports: Where low voltage communication and data wiring is not installed in conduit or
raceway,do not support from ceiling system supports;support per NEC.
' 16190-3 No.99132-CP-2
K. TESTS: Test pull-out resistance of one of each type,size,and anchorage material for the following fastener types: ,
1. Expansion anchors.
2. Toggle bolts.
3. Power-driven threaded studs.
L. Provide all jacks,jigs, fixtures, and calibrated indicating scales required for reliable testing. Obtain the structural
Engineer's approval before transmitting loads to the structure. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load for fastener. If ,
fastening fails test,revise all similar fastener installations and re-test until satisfactory results are achieved.
END OF SECTION 16190
S
161904 No.99132-CP-2 '
' SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1: GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
' Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
1. Section 16010: "Basic Electrical Requirements".
2. Section 16050: 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
' C. Related Sections:
1. Section 09900:"Painting"for related identification requirements.
2. Section 16120: "Conductors and Cables" for requirements for color coding of conductors for phase
' identification.
3. Refer to other Division 16 sections for additional specific electrical identification associated with specific
items.
1.02 SUNEWARY
A. This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements
for electrical identification components including but not limited to the following:
1. Buried electrical line warnings.
2. Identification labeling for raceways,cables,and conductors.
3. Operational instruction signs.
4. Warning and caution signs.
' S. Equipment labels and signs.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
' A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
' 1. Schedule of Manufacturers and Products: To be used for identification signs and labels.
1.04"QUALITY ASSURANCE'
' A. Codes and Standards:
1. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70, "National
' Electrical Code."
2. ANSI Compliance: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of
Piping Systems,"with regard to type and size of lettering for raceway and cable labels.
' 16195-1 No.99132-CP-2
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following: '
1. Ideal Industries,Inc.
2. Panduit Corp. ,
3. Seton Name Plate Co.
4. Thomas&Betts Corp.
5. W.H.Brady Co.
2.02 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Adhesive Marking Labels for Raceways and Cable: Pre-printed, flexible, self-adhesive labels with legend ,
indicating voltage and service(Emergency,Lighting,Power,Communications,Control,Fire Alarm).
B. Label Size: ,
1. Raceways 1-Inch and Smaller: 1-1/8 inches high by 4 inches long.
2. Raceways Larger than 1-Inch: 1-1/8 inches high by 8 inches long.
C. Color. Black legend on orange background.
D. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils
thick by 1 inch to 2 inches in width.
E. Pretensioned Flexible Wraparound Colored Plastic Sleeves for Raceway and Cable Identification: Flexible acrylic
bands sized to suit the raceway diameter and arranged to stay in place by pre-tensioned gripping action when coiled '
around the raceway or cable.
F. Underground Line Marking Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, plastic tape compounded for
direct-burial service not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick Printed legend indicative of general type of
underground line below.
G. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive,wraparound, cable/conductor markers ,
with preprinted numbers and letter.
H. Aluminum,Wraparound, Cable Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014-inch thick,aluminum sheet, fitted with slots '
or ears for securing permanently around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. Provide for legend
application with stamped letters or numbers.
I. Brass or Aluminum Tags: Metal tags with stamped legend,punched for fastener. Dimensions: 2 inches by 2 inches ,
by 19"gage.
J. Engraved,Plastic-Laminated Labels,Signs,and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/8- I inch minimum thick Engraved legend in white letters on black face and punched for mechanical fasteners.
K. Baked-Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs,punched for fasteners,with
colors,legend,and size appropriate to the location.
16195-2 No.99132-CP-2 '
L. Exterior Metal-Backed Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted cellulose
acetate butyrate signs with 20-gage, galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the
location. Provide 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
' M. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or number 10/32 stainless steel
machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
N. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width,
50-1b minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 deg F to 350 deg F. Provide
ties in specified colors when used for color coding.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical
' identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering,and colors as
approved in submittals and as required by code.
' B. Provide identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC.
C. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after
completion of finish work.
' D. Conduit Identification:
1. Identify Raceways of Certain Systems with Color Banding: Band exposed or accessible raceways of the
following systems for identification. Bands shall be pretensioned,snap-around colored plastic sleeves,colored
adhesive marking tape, or a combination of the two. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely
encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Install bands at
changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, and at 40-foot maximum intervals in straight runs.
Apply the following colors:
a. Fire Alarm System: Red
b. Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and Yellow
c. Security System: Blue and Yellow
' d. Clock System: Green
e. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and Blue
f. Telephone System: Green and Yellow
' 2. Provide appropriate labeling for empty conduit and junction box system(s)provided for future services.
E. Identify Junction, Pull, and Connection Boxes: Provide code-required caution sign for boxes with pressure-
sensitive, self-adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange background. Install on
outside of box cover. Also label box covers with identity of contained circuits. Use pressure-sensitive plastic labels
at exposed locations and similar labels at concealed boxes.
F. Underground Electrical Line Identification: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power,signal, and
communications lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker, located directly above line at 6 to 8
inches below finished grade. Where multiple lines are installed in a common trench,do not exceed an overall width
' of 16 inches;install a single line marker.
1
' 16195-3 No.99132-CP-2
G. Power Circuit Identification: Securely fasten identifying metal tags of aluminum wraparound marker bands to ,
cables,feeders,and power circuits in,pull boxes,junction boxes,and switchboard rooms with
1/4-inch steel letter and number stamps with legend to correspond with designations on Drawings. If metal tags are
provided,attach them with approximately 55-1b test monofilament line or one-piece self-locking nylon cable ties. '
H. Tag or label conductors as follows:
1. Future Connections: Conductors indicated to be for future connection or connection under another contract, ,
label with identification indicating source and circuit numbers.
2. Multiple Circuits: Where multiple branch circuits or control wiring or communications/signal conductors are ,
present in the same box or enclosure(except for three-circuit, four-wire home runs), label each conductor or
cable. Provide legend indicating source, voltage, circuit number, and phase for branch circuit wiring. Phase
and voltage of branch circuit wiring may be indicated by means of color coded conductor insulation. For
control and communications/signal wiring,use color coding or wire/cable marking tape at terminations and at
intermediate locations where conductors appear in wiring boxes,troughs,and control cabinets. Use consistent
letter/number conductor designations throughout on wiretcable marking tapes.
3. Match identification markings with designations used in panelboard shop drawings, Contract Documents,and
similar previously established identification schemes for the facility's electrical installations.
I. Provide warning,caution,and instruction signs and stencils as follows: '
1. Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or where reasonably
required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect. '
Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations
are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items.
2. Emergency Operating Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with
minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, or other
emergency operations.
J. Provide equipment/system circuit/device identification as follows: '
1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic-laminate on each major unit of electrical equipment
in building, including central or master unit of each electrical system. This includes
communication/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification.
Except as otherwise indicated,provide single line of text,with 1/2-inch-high lettering on 1-1/2-inch-high label
(2-inch-high where two lines are required), white lettering in black field. Text shall match terminology and '
numbering of the Contract Documents and shop drawings. Apply labels for each unit of the following
categories of electrical equipment.
a. Panelboards,electrical cabinets,and enclosures. r
b. Access doors.and panels for concealed electrical items.
c. Motor starters.
d. Pushbutton stations. '
e. Remote-controlled switches.
£ Control devices.
K Provide circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers,
pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components
above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components, where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, ,
provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each
individual breaker.
16195-4 No.99132-CP-2 '
t L. Provide labels at locations indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with
operation and maintenance of equipment.
tEND OF SECTION 16195
r
' 16195-5 No.99132-CP-2
' SECTION 16452
GROUNDING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
' Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
' 1. Section 16010: 'Basic Electrical Requirements".
2. Section 16050: 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
3. Section 16120: "Conductors and Cables".
' C. Related Sections:
1. Division 2 Section: "Chain Link Fences and Gates"for fence and gate grounding requirements.
' 1.02 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for
grounding for protection of life,equipment,circuits,and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section
may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications.
' 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections:
1. Product Data: Submit for grounding rods,connectors and connection materials and grounding fittings.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
' 1. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70, "National
Electrical Code"(NEC).
2.. UL Standard: Comply with UL 467,"Grounding and Bonding Equipment."
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following:
1. Blackburn Corp.
' 2. Bumdy Corp.
3. Cadweld-Erico,Inc.
4. General Signal;O-Z/Gedney Co.
16452-1 No.99132-CP-2
5. Raco,Inc. '
6. Thomas&Betts Corp.
2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS ,
A. Products: Of types indicated and of sizes and ratings to comply with NEC. Where types, sizes, ratings, and
quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements,the more stringent requirements and the greater size,rating,
and quantity indications shall govern. '
B. Conductor Materials: Copper.
2.03 WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS '
A. General: Comply with Section 16120, "Conductors and Cables". Conform to NEC Table 8, except as otherwise
indicated,for conductor properties,including stranding. '
B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Green insulated.
C. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. '
D. Underground Conductors: Bare,tinned,stranded,except as otherwise indicated.
E. Bare Copper Conductors: Conform to the following: ,
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B-3. '
2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B-8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B-33.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS ,
A. Ground Bus: Bare annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section.
B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No. 3/0 AWG gauge bare copper wire, terminated with copper
ferrules.
C. Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper,0.05 inch thick and 2 inches wide,except as indicated. '
2.05 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A. General: Listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the materials used. '
B. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units. '
C. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty units listed for the application.
D. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types,sizes, and combinations '
of conductors and other items to be connected.
2.06 GROUNDING ELECTRODES '
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel with high-strength steel core and electrolytic-grade copper outer sheath, molten
welded to core.
1. Size: 3/4 inch by 10 feet.
B. Plate Electrodes: Copper plates,square or rectangular,minimum 0.10 inch thick,size as indicated. '
16452-2 No.99132-CP-2 '
' PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Equipment Grounding Conductor Application: Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes, and quantities of
equipment grounding conductors, except where specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by
NEC are indicated.
1. Use raceway as the equipment ground conductor where feasible and permitted by NEC for the following:
' a. Feeders and branch circuits except as otherwise indicated.
b. Lighting circuits.
C. Receptacle circuits,except as otherwise indicated.
d. Single-phase motor or appliance circuits.
' 2. Provide separate insolated grounding conductors with circuit conductors for the following in addition to those
equipment grounding conductor locations where required by Code:
a. Wireways.
b. Multi-outlet assemblies.
c. Three-phase motor or appliance branch circuits; Bond motor frame.
' d. All PVC conduit runs unless indicated.
3. Provide separate insulated isolated grounding conductors where indicated herein or on the drawings. Where
' PVC requires an insulated grounding conductor,also provide an equipment grounding conductor.
4. Busway Circuits: Provide separate insulated equipment ground conductor from the ground bus in the
switchgear,switchboard,or distribution panel to the equipment ground bar terminal on the busway.
5. Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide an insulated equipment ground conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless
they are designated for telephone or data cables.
' 6. Water Heater, Heat Tracing, and Anti-Frost Heater Circuits: Provide separate insulated equipment ground
conductor to each electric water heater,heat tracing,and surface anti-frost heating cable. Bond this conductor
to heater units,piping,and connected equipment and components.
B. Underground Conductors: Provide bare,stranded copper except as otherwise indicated.
C. Signal and Communications: For telephone, alarm, and communication systems,provide a No. 4 AWG minimum
green insulated copper conductor in raceway from the grounding electrode system to each terminal cabinet or
central equipment location.
' D. Separately Derived Systems: Where required by NEC to be grounded,provide grounding in accordance with NEC
paragraph 250-26.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Ground electrical systems and equipment in accordance with NEC requirements, except where the
Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements.
B. Provide and install grounding electrode systems according to NEC Article 250-81. Bond the following items
together to form the service entrance ground:
1. Main water service piping.
2. Building steel.
' 3. Footing steel.
16452-3 No.99132-CP-2
C. Electrical Room Grounding Bus: Provide ground bus spaced 1 inch from wall and support 6 inches above finished '
floor,except as otherwise indicated.
D. Metallic Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper ground conductors, sized as indicated, in conduit from the
building main service equipment, or the ground bus, to main metallic water service entrances to the building.
Connect ground conductors to the main metallic water service pipes by means of ground-clamps/connectors. Where
a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect the ground conductor to the street side of the fitting. Do not
install a grounding jumper around dielectric fittings. Bond the ground conductor conduit to the conductor at each
end.
E. Braided-Type Bonding Jumpers: Install to connect ground clamps on water meter piping to bypass water meters ,
electrically. Use elsewhere for flexible bonding and grounding connections.
F. Route grounding conductors along the shortest and straightest paths possible without obstructing access or placing
conductors where they may be subjected to strain,impact,or damage,except as indicated.
G. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment ground conductors of pumps, fans, electric
heaters,and air cleaners serving individual systems. '
H. Footing Steel: Fabricate with 20 feet of conductor laid lengthwise in excavation for foundation or footings. Install
so conductor is within 2 inches of the bottom of the concrete. Where base of foundation is less than 20 feet in
length, coil excess conductor at base of foundation. Bond conductor to reinforcing steel at four locations, ,
minimum Extend conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or grounding electrode.
3.03 CONNECTIONS '
A. General: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select
connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be '
galvanically compatible.
1. Provide electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity.
2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact ,
3. Make aluminum to steel connections with stainless steel separators and mechanical clamps. '
4. Make aluminum to galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as red lead paint to prevent
future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B. Exothermic Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections except ,
those at test wells. Provide at connections to ground rods and plate electrodes. Comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper,
cleaning are not acceptable.
C. Terminate insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits with pressure-type grounding
lugs. Where metallic raceways terminate at metallic housings without mechanical and electrical connection to the
housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding '
conductor to the ground bus in the housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits
with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors.
D. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in ,
accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's
torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B. '
16452-4 No.99132-CP-2 ,
' E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted-and clamped-type
connections between conductors and ground rods.
F. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure
' for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide
embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately
compressed on the ground conductor.
G. Moisture Protection: Where insulated ground conductors are connected to ground rods or ground buses, insulate
the entire area of the connection and seal against moisture penetration of the insulation and cable.
H. Equipment Grounding-Wire Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger,use pressure-type grounding lugs;for No.
10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors,terminate with winged pressure-type connectors.
' 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests: Subject the completed grounding system to a megger test at each location where a maximum ground
resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure ground terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure
ground resistance without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural precipitation or natural drainage
or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform
tests by the 2-point method in accordance with Section 9.03 of IEEE 81, "Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity,
' Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System."
B. Deficiencies: Where ground resistances exceed code requirements, modify the grounding system to reduce
resistance values.
C. Report: Prepare test reports of the ground resistance at each test location. Include observations of weather and
other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. Submit the report to
' the Architect/Engineer for record.
3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
' A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as otherwise
indicated. Where sod has been removed,replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas
disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt,cable laying, and other Work to their original condition. Include necessary
topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching. Perform such Work in accordance with
Division 2 Section"Landscape Work." Maintain disturbed surfaces. Restore vegetation in accordance with Section
"Landscape Work." Restore disturbed paving as indicated.
END OF SECTION 16452
16452-5 No.99132-CP-2
' SECTION 16470
PANELBOARDS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
' Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
1 1. Section 16010: 'Basic Electrical Requirements".
2. Section 16050: 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
3. Section 16478: "Transient Voltage Surge Suppression".
C. Related Sections:
L Section 16195: "Electrical Identification"for labeling materials.
' 2. Section 16475: "Overcurrent Protective Devices" for circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, and other
devices used in panelboards.
3. Section 16477: "Fuses".
' 4. Section 16481: "Motor Controllers"for combination starters installed in panelboards.
1.02 SUMMARY
' A. This Section includes lighting and appliance panelboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V and less.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. "Overcurrent Protective Device (OCPD)": A device operative on excessive current that causes and maintains the
interruption of power in the circuit it protects.
' 1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
' Sections:
1. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of panelboard,accessory item,and component specified.
' 2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings from manufacturers of panelboards including dimensioned plans,
sections;and elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices,major features,and voltage rating. Include the
following:
1 a. Enclosure type with details.
b. Bus configuration and current ratings.
'
C. Short-circuit current rating of panelboard.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary
components.
' 3. Panelboard Schedules: Provide panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards. Submit final versions
after load balancing.
' 16470-1 No.99132-CP-2
4. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for panelboard components, for inclusion in Operating, '
Maintenance and Warranty Data Manual specified in Division 1 and in Division 16 Section 16010, 'Basic
Electrical Requirements." Include manufacturer's written instructions for testing circuit breakers.
5. Qualification Data: Submit for firms and persons specified in"Quality Assurance"Article. '
6. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance performance requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: ,
1. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70, "National
Electrical Code."
2. NEMA Standard: Comply with NEMA PBI,"Panelboards."
3. UL Standards: Comply with UL 61,"Panelboards,"and UL 50, "Cabinets and Boxes."
4. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are"Listed"and"Labeled".
a. The Terms"Listed"and"Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,Article 100. '
5. FCC Emission Standard,Part 15,Subpart J for Class A applications.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS ,
A. Keys: Furnish six(6)spares of each type for panelboard cabinet lock Provide all panels keyed alike. ,
B. Touch-up Paint for surface-mounted panelboards: One half pint container.
PART 2: PRODUCTS '
2.01 MANUFACTURERS ,
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following:
1. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. '
2. Cutler-Hammer,Eaton Corp.
3. General Electric Co,Electrical Distribution and Control Division.
4. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc. '
5. Square D Co.
2.02 PANELBOARDS FABRICATION
A. Overcurrent Protective Devices (OCPDs): Provide type, rating, and features as indicated. Comply with Section '
16475 "Overcurrent Protective Devices," with OCPDs adapted to panelboard installation. Do not use tandem
circuit breakers. Use multi-pole breakers that have common trip. ,
B. Enclosures: Provide cabinets, flush- or surface-mounted as indicted, NEMA PB 1, Type 1 enclosures, with
concealed trim clamps,concealed hinges,flush door latches and hinged door-in-door construction,unless otherwise ,
indicated, to meet environmental conditions at installed location. Where indicated also provide enclosure
requirements as follows:
1. NEMA 250,Type 3R: Rain-tight. '
16470-2 No.99132-CP-2 '
' B. Source Limitation: Obtain similar OCPDs through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
' A. Maintenance Stock,Fuses: See Section 16477, "Fuses".
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following:
1. Cartridge Fuses:
a. Bussmann Div.,Cooper Industries,Inc.
b. GEC Alsthom.
c. Ferraz Shawmut,Inc.
d. Littlefuse Inc.
2. Fusible Switches:
a. Cutler-Hammer.Eaton Corp.
b. General Electric Co.
t
C. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc.
d. Square D Co.
3. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:
a. Cutler-Hammer,Eaton Corp.
b. General Electric Co.
'
C. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc.
d. Square D Co.
' 2.02 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES(OCPDs),GENERAL
A. General: Provide OCPDs in indicated types, as integral components of panelboards, switchboards, and motor
control centers,and also as individually enclosed and mounted units.
' B. Enclosures: NEMA 250,"Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1,000 Volts Maximum)."
2.03 CARTRIDGE FUSES
A: Refer to Section 16477"Fuses".
2.04 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. General: UL 98 "Enclosed and Dead Front Switches" and NEMA KS 1 "Enclosed Switches," quick-make, quick-
break heavy-duty units.
B. Rating: Load-breaking capacity in excess of the normal horsepower rating for the switch.
' C. Withstand Capability: In excess of the let-through current permitted by its fuse when subject to faults up to 100,000
RMS symmetrical amperes.
' D. Operation: By means of external handle.
16475-2 No.99132-CP-2
' SECTION 16478
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
1 PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
1. Section 16010: "Basic Electrical Requirements".
2. Section 16050: 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
3. Section 16110: "Raceways".
4. Section 16120: "Conductors and Cables".
5. Section 16452: "Grounding'.
6. Section 16470: "Panelboards".
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 16195: "Electrical Identification"for labeling materials.
2. Section 16475: "Overcurrent Protective Devices" for circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, and other
devices used in panelboards.
3. Section 16477: "Fuses".
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) equipment of parallel design for power
distribution systems rated 600 V and less. Extent of TVSS work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and as
specified herein. It includes requirements for equipment for this project including,but not limited to,the following:
1. Service Entrance Switchboards.
2. Distribution Panelboards.
3. Branch Circuit Panelboards.
' 1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. "Transient Voltage Surge Suppression": Devices used for the protection of all AC electrical circuits fr--
' effects of lightning induced currents, substation switching transients and internally generated tram;-
from inductive and/or capacitive load switching and high frequency electrical line noise flit—'
surge currents in both directions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditioac
Sections:
1.
specified.Product
Data: Submit product data for 0.�o4i° ON
�da
o
2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings from manufacturers of TVSS equipment including dimensioned plans, '
sections,and elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices,major features,and voltage rating. Include the
following:
a. Enclosure type with details.
b. Bus configuration and current ratings.
C. Short-circuit current rating of assembly.
d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary
components.
e. Wiring Diagrams: Details of schematic diagram including control wiring and differentiating between
manufacturer-and field-installed wiring.
f. Dimensional drawing of each surge suppression device type indicating mounting arrangements.
g. UL 1449 clamp voltage documentation.
3. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for switchboard and panelboard components, for inclusion in
Operating, Maintenance and Warranty Data Manual specified in Division 1 and in Section 16010, "Basic
Electrical Requirements." Include manufacturer's written instructions for testing.
4. Qualification Data: Submit for firms and persons specified in"Quality Assurance"Article.
5. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance performance requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
1. Electrical Component Standard: Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" for components and
installation.
2. UL Standards: Comply with UL 1449,UL 1283 and UL 67.
3. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are"Listed"and"Labeled".
a. The Terms"Listed"and"Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,Article 100.
4. FCC Emission Standard,Part 15,Subpart J for Class A applications.
S. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94,FIPS pub 94.
6. American National Standards Institute and Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE
C62.41-1991 Categories A,B and C,and C62A5-1992).
7. Canadian Standards Association(CSA).
B. Exceptions: List any exceptions,included with the Bid,to any part of these specifications.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver transient voltage surge suppression equipment in factory fabricated containers or wrappings,which properly
protect equipment from damage or construction dust.
$ Store in original packaging. Store inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme
and laid off ground.
low manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing-ar-a-
— - No.991_;,s
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following:
1. Current Technology,Inc.
1 2. Innovative Technologies.
3. LEA International.
4. Liebert Corp.
5. Cutler-Hammer.
6. United Power.
7. APT,Inc.
2.02 REQUIREMENTS,GENERAL
A. Environmental:
1. Operating Temperature: -40°C to+60°C.
2. Relative Humidity: 5 to 95%.
3. Operating altitude: 0 to 12,000 feet.
4. Audible Noise: Less than 35 DBA at 3 feet.
B. Cabinet:
1. Provide a NEMA 1 cabinet with front accessible and lockable hinged door and for recessed or surface wall
or equipment or building structure mounting as indicated. Provide over-current protection within TVSS
cabinet.
C. Monitoring:
1. Provide cabinet with LED visual status monitoring for indication of system operation noting that system is
operating properly and visual LED status monitoring indication noting that the system has a fault. Provide
cabinet with audible status monitoring that will alarm on a system failure in the event the protection has failed.
Provide audible alarm silence push-button.
2. Provide Form C dry contacts for future remote alarm monitoring that are convertible for normally open or
normally closed positions.
D. Description: IEEE C62.41,selected to meet requirements for category indicated.
1. Exposure: Low.
2. Exposure: Medium.
E. Impulse sparkover voltage coordinated with system circuit voltage.
F. Factory mounted assembly with UL-recognized mounting devices.
2.03 EXTERNALLY MOUNTED PANELBOARD TVSS
A. General: Design for non-linear loads that provide transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) and high-frequency
electrical line-noise filtering for Medium to Low Exposure levels at secondary distribution and branch circuit
panelboards that are externally mounted adjacent panelboard.
1. Include coordination of TVSS equipment manufacturer installation with panelboard manufacturer.
2. Refer to drawings and/or panelboard schedules and to Section 16470 "Panelboards" for panelbo-
designated to be protected with TVSS.
16478-3
1
3. Mount adjacent to panelboard as close as feasible, keeping feeder length as short as feasible; twist feeder
conductors to reduce impedance.
B. Operating Voltage: Refer to drawings and panelboard schedules for voltage and configuration. '
C. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage(MCOV)of Suppression Components: Provide suppression components
utilized for panelboards that are rated not less than 115%of nominal system operating voltage of the panelboard.
D. Tested Single-Pulse Surge Current Capacity: Submit to the Engineer along with the shop drawings for compliance.
Provide test data indicating that the tested single-pulse surge current capacity, in amperes, based on the current
waveform of ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 for Category B3 Medium Exposure Waveform(6KV,3KA,8x20 micro-sec
waveform),is not less than the following:
Mode of Protection: Tested Single-Pulse Surae Current(AMPS):
Distribution Panelboards Branch Circuit Panelboards
L-N(Each Phase) 80,000 50,000
L-G(Each Phase) 80,000 50,000
N-G 80,000 50,000
E. UL 1449 (ANSI C62AI-1991 Cat. B3) Performance Ratings: Provide published performance rating literature,
based on UL 1449 fisted clamping voltage suppression ratings,for the entire system as follows:
Nominal System Voltage: Mode of Protection(Volts):
Distribution Panelboards Branch Circuit Panelboards
120/208 L-N: 500 IN: 400-600
L-G: 500 L-G: 400-600
N-G: 500* N-G: 400-600
F. Provide suppression elements between all phases of phase-to-phase(on delta systems)and for 3 phase,4-wire plus
ground (on grounded wye) configurations between each phase conductor and the system neutral, between each
phase conductor and the system ground and between the neutral and the system ground. UL clamping levels shall
be the same for all modes noted herein.
G. Provide visible indication of proper suppressor,connection and operation.
H. Provide the suppressor to exhibit Sine Wave Tracking circuitry that has field replaceable circuitry without
disturbing the conduit,enclosure,or cover.
I. Provide a TVSS clamping response time of 1 nanosecond or less. Provide high frequency noise filtering for UL
1283. .
J. Provide suppressors consisting of solid-state components that operate bi-directionally.
K. Provide the surge suppression panel with a surface or recessed cover and mounting,as indicated.
L. Provide the surge suppressor with its own disconnect switch or C.B.(unless indicated in schedules for dedicated 3P
circuit breakers)that meets the proper A.I.C. of the panelboard;tap bus of panelboard. If fuses are used for over-
current protection,use fuses that allow the maximum rated transient surge current to pass through the suppressor a
minimum of 1,000 times without fuse operation. Indicate if the system required an external O.C.device to maintain
the systems UL 1449 Listing.
16478-4 No.99132-CP-2
M. Provide the suppressor with a warranty guarantee for a period of 5 years from the date of final acceptance based on
the Architect's final certificate of completion, for all materials and labor (except if determined to be caused by
abuse),at no charge to the Owner.
N. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following:
a. Current Technology,TGGO Series.
b. LEA International,CF Series.
c. Liebert(Control Concepts,Accuvar 111 Series.)
d. Innovative Technology,PTE 160 Series.
e. Cutler-Hammer,Prior Approved Equal.
f. United Power,Prior Approved Equal.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
' A. General: Install surge suppression/filter assemblies and accessory items in accordance with these specifications,
applicable codes and standards and in accordance with manufacturers'written installation instructions.
B. Mounting: Mount externally mounted units as close as feasible to switchboard(s)and/or panelboard(s), except as
indicated. (Field verify the best location to provide the shortest conductor lead length):
1. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish.
2. Install on load side of service entrance switchboard or panelboard. Tap the bus and provide external
' disconnect switch or 3 pole circuit breaker on the load side of the switchboard or panelboard of size as
required by the TVSS manufacturer as required to meet code.
3. Conductor Lengths: Provide externally mounted assembly using switchboard type low impedance conductors
between suppressor and point of attachment and straight and short as possible. Do not exceed 10'-0" of lead
length of conductors without written permission of Engineer for switchboard installation or 24"for panelboard
installations.
3.02 IDENTWICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components in accordance with Section 16195,"Electrical Identification".
3.03 GROUNDING
A. Panelboard Connections: Make suppressors grounding connections to the panelboard ground bus.
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Control Program: Conform to the following:
1. Procedures: Make field tests and inspections by a factory representative, after installation, and prepare
suppression equipment for satisfactory operation in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations
' and these specifications.
16478-5 No.99132-CP-2
2. Protective Device Ratings and Settings: Verify indicated ratings and settings to be appropriate for final system
configuration and parameters. Where discrepancies are found,recommend final protective device ratings and
settings.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include the following inspections and related work:
1. Inspect for defects and physical damage.
2. Exercise and perform operational tests of all mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance
with manufacturer's instruction manual.
3. Check mounting,area clearances,and alignment and fit of components.
4. Check rightness of bolted electrical connections, including grounding connections. Refer to manufacturer's
written instructions for proper torque values.
5. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work.
C. Electrical tests: Prepare for acceptance tests and include the following items performed in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Insulation resistance test of each component,connecting supply,and portions of control wiring that disconnect
from solid-state devices through normal disconnecting features.
2. Ground resistance test on equipment ground connections.
3. Continuity tests of each circuit.
D. Re-test: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and provide re-testing. Verify by the system tests
that the total assembly meets specified requirements.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards and panelboards. Remove paint
splatters and other spots,dirt,and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 16478
16478-6 No.99132-CP-2
SECTION 16481
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
1. Section 16010: "Basic Electrical Requirements".
2. Section 16050: "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
3. Section 16477: "Fuses".
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 15862: "Variable Frequency Drives."
2. Section 16195: "Electrical Identification"for labeling materials.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes A.C. motor-control devices rated 600V and less that are supplied as enclosed units that are
not supplied as an integral part of motor/controller packages.
B. Types of motor controllers specified in this section include the following:
1. Fractional BP manual.
2. Magnetic.
3. Combination magnetic and switches.
4. Auxiliary Control Devices.
C. Refer to applicable Division 16 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" sections for wires/cables, electrical
raceways,and boxes and fittings required in connection with motor controllers.
D. Overcurrent protective devices and disconnect switches use with motor controllers are specified in Section 16475,
"Overcurrent Protective Devices".
1.03 DEFINITIONS'
A. Motor Controller". A device that controls,protects,and energizes an electric motor,and where required, controls
its speed or the torque or power delivered to it.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections:
1. Product Data: For products specified in this section, submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions
on motor controllers,including dimensions,ratings,and data on features and components.
2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of motor controllers showing accurately scaled equipment location
and spatial relationships to associated motors and equipment.
16481-1 No.99132-CP-2
3. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Submit power and control wiring diagrams for motor controllers showing connections to
electrical power panels, feeders, and equipment. Differentiate between portions of wiring which are
manufacturer-installed and portions which are field-installed.
5. Certified Reports: Provide field tests and observations as specified in"Field Quality Control'in this section.
6. Maintenance Data: For products for inclusion in Operating, Maintenance and Warranty Data Manual i
specified in Division 1 and in Section 16010,'Basic Electrical Requirements".
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced and regularly engaged in manufacture of motor
controllers of types and sizes required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Engage a firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience with projects
utilizing motor control work similar to that required for this project.
C. Codes and Standards:
1. NFPA 70,"National Electrical Code"Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code requirements
of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Articles 220, 250, and 430, as applicable to installation, and
construction of motor controllers.
2. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 70E, "Standard for Electrical Safety
Requirements for Employee Workplaces".
3. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 486A and B, and UL 508, pertaining to
installation of motor controllers. Provide controllers and components which are UL-listed and labeled.
4. IEEE Compliance: Comply with recommended practices contained in IEEE Standard 241, "Recommended
Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings",pertaining to motor controllers.
5. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standards ICS 2, "Industrial Control
Devices,Controllers and Assemblies",pertaining to motor controllers and enclosures.
6. Listing and Labeling: Provide motor controllers specified in this Section that are"Listed"and"Labeled".
a. The Term"Listed"and"Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,Article 100. 1�
D. Source Limitations: Obtain similar motor-control devices through a single source from a single manufacturer.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they
connect.
B. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor controller with the ratings and characteristics of the
supply circuit,the motor,the required control sequence,and the duty cycle of the motor and load.
C. Coordinate with other electrical work including wires/cables,electrical boxes and fittings,and raceways,to properly
interface installation of motor controllers with other work.
16481-2 No.99132-CP-2
' D. Sequence and schedule motor controller installation work with other work to minimize possibility of damage and
soiling during remainder of construction period.
1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver motor controllers and components properly packaged in factory-fabricated type containers.
B. Store motor controllers and components in original packaging and in a clean, dry space; protect from weather and
construction traffic.
' C. Handle motor controllers and components carefully to avoid breakages, impacts, denting and scoring finishes. Do
not install damaged equipment;replace and return damaged units to equipment manufacturer.
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for
storage,and are identified with labels describing contents.
' 1. Spare Fuses and Incandescent Indicating Lamps: Furnish 1 spare for every 5 installed units,but not less than 1
set of 3 of each kind.
1.09 MAINTENANCE STOCK
A. Maintenance Stock,Fuses: Refer to Section 16477,"Fuses"for spare fuse requirement.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
' 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide motor controllers of one of the following (for
each type and rating of motor controller):
1. Allen-Bradley Co.
2. General Electric Co.;Electrical Distribution and Control Division.
3. Challenger.
4. Cutler-Hammer,Eaton Corp.
5. Siemens Energy and Automation Co.
6. Square D Company.
2.02 MOTOR CONTROLLERS,GENERAL
A. Coordinate the features of each motor controller with the ratings and characteristics of the supply circuit,the motor,
the required control sequence,the duty cycle of the motor, drive,and load,and the pilot device, and control circuit
affecting controller functions. Provide controllers that are horsepower rated to suit the motor controlled.
B. Provide contacts that open each ungrounded connection to the motor.
C. Overload Relays: Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristic. Provide with heaters or
sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of the specific motor to which connected with
appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
16481-3 No.99132-CP-2
2.03 MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS '
A. Description: Provide NEMA ICS2, general purpose, Class A with quick-make, quick-break toggle action and
overload element. Enclose controller unit suitable for flush mounting for interior use and a NEMA 4 enclosure for
exterior use;provide stainless steel plate.
B. Fractional HP Manual Motor Controllers: Provide single-phase fractional HP manual motor controllers, of sizes
and ratings indicated. Equip with one-piece melting alloy type thermal units. Controller to become inoperative
when thermal unit is removed. Provide controllers with double break silver alloy contact,visible form both sides of
controller,with red pilot lights,and switch capable of being padlocked-OFF.
2.04 MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Description: Provide NEMA ICS2, Class A, full-voltage, non-reversing, across-the-line, magnetic controller,
except where another type is indicated.
B. Control Circuit: 120 V. Provide control power transformer integral with controller where no other supply of 120 V
control power to controller is indicated. Provide control power transformer with adequate capacity to operate ,
connected pilot,indicating and control devices,plus 100 percent spare capacity.
C. Provide full voltage non-reversing magnetic controller starters with thermal overload protection and exterior manual
reset. Mount starters located indoors in a NEMA 1 enclosure and mount starters located outdoors in a NEMA 4
enclosure. Equip all starters with auxiliary contacts as noted in equipment schedule,red"on"pilot light and"hand-
off-auto"control switch.
D. Control Relays: Provide horsepower rated relay with 30 amp contact rating equal to square D Class 8501 Series
with NEMA rated enclosure as required.
E. Combination Controller. Factory assembled combination controller and disconnect switch with or without ,
overcurrent protection as indicated:
1. Fusible Disconnecting Menus: NEMA KSI,heavy duty,fusible switch type, fused or non-fused as indicated,
quick-make,quick-break switch,with rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses indicated. Select and size fuses
to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 947-4-1, as certified by a Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory.
2. Non-fusible Disconnect: NEMA KS 1,heavy-duty,non-fusible switch.
3. Circuit-Breaker Disconnect: NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector with field-adjustable short-circuit trip
coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.
4. For fused switches;provide rejection-type fuse clips and fuses rated as indicated.
5. Switches andr fiises,are specified in Section-16475, "Overcurrem Protective Devices". Interlock switch with
unit cover or door.
F. Overload Relay: Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristic. Provide with heaters or
sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of specific motor to which they connect, and with
appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide factory installed in controller enclosure, except as otherwise indicated. Where separately
mounted,provide NEMA Type 1 enclosure,except as otherwise indicated.
B. Pushbutton Stations,Pilot Lights,and Selector Switches: Provide NEMA ICS 2,heavy-duty type. ,
16481-4 No.99132-CP-2
' C. Stop and Lockout Pushbutton Station: Provide momentary-break pushbutton station with a factory-applied hasp
arranged so a padlock can be used to lock the pushbutton in the depressed position with the control circuit open.
D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.
E. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired
connection;arranged to operate on phase failure,phase reversal,current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent,or loss
' of supply voltage. Provide adjustable response delay.
F. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired
connection;arranged to operate on phase failure,phase reversal,current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent,or loss
of supply voltage. Provide adjustable response delay.
2.06 ENCLOSURES
A. Description: Provide flush or surface-mounted cabinets as indicated. For individually mounted motor controllers
and control devices, comply with NEMA Standard 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts
Maximum)". Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosures,except as otherwise indicated.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 3R.
2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 4.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 SITE EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which motor controllers are to be installed, and notify Architect/Engineer in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. General:
1. Select features of each motor controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and
motor:
a. Required control sequence.
b. Duty cycle of motor,drive,and load.
C. Configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.
' 2. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
B. Manual Controllers: Use for fractionaly-horsepower,single-phase motors,except as indicated.
C. Pushbutton Stations: Except as otherwise indicated, momentary-contact, start-stop units. Provide in covers of
magnetic controllers for manually started motors where indicated,and connect start contact in parallel with sealing
auxiliary contact for low-voltage protection.
D. Hand-off-automatic (HOA) Selector Switches: Except as otherwise indicated, install in covers of manual and
magnetic controllers of motors started and stopped by automatic controls or interlocks with other equipment. Make
control connections so only the manual and automatic control devices that have no safety functions will be bypassed
when the switch is in the hand position. Connect motor-control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for
safety type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload
16481-5 No.99132-CP-2
protectors. Make control-circuit connections to a hand-off-automatic switch or to more than one automatic control
device in accordance with an indicated wiring diagram or one that is manufacturer approved.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install independently mounted motor-control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Location: Locate controllers within sight of motors controlled,unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install motor controllers where indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions,
and with recognized industry practices, complying with applicable requirements of NEC, UL, and NEMA
standards,to insure that products fulfill requirements.
C. Mounting:
1. For control equipment at walls,bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to
wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks conforming to Section 16050 "Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods."
2. Install freestanding equipment on concrete housekeeping bases conforming to Division 3 Section 03300 "Cast-
in-Place Concrete".
D. Motor-Controller Fuses: Install fuses,of size indicated,in each fusible disconnect switch,if any.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify motor-control components and control wiring in accordance with Section 16195 "Electrical Identification".
3.05 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between motor control devices and control/indicating devices except as indicated and as specified in
Section 16120, "Wires and Cables",for hard-wired connections.
B. Install wiring in enclosures neatly bundled,trained,and supported.
C. Connect hand-off automatic switch and other automatic control devices where available.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only the manual and automatic control devices that have no safety
functions when switch is in hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with motor-control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety-type ,
control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload
protectors.
3.06 GROUNDING
A. Provide equipment grounding connections for motor controller equipment as indicated. Tighten connections to
comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.
3.07 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten connectors and terminals, including bus joints,mounting, screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated,
tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B.
16481-6 No.99132-CP-2
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prior to energization of motor controller equipment, check circuitry for electrical continuity. Also check with
' ground resistance tester for proper values of phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels of
feeders,components and control circuits to ensure requirements are fulfilled. Log that data and submit to Engineer.
B. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirements.
C. Testing: After completion of installation of motor controller and electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance in accordance with requirements.
' 1. Procedures: Perform visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in META ATS, Sections 7.5,
7.6,7.16. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then re-test to demonstrate compliance; otherwise,
remove malfunctioning units and replace with new units,and re-test to demonstrate compliance.
' 3.09 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust operating mechanisms,where necessary,for free mechanical movement.
LB. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt and debris. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original
finishes. Clean devices internally,using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 16481
' 16481-7 No.99132-CP-2
SECTION 16515
LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Section apply to this Section:
1. Section 16050: 'Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 8 Section 08520: For Material Finishes/Color Schedule. Architectural Details of Construction
Category 1-4.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section includes lighting fixtures, lamps, ballasts, emergency ballasts, emergency fixtures and accessories.
' Extent,location,and details of lighting fixture work are indicated on drawings and in schedules.
B. Types of lighting fixtures in this section include the following:
' 1. Fluorescent.
2. Incandescent.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. "Fixture": A complete lighting unit,exit sign,or emergency lighting unit. Fixtures include lamps and parts required
to distribute light, position and protect lamps and connect lamps to power supply. Internal battery-powered exit
signs and emergency lighting units also include a battery and the means for controlling and recharging the battery.
Emergency lighting units include ones with and without integral lamp heads.
' B. "Average Life": The time after which 50 percent fails and 50 percent survives under normal conditions.
' C. "Emergency Lighting Unit": A fixture with integral emergency battery-powered supply and the means for
controlling and charging the battery. It is also known as an emergency light set.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections:
t1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions on each type building lighting
fixture and component describing lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units. In the material list required in
Division 1,list the manufacturer for each fixture type and arrange Product Data for fixtures in order of fixture
1 designation. Include data on features and accessories and the following:
a. Outline drawings indicating dimensions and principal features of fixtures.
' b. Battery and charger data for emergency lighting units.
16515-1 No.99132-CP-2
2. Shop Drawings: Submit detailing nonstandard fixtures and indicating dimensions, weights, method of field
assembly,components,features and accessories.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for lighting fixtures showing connections to electrical power '
panels, switches, dimmers, controllers, and feeders. Differentiate between portions of wiring which are
manufacturer-installed and portions which are field-installed.
4. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each lighting fixture and accessory; including
"trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include that data, product data, and shop drawings in Operating,
Maintenance and Warranty Data Manual in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced and regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting fixtures
of sizes,types and ratings required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Engage a firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with ,
lighting fixture work similar to that required for this project.
C. Codes and Standards:
I. National Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority
having jurisdiction and NEC Articles 220, 410, and 510 as applicable to installation, and construction of
interior building lighting fixtures. '
2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds Pub/No.'s LE 1 and LE 2
pertaining to lighting equipment. ,
3. IES Compliance: Comply with IES RP-1 pertaining to office lighting practices and RP-15,regarding selection
of illuminable values for interior office lighting.
4. Electrical Component Standards: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and with UL standards,
including UL 486A and B,pertaining to interior lighting fixtures. Provide lighting fixtures and components
which are UL-listed and labeled
5. Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures, emergency lighting units, and accessory components specified in this
Section that are"Listed"and"Labeled"for their indicated use and installation conditions on project:
a. The terms"Listed"and"Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code,Article 100.
6. CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers
Association standards and carry the CBM label.
7. Fixtures for Hazardous Locations: Conform to UL 844. Provide units that have Factory Mutual Engineering
and Research Corporation(FEV1)certification for indicated class and division of hazard
D. Coordinate fixtures, mounting hardware, and trim with ceiling system and other items, including work of other
trades,required to be mounted on ceiling or in ceiling spaces.. ,
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver lighting fixtures in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings,which properly protect fixtures from damage
or construction dust. Retain covers on fixtures until after the rooms have been cleaned
B. Store lighting fixtures in original packaging. Store inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture,
soiling,extreme temperatures,humidity,laid flat and blocked off ground.
16515-2 No.99132-CP-2
C. Handle lighting fixtures carefiilly to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged
units or components;replace with new.
' 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate with other work including wires/cables,electrical boxes and fittings,and raceways,to properly interface
installation of lighting fixtures with other work.
B. Sequence lighting installation with other work to minimise possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of
construction.
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide extra materials as described below:
1. Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to 5%,but not less than 4 lamps in each case,of each type and
size lamp used in each type fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space.
' B. Provide (fiunish and install) extra emergency ballasts, matching products installed, as described below, packaged
with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents for installation at
locations to be designated in the field during construction as required:
' 1. Provide a quantity of 1 of each type of emergency ballast.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Batteries: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to replace
rechargeable system batteries that fail in materials and workmanship within the specified warranty period.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
S2.01 MANUFACTURERS
' A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products as shown on the Light Fixture Schedule:
1. Fixtures. Refer to Light Fixture Schedule on the drawings.
' 2. Lamps: Provide lamps manufactured by: G.E.,Philips,Osram Sylvania,or Venture.
3. Ballasts: Provide ballasts manufactured by: G.E.,Advance, Jefferson,Magnetek,Valmont,EBT, or Osram
Sylvania.
4. Emergency Ballasts: Provide ballasts as manufactured by Bodine,IOTA,Prescolite,or an approved equal.
2.02 FIXTURES AND FIXTURE COMPONENTS,GENERAL
A. General: Provide lighting fixtures,of sizes,types,voltages and ratings indicated,complete with but not limited to,
' housings, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, energy efficient ballasts, starters and wiring. Ship fixtures factory-
assembled, with parts required for a complete installation. Design fixtures with metal parts grounded as common
unit,and so constructed as to dampen ballast generated noise. Also include the following:
1. Provide recessed incandescent light fixtures thermally protected.
2. Provide exterior fixtures under soffits with,damp location label.
3. Provide exterior fixtures not under soffits with wet location label.
16515-3 No.99132-CP-2
4. Wiring: Provide electrical wiring within fixture suitable for connecting to branch circuit wiring as follows: ,
a. NEC Type AF for 120 volt,minimum No. 18 AWG.
B. Metal Parts: Free from burrs,sharp corners and edges. ,
C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel,except as indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
D. Doors,Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions,
and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors,frames,lenses,diffusers,and other pieces to
prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position.
E. Reflect Surfaces: Minimum reflectance as follows,except as otherwise indicated:
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
3. Diffuser Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. ,
F. Control Media:
1. Lenses,Diffusers,Covers and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic,except as other indicated.
a. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV
radiation.
b. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch(3 mm)minimum;except where greater thickness is indicated. Provide lens
with a mass density of 10 ounces per square foot minimum 1
2. Louvers: A 3"louver nominal depth(of louver)shall be not less than 2 5/8". A 4"louver nominal depth(of
louver)shall be not less than 3 5/8".
G. Fluorescent Fixtures: Conform to UL 1570.
1. Sound Transmission Class(STC): Conform to ADC Standard AD 63.
2. Supply Units: Equip with slots in one or both side trims and join with air-diffuser boot assemblies.
3. Heat Removal Units: Provide an air path through lamp cavity.
4. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of return air volume. ,
5. Static Fixtures: Slots blanked,with fixture appearance matching active units.
H. Incandescent Fixtures: Conform to UL 1571.
I. Exit Signs: Conform to UL 924 and the following:
1. Sign Colors: Conform to local code.
2. Minimum Height of Letters: Conform to local code.
3. Arrows: Include as indicated.
4. Lamps for AC Operation: Light-emitting diodes(LED),70,000 hours minimum rated life. '
J. Self-Powered Exit Signs(Battery Type): Integral automatic high/low trickle charger in self-contained power pack.
1. Battery: Sealed,maintenance-free,nickel cadmium type with special warranty.
K. Emergency Fluorescent Power Supply Unit: Conform to UL 924.
1. Internal Type: Self-contained,modular,battery-inverter unit factory mounted within fixture body.
a. Test Switch and LED Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling
space.
16515-4 No.99132-CP-2
b. Battery: Sealed,maintenance-free,nickel-cadmium type with minimum 5-year nominal life.
c. Charger: Fully automatic,solid-state,constant-current type.
d. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of
nominal voltage or below. Relay disconnects lamp and battery and automatically recharges when normal
voltage is restored.
2. External Type: Self-contained,modular,battery-inverter unit.
a. Test Switch and LED Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without entering ceiling space.
b. Battery: Sealed,maintenance-free,nickel-cadmium type with minimum 5-year nominal life.
c. Charger. Fully automatic,solid-state,constant-current type.
d. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamps on when supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of
' nominal voltage or below. Battery automatically recharges when normal voltage is restored.
3. Emergency Ballasts: See 2.04 below.
' 2.03 LAMPS
A. Comply with ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp.
B. Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color-Rendering Index (CRI): 3500 K and 85 CRI, except as
otherwise indicated.
C. Noncompact Fluorescent Lamp Life: Rated average is 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start when used on rapid start
circuits.
D. Provide lamps as follows:
1. Provide incandescent lamps inside frosted and 2500 hour rated.
2. Provide fluorescent lamps of rapid start,types and[warm white]colors or as indicated.
3. Provide 130 volt rated incandescent lamps.
2.04 BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent Ballasts:
1. Unless otherwise indicated in the lighting fixture schedule,provide electronic,integrated circuit,solid state,
full-light output,energy efficient,high frequency ballasts,for use on 265 mA rapid start T-8, lamps. Provide
ballasts compatible with lamps and lamp combinations to which connected.
2. Provide ballasts UL listed,ETL certified,Class"P",CBM labeled.
3. Provide multi-lamp ballasts for 1-,2-,3-,or 4-lamp combinations, as required by the fixture described in the
Lighting Fixture Schedule. Ensure lamp-ballast connection method does not reduce normal rated life of
ballasts.
' 4. Provide ballasts designed to operate the number of lamps and length of lamps specified.
5: Provide-ballasts with an"A"sound rating or better.
16515-5 No.99132-CP-2
6. Provide ballasts used in exterior applications with a minimum starting temperature of minus 26°F unless ,
otherwise specified. Provide interior ballasts with a minimum starting temperature of 50°F.
7. Provide all electronic ballasts with less than 20 percent total harmonic distortion, and a third-harmonic
distortion less than 10 percent.
8. Provide ballasts with a minimum ballast factor of 0.90.
9. Provide ballasts with a nominal power factor 0.90 or higher. ■
10. Provide ballasts with a maximum lamp current crest factor of 1.7.
11. Provide ballasts that provide normal rated life and lumen output for the lamp specified.
12. Provide ballasts that meet or exceed FCC regulations Part 18.
13. Provide ballasts that conform to FCC Regulations,Part 15,Subpart J for electromagnetic interference.
14. Provide ballasts that conform to IEEE C62.41, Category A, for resistance to voltage surges for normal and ,
common modes.
15. Provide ballast that have a lamp flicker less that 5 percent.
16. Provide ballasts with a minimum 5 year(not pro-rated)warranty.
17. Provide dimming ballasts as noted in the Light Fixture Schedule.
B. Emergency Ballasts:
1. Provide emergency battery ballasts for fluorescent lamps capable of operating one or two fluorescent lamps as
noted below for 90 minutes while in emergency mode. Provide ballasts,UL listed for installation on top of or
remote from or within the fixture. Provide a warranty(not pro-rata) for a full five (5) years. Equip with a '
solid state charger, a field replaceable high-temperature, maintenance free nickel-cadmium battery and test
switch. Provide voltage rating specified. Mount in one metallic case with wiring connections field ready for
hook-up. Manufacturer. Bodine Model#B50,or equals by IOTA or Prescolite.
Lamp Type watts Minimum Lumen Output in Emergency
a. T8 single F032 1100 lumens evenly divided for two
or bi pin lamps.
2.05 LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPES
A. General: Various fixture types required are indicated in,the Light Fixture Schedule. Review architectural drawings
and specifications to verify ceiling types,modules and suspension systems appropriate to installation.
1. Traffer style fixture housings(2'x4',2'x2', 1'x4', 1'x1',ETC.)shall be factory painted on all surfaces.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION '
A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed,and substrate for supporting lighting
fixtures. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
16515-6 No.99132-CP-2
' 3.02 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated. Set units plumb, square, and level with ceilings and
walls and secure in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC,
NECA's "Standard of Installation", NEMA standards, with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting
fixtures fulfill requirements,and with Shop Drawings. Support fixtures in accordance with requirements of Section
16050,"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
B. Light fixture types are indicated by a capital letter next to the fixture. Small letters indicate switching patterns and
numbers indicate circuit connection. Any fixtures not typed shall be assumed to be the same as adjacent fixtures or
fixtures in like areas in the building.
C. Install an accessible feed-through junction box with code approved wiring from the junction box to the light fixture
where fixtures are not approved for feed through wiring.
D. Install THHN 90°C wire minimum for wiring entering the ballast chamber such as pendant wiring, whips, flexible
cords,or through ballast chambers in continuous row fixtures.
' E. Provide fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers to properly support fixture weight. Submit design of
hangers,method of fastening,other than indicated or specified herein,for review by Architect/Engineer.
F. Install flush mounted fixtures to eliminate light leakage between fixture frame and finished surface.
G. Provide plaster frames for recessed fixtures installed in other than suspended grid type acoustical ceiling systems.
' Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during handling.
H. Fasten fixtures securely to structural supports and ensure that pendant fixtures are plumb and level. Do not support
' fixtures from the ceiling system. Provide individually mounted pendant fixtures longer than 2 feet with twin stem
hangers. Provide stem hanger with ball aligners and provisions for minimum 1" vertical adjustment. Mount
continuous rows of fixtures with an additional stem hanger greater than number of fixtures in the row.
I. Connectors: Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing
requirements are not indicated,tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL
' Stds 486A and B,and the National Electrical Code.
J. Support surface mounted fixtures greater than 2 feet in length at a point in addition to the outlet box fixture stud
K. Support for Recessed and Semi-recessed Grid-Type Fluorescent Fixtures: Units may be supported only from
manufacturer approved suspended ceiling support system. Where fixtures are Install in ceiling but not supported by
ceiling and,provide a support system rods or channels wires at a minimum of 4 rods or wires or 2 channels for each
fixture,located not more than 6 inches(150 mm)from fixture comers:
1. Install support clips for recessed ceiling grid fixtures, securely fastened to ceiling grid members, at or near
each fixture comer. Provide clips that also meet acceptance of local codes and jurisdictions.
2. Fixtures of sizes less than Ceiling Grid: Install a minimum of 4 rods or wires for each fixture and locate at
comer of ceiling grid where fixture is located. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels. Fixtures
' of Sizes Less than Ceiling Grid: Center in acoustical panel. Support fixtures independently with at least two
3/4-inch(20-mm)metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
L. Support for Suspended Fixtures: Brace pendants and rods over 48 inches (1200 mm) long to limit swinging.
Support stem-mounted, single-unit, suspended fluorescent fixtures with twin-stem hangers. For continuous rows,
use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of chassis,including
one at each end.
' M. Lamping: Where specific lamp designations are not indicated,lamp units according to manufacturer's instructions.
16515-7 No.99132-CP-2
3.03 GROUNDING/CONNECTIONS ,
A. Provide equipment grounding connections for lighting fixtures as indicated. Tighten electrical connections and
terminals,including grounding connections,according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening valves. Where '
manufacturer's torque-tightening valves are not indicated, use those to comply as specified in UL Std 486A and
UL486B to assure permanent and effective grounds.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B. Give advance notice of dates and times for field tests.
C. Provide instruments to make and record test results.
D. Tests: Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits have been energized '
with normal power source. Interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper operation of emergency lighting
installation. Include the following information in tests of emergency lighting equipment: ,
1. Duration of supply.
2. Low battery voltage shutdown.
3. Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
4. Low supply voltage transfer.
E. Replace or repair malfimctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate
properly.
F. Report results of tests. '
G. Replace fixtures that show evidence of corrosion during Project warranty period.
H. Replace defective and burned out lamps for a period of one year following the Date of Substantial Completion. '
I. At Date of Substantial Completion,replace lamps in lighting fixtures which are observed to be noticeably dimmed
after Contractor's use and testing,as judged by Architect/Engineer.
1. Refer to Division 1 sections for the replacement/restoration of lamps in lighting fixtures, where used for ,
temporary lighting prior to Date of Substantial Completion.
3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and construction debris after completion of installation. Clean fingerprints and
smudges from lenses. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.
C. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION ,
A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures,and after building circuitry has been energized,apply electrical
energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfimctioning units
at site,then re-test to demonstrate compliance;otherwise,remove and replace with new units,and proceed with re-
testing-
END OF SECTION 16515 ,
16515-8 No.99132-CP-2 t
SECTION 16721
REMODELED FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
A. Provide an extension from the existing Simplex #4004 hard-wired fire alarm system as shown on the drawings.
' Provide new fire alarm system as an addressable true-alarm microprocessor based unit when new is indicated.
B. System modifications and extension work includes devices such as area heat and smoke detectors, duct smoke
detectors,audible/visual horn strobes,wiring,etc.and as indicated on the drawings.
' C. Program or reprogram the fire alarm control panel and certify the new work using the services of the manufacturer's
representative or other approved agency.
D. Provide new devices as indicated on plan to match existing. Provide wiring to meet codes including plenum when
required.
' E. Acceptable manufacturers:
1- Simplex$4098-9402 heat detectors 135°and rate-of-rise.
2. Simplex#4098-9601 smoke detectors;
3. Simplex#4098-9681 duct smoke detectors.
END OF SECTION 16721
' 16721-1 No.99132-CP-2
SECTION 16730
REMODELED CLOCK AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS
' A. Extend the relocated and added clocks and bells to the existing simplex clock terminal cabinet shown. The existing
master clock system is located in the Administration Office of the main level. Verify at site. Extension from the
existing clock and program circuits in the building near the new clock locations and bell is permissible if feasible.
Provide clock wiring in conduit.
' B. Provide new clocks and program bells at locations shown that match and are compatible with the existing Simplex
system.
END OF SECTION 16730
S
' 16730-1 No.99132-CP-2
SECTION 16741
REMODELED TELEPHONE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
A. Provide conduit,box,and revised system wiring for all new telephone locations indicated on the Drawings.
B. Provide cover plates and devices for all new telephone outlet boxes, using the same material and finish as for
switches and receptacle,except provide telephone outlets that match existing outlets.
C. Provide all conduit and wire to connect telephone outlets shown with existing terminal board with out any splices.
D. Field verify location, connection and cable requirements of the existing telephone system prior to bids, so all costs
are included in bid.
E. Existing telephone equipment being removed shall be labeled and stored for reinstallation in remodeled areas.
F. Contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete working telephone at each new location shown on the
plans.
END OF SECTION 16741
1
' r 16741-1 No.99134-CP-2
SECTION 16743
REMODELED DATA WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
' PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections,apply to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:
' 1. Section 16010: 'Basic Electrical Requirements".
2. Section 16050: "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".
' C. Related Sections:
1. Section 16110: "Raceways".
2. Section 16120: "Conductors and Cables".
3. Section 16123: "Optical Fiber Cabling Systems".
4. Section 16135: "Cabinets,Boxes and Fittings".
5. Section 16139: "Cable Trays".
6. Section 16140: "Wiring Devices".
7. Section 16195: "Electrical Identification".
' 1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes data systems cables, terminals, connectors,patch cords, and patch panels designed and used
for electrical transmission and distribution in data circuits including:
' 1. Unshielded Twisted Pair(UTP)Cable:Data-Category 5;plenum rated.
2. Optical fiber(FO)cable,plenum rated.
3. Shielded cable.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
' A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections:
' 1. Product Data: Submit for voice and data transmission media.
2. Product Certificates: Submit product certificates signed by the voice and data system manufacturers,
certifying that the cables are suitable for the connected equipment as described in Quality Assurance below.
3. Shop Drawings: Include material technical information, proposed system termination map and fabrication
drawings. Technical information includes material physical and electrical characteristics, accessories and
' modifications, and installation instructions. Submit drawings for fabricated assemblies and equipment
modifications that clearly indicate material and methods:
a. Submittals: Provide submittals neatly bound in a three ring or comb type binder,with protective covers.
' The cover must identify the project,system,date and vendor name. The submittal shall consist of,but
not be limited to the following items:
16743-1 No.99132-CP-2
1) Title sheet showing the Contractor's name,address,phone number and date submitted. Provide
clear area on the title sheet for shop drawing review stamps.
2) Material list showing quantity,manufacturer and description of each item being famished. '
3) Drawings of terminal board layouts.
4) Riser diagrams showing all distribution equipment. '
5) Catalog sheets with complete technical data for each item being furnished.
6) Certificates indicating training and franchising of registered cabling systems.
7) Reference letters as described in part 1.03 above.
b. Shop drawings shall be clearly legible. Poorly made reproductions of originals will not be accepted and
will be returned without approval.
C. Shop drawings not including all of the above listed items will be returned without approval. ,
d. Shop drawings shall be submitted within 2 weeks after award of contract. The Contractor shall neither
order equipment nor proceed with installation until shop drawings are approved by the Architect. '
4. Test Reports: Compile test data specified and submit in binder with Owner's Operating, Maintenance and
Warranty Data Manual. '
5. Evidence of Listing: Of products specified to be listed in the Quality Assurance Article.
6. Record Drawings: Wire management directory including field termination map,sequence lists,horizontal run
length and outlet identification. Indicate the installed system wiring routes and equipment locations.
Computer draft drawings with one reproducible copy stored in a tube and turned over to the Owner with two
copies and data disk inserted in the Owner's Operating,Maintenance and Warranty Data Manual; '
Architectural floor plans will be made available on disc,if requested.
7. Owner's Operating,Maintenance and Warranty Data Manual: See Division 1 for the general structure of the '
manual. Provide information on each piece of equipment which includes record drawings,test report, copies
of warranties and sources of service. Include a descriptive outline of the system and a troubleshooting guide
for common system related failures. Other information as defined in various paragraphs of this specification is
also included. '
8. Instructions and User Orientation: Provide 4 hours of instruction with a designated representative of the
Owner concerning system installation and administrative procedures. Demonstrate the essential features of the '
system and reviewing system documentation. Arrange sessions with the schedule established at the
convenience of the Owner's representative. As part of the instruction,-tum over the Owner's manual with
pertinent information identified, including equipment locations and relations to the Drawings. Session is
conducted by the site group leader in charge of the installation.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Engage firms experienced and regularly engaged in manufacture and supply of ,
system and components and capacities,whose products have been in satisfactory similar service for not less than 3
years. Supplier: Authorized by the manufacturer(s)to conduct business in the area of the installation. '
16743-2 No.99132-CP-2 '
B. Installer's Qualifications: Licensed to install low-voltage systems in the State of Minnesota. Engage installer
familiar and experienced with connections and terminations required and who has at least 5 years of successful
installation and experience a minimum of 4 projects of this type. The Owner has the right to contact these previous
customers for verification of credibility as a low-voltage installer.
C. Codes and Standards
' 1. Electrical Component Standard: Provide work complying with applicable requirements of NFPA 70"National
Electrical Code."
2. Toxicity: Comply with applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of
materials used in data transmission media.
3. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standard 910"Test Method for Fire and Smoke
' Characteristics of Cables Used in Air Handling Spaces." Provide products that are UL-listed and labeled for
such use.
4. Electronic Industries Association Compliance: Comply with EIA/TIA-568-A "Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard".
' 5. Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) Telecommunications Distribution Methods
Manual,4s'ed.,Tampa,FL: BICSI, 1993.
6. EIA/TU-568-91: Standard for Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring, including the following
' Bulletins:
a. TSB 36-91.
' b. TSB 40-92.
C. TSB 53-92.
7. EIA/TIA-56-90: Standard for Commercial Buildings for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
' 8. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are"Listed"and"Labeled":
a. The terms"Listed"and"Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,Article 100.
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
' A. Deliver cable factory-packaged in containers or reels. Store in clean dry space and protect products from damaging
fumes and traffic. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid damage.
' PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products of one of the following(for each type of
product):
' 1. Wire/cabling:Category 5 for Data;8 strand fiber optic cable(OFNP)for data backbone.
a. Alpha Communications.
' b. Lucent Technologies Network Systems.
c. Belden Div;Cooper Industries.
d. Berk-Tek.
e. Comscope Corp.
16743-3 No.99132-CP-2
f. Guardian Products Division,General Cable Corporation. '
g. West Penn.
h. Wiremold Interlink Technoligies.
2. Connectors: '
a. Twisted Pair:Category 5 for Data:
1) AMP,Inc. '
2) Lucent Technologies Network Systems.
3) Hubbell Premises Wiring,Inc.
4) Leviton Condumex.
5) Panduit.
6) SPC Technologies.
7) Thomas&Betts Corp.
8) Wiremold Interlink Technologies. '
b. Fiber Optics: Category 5 for data shall be`SC'(TTA-568SC)Type Connector with Ceramic Ferrule:
1) AMP,Inc. ,
2) Lucent Technologies Network Systems.
3) Hubbell Premises Wiring,Inc.
3. Distribution Racks:
a. ANY,Inc. '
b. AT&T Network Systems.
C. Homaco.
d. Hubbell Premises Wiring,Inc. ,
e. Leviton.
f Ortronics/Krone.
g. Panduit.
h. SPC Technologies. ,
i. Thomas&Betts Corporation.
j. Americable.
4. Provide one(1)multi-mode 8 strand fiber optic(OFNP)cable,plenum rated,between MDF and IDF locations '
as shown on the drawings.
5. Terminate (fiber optic) data backbone cabling in pre-loaded `SC' type snap-in connector panels installed in '
rack mounted fiber distribution center(FDC).
2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS '
A. General: Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match components
and interconnections for optimum.future performance.
B. Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated,quantity of spare fibers and conductor pairs in cables,positions '
in patch panels,cross connects,terminal strips,and space in backbone cable trays and wireways shall be adequate to
accommodate a 20 percent future increase in active workstations. ,
2.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: The extent of the voice and data wiring distribution system is indicated by the Drawings and Details,and ,
is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, a complete structural voice and data cabling system as
indicated herein.
167434 No.99132-CP-2 '
' B. Include the following:
1. Provide one (1) four(4) pair, 24 gauge, untwisted shielded pair(UTP) Category 5 EIA/TIA-568A, TSB 36
' plenum rated data cables and terminations as indicated:
a. Amp,Inc.No.569014,or equal by listed approved manufacturers.
2. Coverplates: Provide stainless steel.
3. Terminate each Category 5 station cable at equipment rack on a Category 5 RJ45 110 Style Insulation
t Displacement Connector(IDC)jack terminated EIA/TIA-568A, TSB 40 jack inserted into 48 port 110 style
modular discreet wire patch panel.
a. Provide a 48 port 110 style modular discreet wire patch panel in quantities as required at IDF future
' HUB location. (See data communication rack and HUB locations and details on Plans.)
4. Provide one(1),8 strand fiber optic(OFNP)cable,plenum rated,between equipment rack locations as shown
' on the drawings.
5. Terminate (fiber optic) data backbone cabling in pre-loaded `SC' type snap-in connector panels installed in
rack mounted fiber distribution center(FDC).
6. All sleeving and conduit stubs required for communication cable routing as shown on the drawings or as
indicated herein, shall be the responsibility of the voice/data contractor unless noted specifically otherwise.
' Coordinate location, size and quantity of sleeves and conduit stubs with all trades prior to commencement of
work and including these costs in the voice/data work. Fire seal all stubs and sleeves per code or as indicated.
e 2.04 DATA TRANSMISSION MEDIA
A. General: Provide voice and data transmission media of manufacturer's standard materials as indicated by published
product information,designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer,for a complete installation and for
' applications that shall support Ethernet 10 Base T, Apple Talk and Future TP-PMD and 100 megabyte
transmission. Provide evidence of listing for all products as complying or exceeding Category 5 of EIA/TIA-568A.
' B. Conductors: Solid copper.
C. Cables: Provide factory-fabricated cables of sizes, characteristics, ratings, materials, and jacketing/sheathing as
indicated for applications indicated:
' 1. Furnish and install one(1),4 pair,24 gauge AWG unshielded twisted pair(UTP)solid center Category 5
plenum rated cable from each data outlet location indicated on drawings to the patch
' panels located at MDF/IDF locations respectively,indicated on Drawings.
2. In.addition,providecables that meet or exceed the following:
a. Test all 4 pair cables for Power Sum NEXT.
b. Co-extruded stripe on white commons for error free pair identification.
c. Attenuation: Meet or exceed EIA 568A Spec.
' d. Crosstalk: Meet or exceed EIA 568A Spec.
e. ACR: Worse case to meet or exceed EIA 568A Spec.
f. Color coded for easy identification.
16743-5 No.99132-CP-2
D. Modular Jacks: '
1. Category 5 Twisted Pair: Provide Black modular RJ45 110 style jacks for all data outlets.
E. Plates: Provide all data outlets connecting devices with plates matching the plates specified in Section 16140, '
"Wiring Devices"possessing the following construction features:
1. Material and Finish: .04 inch thick type 302 satin finished stainless steel in finished spaces and a galvanized '
steel plate in finished areas.
F. Equipment Rack: '
1. Provide a modular 84"high cable management equipment rack with cable management channels or brackets
and a six(6)receptacle multi-outlet assembly installed at bottom of rack at each Hub location indicated on the
drawings. Provide with two(2)center weighted shelf units and cable guides as required on outside edges and '
black in color. Manufacturer: BUD No.RR-1366,or approved equal.
a. Provide Category 5, rack mounted fiber distribution center (FDC) for termination of system backbone ,
cabling between IDF and MDF Hub locations.
G. Patch Cords: '
1. Provide 4 foot RJ45/RJ45 Category 5 patch cords and 10 foot RJ45/RJ45 workstation cords equal to the
number of data drops indicated plus 5 additional each length. Use keyed plugs for data service.
PART 3: EXECUTION '
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, and pathway elements to receive cable, and check raceways, cable trays, and other '
elements with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting
voice and data transmission media performance. Do not proceed with the installation work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Do not install material if debris has not been ,
removed and sanding operations are not complete.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install data transmission media in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in compliance '
with NEC. Use techniques,practices and methods that are consistent with Category 5 rating of components and that
assure Category 5 performance of completed and linked signal paths,end-to-end. Immediately bring to the attention '
of the Architect/Engineer,discrepancies in installation procedures.
B. Install tmis fission media in raceway and cable tray without damaging conductors,shield,or jacket.
Do not bend cable to smaller radii 8 times the cable diameter or the than minimum recommended by manufacturer
either in handling or installation. Ensure that medium manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions are not
exceeded. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling
compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Use pulling '
means, including fish tape,cable,rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips that will not damage media or raceway.
Provide 12"slack at each outlet end and 10'-0"slack at each rack end.
16743-6 No.99132-CP-2 '
' C. Install exposed cable(s), parallel and perpendicular to surface or exposed structural members, and follow surface
contours where possible. Allow adequate slack so that cable(s) are not damaged or taut. Bundle cables together.
Secure and support cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches(600 mm)and not more than 6 inches(150 mm)from
' cabinets,boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames and terminals. Do not support cables from ceiling support system.
Install per NEC.
D. No splices are allowed.
E. Use tap connectors that are compatible with media material.
' F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published
instruction or torque tightening values.
G. Horizontal sub system
1. General: Install wiring point-to-point from outlet to patch panel with no splices bridge taps. Install wire in a
manner that prevents damage to the conductors or insulation. Remove and replace cable that is kinked or
' abraded. Install all data(Category 5)wiring such that no more than 0.5 inches of cable insulation is removed
at any point of termination of each twisted pair.
' 2. Enclosed runs: Run cable in tray or raceway when provided for that purpose. Provide 4"of free cable coiled
in the outlet box.
3. Open runs: Run open cables along routes that are free from hazards and at least 5" above ceiling and light
' fixtures. Provide hardware to carry wiring at approximately 4'intervals. Secure structural numbers and per
NEC. Provide 2'of free cable above each outlet stubup. Utilize plenum rated cable above ceilings used as
return air plenums,in other environmental air handling chases and in riser passing through fire rated floors.
' H. Neatly secure all cable and loosely bundle,maintaining minimum distance requirements from potential sources of
Electro-Magnetic Field(EMF)and Radio Frequency Interference(RFI). References: EIA/TIA Bulletins TSB-36;
TSB-40;EIA/TIA-606;BICSI TDM Manual. Also reference UL,NEC and NFPA publications.
' I. Provide No. WM4048BF fittings for G4000 wiremold raceway assemblies when G4000 wiremold is used; See
Drawings for locations.
' J. Provide 48 port blank patch panel(s)at each[`future']data communication rack location indicated on Drawings that
will accept category 5 modular 110 Style jacks. RJ45 category 5 modular 110 Style jacks shall snap into blank
panels; AMP No.555524-1,or equivalent.
' K. Provide jack installation in pre-punched outlet opening in wiremold raceway assemblies; See Drawings for
configurations and locations.
L. Provide horizontal and vertical cable management brackets for dressing cable between each 48 port patch panel.
Manufacturer: Harris Deacon No. 11753219 and 11228-101,or approved equal.
' M. Provide 1 19"x 77"free standing equipment racks;Black in color. Manufacturer: Bud No.RR-1366,or
approved equal,one at each data communication rack location indicated on Drawings.
N. Label all station faceplates and patch panels as indicated in Section 16140"Wiring Devices"and indicate locations
' on record drawing submittal. Verify labeling with Owner. All plates to be stainless steel. Also,a Brothers labeler
may be used for telephone and data labels in lieu of"engraved". In addition,plastic coverplates may be used for
wiremold boxes to be compatible.
' O. Fire Stopping: Responsibility of the Installer, use caulk type or heat sensitive expanding fire stopping and meet
minimum requirements of NFDPA,NEC and UL standards and codes.
1
' 16743-7 No.99132-CP-2
P. Ground each equipment rack to building main service ground bus using a No. 4 AWG insulated green grounding '
conductor in conduit. Provide 3/4"plywood boards on walls of communication closets to 8'-0"high from 2"A.F.F.
painted with the fire resistant paint.
Q. Furnish and install a 4'-0" section of G4000 Wiremold with screw down cover at each voice/data communication '
rack location. Install Wiremold from ceiling to data communication rack for concealment of voice and data cabling.
Field verify exact location before installation.
R. Do not place horizontal telecommunications systems/wiring next to equipment that can generate ME. Keep
electrical branch feeders and circuits of interfering equipment separate from telecommunications systems. To avoid
electromagnetic interference,all pathways should provide clearances of at least: ,
1. 1.2 m or 4 ft from larger motors or transformers.
2. 30 cm or 1 R from conduit and cables used for electrical power distribution.
3. 12 cm or 5 inches from fluorescent lighting. '
4. Pathways should cross perpendicular to fluorescent lighting and power cables or conduits.
5. 61 cm or 24 inches between electrical power cables and telecommunications cables.
3.03 GROUNDING ,
A. Refer to EIA/TIA 607 and the National Electric Code. '
B. Bond all cabinets,racks,wire block frames and shields of shielded cable to grounding system
3.04 IDENTIFICATION '
A. Identify system components,wiring,racks,patch panels,punch down blocks,terminals,etc.according to
Section 16195: "Electrical Identification",or as indicated herein with a Brothers labeling machine. '
B. Submit a sample coverplate with jack installed and labeled and include an 8" length of cable terminated on each
jack.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL '
A. Prior to usage,test 100%of all UTP data station and backbone cables for electrical continuity and for short circuits. '
In addition, test the installation with a N icroTest, Wavetek tester, or approved equal, time domain reflectometer
with strip chart recording capability and anomaly resolution to within one foot in rims up to 1,000 feet in length.
Test all cable segments for faulty connectors, and terminations, and the integrity of the cable and its component
parts. Replace malfimctioning transmission media with new materials;then re-test until satisfactory performance is 1
achieved:
1. Provide the customer and engineer with a copy of the printed results of each station and backbone cable '
Reterminate and retest any cable that fails. If the cable does not pass,replace and retest. Submit the following
cable tests for review:
a. Cable length. '
b. Correct pair termination.
C. Crosstalk,both ends.
d. Pass/fail for 1OBaseT. '
3.06 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Installation Conditions: Do not install material until the proper environment is supported at the site. This includes, ,
but is not limited to,appropriate temperature,humidity and freedom from dust and debris.
16743-8 No.99132-CP-2 '
' 3.07 COORDINATION
A. Sequencing and Scheduling: Accomplish the work in a manner consistent with progress by other trades. Complete
work such that outlets are installed at approximately the same time as electrical devices.
' B. Coordination: Certain activities, such as pulling cable or hardware fabrication, may be accomplished by parties
other than the Installer. The Installer remains solely responsible for proper execution of this work.
' C. Contractor. Electrical Contractors that are part of this project provide assistance to the Installer in location and
utilizing outlet boxes,raceway,backboards and cable routes. Omit plates from outlets that are labeled inactive and
' provide blank plates at empty outlets.
D. Installer. Cooperate with other trades for proper anchorage,placement,and execution of work. Resolve conflicts in
work prior to installation.
' 3.08 DEMONSTRATION
' A. Subsequent to hook-ups of data transmission media, operate systems to demonstrate proper functioning. Replace
malfimctioning media with new materials,and then retest until satisfactory performance is achieved.
B. Documentation: Use the above time domain reflectometer to make a strip chart recording of transmission
' characteristics,wave form,and performance of all segments of the installation at the time of commissioning. Bind
the recordings in a cable record book indexed for easy reference during future maintenance operations and turn
book over to the Architect(Engineer or authorized representative.
' C. Provide the customer with a clean set of As-Built Drawings clearly indicating the locations of the data station cables
and the number assigned. Coordinate the cabling number scheme with the customer. Provide As-Built Drawings
that include all changes made during construction.
D. Provide a one (1) year cabling system warranty from the date of substantial completion as issued by a certificate
from the Architect on all labor and materials fiunished and installed to be free of defects. Any repairs of such
' defects will be at the cable installers expense.
3.10 CUSTOMER INSTRUCTION
' A. Provide instruction to a representative for the Owner on the following:
1. Labeling system and cross reference to documentation. Provide 2 hours.
' 2. Interpretation of cable test results. Provide 2 hours
3. Operation of the cable management software. Provide 5 hours
' END OF SECTION 16743
16743-9 No.99132-CP-2
SECTION 16771
REMODELED PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
A. Provide an extension to the existing Dukane public address and program system as noted herein and as shown on
the drawings.
' B. System modifications and extension work shall include new speakers and mounting hardware;call buttons,wiring,
etc.,and as indicated on the drawings.
' C. The existing Dukane P.A.system is located in the administration office area on the main level.
D. Provide all new round ceiling tile installation speakers as follows:
' 1. Soundolier T95-8 back box,or approved equal.
2. Soundolier 81-8 tile bridge,or approved equal.
' 3. Soundolier C 10 speaker with transformer with tax at 1/2, 1 and 2 watts,or approved equal.
4. Soundolier T51-8 round white steel baffle,or approved equal.
E. Provide new call buttons to mach existing and provide the same features as existing call buttons.
' F. Provide wire and cable to speakers as follows:
' 1. Conductors no smaller than 22 gage. Use jacketed shielded untamed solid copper conductors.
2. Use plenum rated cable.
' 3. Provide shielding of 34 gage tinned soft copper strands formed into a braid or approved equivalent foil type.
Provide shielding coverage on the conductor not less than 60 percent.
' 4. Provide paired cables with plastic jackets for cable not indicated to be not indicated to be in metal raceways.
Provide plenum rated where installed in air plenum ceilings.
G. Cable Manufacturers:
1. West Penn.
2. Belden.
' 3. Comscope.
4. Approved Equal.
' END OF SECTION 16771
16771-1 No.99132-CP-2
r
' SECTION 16780
REMODELED TELEVISION SYSTEMS
r
A. Provide extensions to the existing television system as noted herein and as shown on the drawings.
' B. System work includes new cable(s)from the existing new television head-end equipment(verify exact location with
Owner on site)to each of the classroom TV outlets and as indicated. Provide all jacks and plates and associated
splitters,etc.as required. Tapping of existing TV cable is permissible if feasible and performance is achieved.
' C. Cables are to be plenum rated and consist of multi-tap type RG61U 18 gauge quad shielded; West Penn#25Q841,
or equal by Belden,Comscope,and Mohawk,or approved equal.
rD. Provide splitters by Blonden-Tongue Laboratories,Winegard or approved equal.
E. Test: Demonstrate performance of TV cables to satisfaction of the Architect. If not adequate, convect until proper
' performance is achieved.
rEND OF SECTION 16780
1
r
1
i
1
r
1
1
1
1
16780-1 No.99132-CP-2
' SECTION 16995
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
' PART 1: GENERAL
' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
' Specification Sections,apply to this and all other Sections of Division 16.
B. This Section is Supplemental to Section-1700(Project Closeout) of this Project Manual.
' 1.02 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. In addition to requirements of Section 01700 of this Project Manual,complete,sign and date the following.
' 1. Preliminary checklist of items required for project completion:
a. Provide Operating,Maintenance and Warranty Data Manuals as per Division 1 and Section
16010.
b. Provide equipment submittals not received.
' C. Provide As-built Drawings in reproducible form as per Section 16010 and as noted in
individual sections.
' d. Provide Shop Drawings as indicated in the following specification sections:
16110 Raceways
' 16120 Conductors and Cables
16123 Optical Fiber Cabling Systems
16135 Cabinets,Boxes and Fittings
' 16140 Wiring Devices
16170 Circuit and Motor Disconnects
16195 Electrical Identification
16452 Grounding
' 16470 Panelboards
16475 Overcurrent Protective Devices
16477 Fuses
' 16478 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
16481 Motor Controllers
16515 Lighting Fixtures and Lamps
16721 Remodeled Fire Alarm Systems
' 16730 Remodeled Clock and Program Systems
16741 Remodeled Telephone System
16743 Remodeled Data Wiring Distribution Systems
' 16771 Remodeled Public Address Systems
16780 Remodeled Television Systems
16995-1 No.99132-CP-2
e. Provide test results for all testing as indicated in the following specification sections. '
16190 Supporting Devices
16470 Panelboards
16475 Overcurrent Protective Devices '
16478 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
16721 Remodeled Fire Alarm Systems
16730 Remodeled Clock and Program Systems '
16741 Remodeled Telephone Systems
16743 Remodeled Data Wiring Distribution Systems
16771 Remodeled Public Address Systems '
16780 Remodeled Television Systems
f. Provide demonstration and training as indicated in the following specification sections.
16478 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression '
16515 Lighting Fixtures
16721 Remodeled Fire Alarm Systems '
g. Provide the Owner all extra materials,spare parts,keys,etc.as indicated in the following
specification sections:
16477 Fuses
16478 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
16515 Lighting Fixtures '
16721 Remodeled Fire Alarm Systems
16743 Remodeled Data Wiring Distribution Systems
h. Provide guarantees/warranties as specified. ,
i. Provide typed Panelboard Schedules.
j. Provide labeling and nameplates of equipment as specified. '
k. Verify and coordinate fire alarm detection device types and quantities with local official. ,
1. Provide copy of walk-through report on fire alarm system by local official.
in. Provide copy of walk-through report on egress lighting system with local official. '
n. Provide touch-up painting to match original on all equipment scratched during installation.
o. Clean all lighting fixtures and equipment and remove all stickers. '
P. Provide guards on designated fire alarm devices and light fixtures.
q. Clean-up debris caused by electrical work.
1
16995-2 No.99132-CP-2 '
' Wold Architects and Engineers Project:
' Commission No.:
Date:
' Wold Architects and Engineers
305 St.Peter Street
St.Paul,Minnesota 55102
1
Name
Contractor Company
' Contractor Street Address
' City,State,Zip Code
' Contractor's Signature
' Date
' END OF SECTION 16995
16995-3 No.99134-CP-2